π•π•–π•£π•βœπ•€ π•Žπ• π•£π•π••
Menu
  • Home
  • About
  • Blog
  • Contact Verl Personally
  • Why We Donate
Menu

Category: Books

Great Eagle Book Three

Posted on December 21, 2025February 4, 2026 by Verl

IntroductionΒ  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Book one and two summaryΒ Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β 

 

PAGEΒ  5 Β  Β  Β  CHAPTER ONEΒ  Β  Β  Β  Β  The Black Feet

 

PAGE 15Β  Β  Β  CHAPTER TWO Β  Β  Β  Β  Celebrations in the village

 

PAGE 39Β  Β  Β  CHAPTER THREE Β  Β  Β  Adams first journey

 

PAGE 58Β  Β  Β  CHAPTER FOURΒ  Β  Β  Β  Dropping into California

 

PAGE 77Β  Β  Β  CHAPTER FIVE Β  Β  Β  Β  Hiding in the forest

PAGE 112Β  Β  CHAPTER SIX Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Enjoying the fruits of life

 

Great Eagle Book Three

Book, one opens after Dan traveled from Boston on the East Coast and heading toward the Pacific Ocean on the West Coast in the year of 1842.Β 

Our story follows the movements of Daniel Adam David Soloman as he was christened by his mother. Dan, as called by friends, traveled West after selling his family farm and his photography studio, which included the property obtained while working that business.Β 

Traveling along Dan faced those strangers that had watched him sale the things he owned. His travels led to encounters with those wanting to profit from his personal possessions and the first book explains those encounters. It is not necessary to read the first book to watch Dan control each situation and those desiring harm before reading book two or this book for the same reason you do not need to get comfortable reading this one it is just more fun that way.

In the first book, Dan meets a princess from the Paiute Indian Nation after spending days traveling and sharing meals with the tribe. The friendship, education, and love he gains are important, but you don’t need to read the previous books to understand his journey. While events in his past were educational, they served mainly as relaxation history. If you haven’t read the first two books, you will still learn about Dan’s possessions and friends without missing out on how he acquired them.Β 

Dan travels West and lives with the Piute Indians in the Nevada region West of Elko and East of Reno along the Truckee River. Dan is married to Mary who is a true princess with the ability of sightings into the future. Mary is pregnant now, and they are living with her Utes while waiting for the birth of Adam, their first son. Mary had told Dan that he would have a son for each of the names his mother had given to him at birth. Adam being the first middle name so naturally he is expecting without a doubt it will be a boy.

It was only a little strange that Dan had three friendly Mountain Lions (Eeny, Meeny, and Miny) finding after the mother died. He raised them from birth and had taught them each how to sit when told, to roar when told, and each had the ability to understand instructions in almost any language. The wet deer used her milk to nurse the young kittens grew to accept the kittens. Dans horse Shadow and the grey wolf Nuzzle had taken much longer to adjust to becoming friends with an enemy, but time heals the worst memories.

 

CHAPTER ONE

 

The black feet

 

Our story begins at the breakfast fire beside the Truckee River on Piute lands. When ten to twenty of the villagers are gathered around the fire pit every morning wanting to learn more about the white man’s God. This morning, unlike other days in the past, there was an uneasy sensation in the movements around the fire pit. Everyone seemed to have an ear toward the North. Those who were in the middle of a conversation stopped and were listening to something not understanding what was happening. Eeny, Meeny and Miny (Dans pet cougars) were growling and watching toward the North moving back and forth nervously. Nuzzle (Dans pet timber wolf) came running into camp barking, growling and the hair on his back was standing on end showing his readiness to fight.Β 

Mary ran out of the Teepee wanting to know what the problem was. All could hear shouting and yelling from a distance and the excitement was growing. The fear in the air was felt without the knowledge of why. I just held up my finger showing that we should listen.Β 

The awareness came like a rolling thunderstorm. I started yelling we are being attacked! Prepare everyone to fight. Mary, please help me get the Raven kite ready for immediate flight. Shadow was out in the meadow and as I yelled, she ran for camp.Β 

We must get the Raven ready for flight and not the Eagle. I had two kites however I felt the Eagle would not put fear in the enemy as the Raven would. I feel we must show them it was a bad omen. Fast Mary, we have little time. Nuzzle takes the cats to the edge of camp and protect us as we prepared for take-off, which was unnecessary as they were naturally born to protect us. Do not let anyone into our camp.Β 

As I pulled the kite behind Shadow and was aligning the kite the screaming and howling of those attacking became louder and the sound of fighting became closer. Noise from the guns, women screaming while running grabbing children. One Indian came into my side vision as I had leaned down to hook the rope. Turning and raising from a kneeling position I came up and under his arms Β  and I just shoved against the warrior’s chest. Falling backwards the warrior tripped over the rocks surrounding the fire pit and fell into the fire on his back. Sparks flew and the fire at once took hold of the man’s hair, but I was so busy hooking up the kite I lost track of the hand-to-hand fighting around me. I knew without looking that Mary had been firing a gun and was thankful having spent the time teaching her the use of my guns.

The sounds of the cats screaming, the wolf snarling, the warrior screams from the attacking animals were loud and boisterous. With all the fighting going on I managed to get the kite hooked to Shadow and managed to concentrate well enough to shout run Shadow run and as instructed many of times she started moving till she felt the rope tighten then without further word took off with increased speed till I was no longer running and sat back in kite. I could hear and see all the noise, screaming, fighting, guns and arrows, the sounds of battle, the kite was air born. Just barely off the ground and Indians with horses were trying to shoot me as I left the ground the thing that saved me was, they could not get close to me because on each side was a mountain lion running along beside of me. The horses were in no way getting close and they fought the riders throwing them, bucking, and pulling away. One rider who forced his horse got ready to shoot me with an arow and Meeny took him right off the back of the horse. The other warriors showing fear were getting away from me to avoid the fierce mountain lions.Β  I looked back over my shoulder as I left them behind seeing them running away from the meadow. Just as I released the rope holding me to Shadow. The kite lifted and as if God himself had a hand on it. As I gained speed the kite became stable, and the air lift was maximum giving me great visibility as only a morning in the mountains can.

Tuning as I climbed, I saw the Indians coming over the hill by the hundreds heading for our village. I knew that if something did not change, we would lose our village and our friends this morning. With a small tilt to one side, I headed toward the crest of the hill and leveled the wings as I got closer. The mass of fighters was coming over the top and heading down hill extremely fast and having practiced the call of the Raven I screamed. The men stopped and looked me in the eye, and I thought they would pour their rath at me and to my astonishment they stood still and just staired at me.

With the strange Raven overhead, the screaming of the bird directly at them, those who had been running toward the village stopped and looked up. The Raven was a sign of death and those watching and hearing turned and ran as fast as they could away from me. Men were jumping bushes, running into trees, and falling. The impact of what was happening became total chaos. Those that saw this great bird attacking and screaming dropped everything they had and ran away. It was unbelievable to those who saw it and the fighters that fell from the excitement created more confusion which gained as the fear grew. Some were on their hands and knees holding arms over head with hands outstretched as if I were a God to be feared. Those in the front fighting in the village become aware of those retreating and the fear spread throughout the mass. I continued to circle and scream at them.

Β I finally flew back over to the camp wanting to know that Mary and those in his camp were safe. When close enough to those on the ground I waved and Mary was standing with a cat on each side and Nuzzle was not visible nor was one of the cats, but I had a feeling that all was well, and I continued to fly past. I turned toward the direction the Crows had come from which made me flying up the mountain. With the slope of the mountain and my dropping in elevation it would become an easy landing. All the time during the fight I knew the attack had been from Black Feet.Β 

Looking again toward the distant line of retreating Indians that were still leaving I once again felt the deep fear of those villagers that could have died or been injured during all the fighting.Β 

After watching the Indians, I continued lowering at a slow pace toward the meadow where I started from. Lining up with the center and leaning to the front of the kite l slowed my kite and I glided into a meadow full of cheering, shouting friends. I did not even get my feet on the ground before I was taken in the arms of so many, I could not touch the ground.

For a moment there I was afraid the crowd was in danger of my protective cats but like Nuzzle they had grown accustomed to these people and accepted them to crowd around me.

After arriving at the Chief’s fire pit, which is where all the celebrations for the village were held. I was allowed to stand on my own feet and the yelling and screaming, shoving, and patting on the back type of thing had finally slowed down and the noise level was with in a speak able point the Chief held his hands toward everyone to show he wanted to speak.

As Chief of all the warriors and villagers of this great nation I hereby call a celebration to be held to award our newest member and his family our greatest honor we can for his devotion and willingness to face the enemy and drive away those that would do us harm. I say we shall start right now and continue for five moons. Right now, I would like to have Great Eagle speak and tell us what is on his heart.

Thank you, Chief Crazy Horse. I have something to share with those who will listen.

Β I am like all of you, I eat meat, I drink water, I wear clothes. I get up in the morning and I go to sleep at night just like all of you I am not different in any way that you can think of. What has happened here is not because I have something in me that you do not have, so I want all to understand that what allowed the fear to enter the enemy was not from me but from a supernatural thing. All that happened because I allowed him to help us. He did not help us because we desired it, he helped us because we had faith and just let him guide us. Do you understand that I am telling you do not look at what has happened as something that I personally did all that I accomplished was because we ask the great spirit to help us.Β  I will celebrate with you but understand I am not celebrating what I did but what the great spirit did, and I call the great spirit God. He is not white man’s God he is all men’s God so with that understanding I will join you in celebrating our united victory.

Because of Dans humility and prayers of the Great Spirit the hole tribe was so humbled by his demeanor that they took him into their hearts and minds as a member of their tribe and the love they showed upon his was beyond anything Dan or Mary had ever saw.Β 

Later when Dan was alone with Mary, he told her, we had always been taught that the Indians were a barbaric people with no understanding or knowledge. Yet they understood what I told them and accepted it and had I made that same speech in front of a crowd of my own people few would understand, and few would care. God made me for a purpose and the more trails I travel the clearer I can see the trail laid out for me.

I noticed that one cat was missing when I was about to land is all well Mary. Eeny had been hit with an arrow in the hind leg and I had to take it out, which was a real problem holding him with all his anger. I had to have help, but he understood and finally allowed me to help him and now he is growing healthy.Β 

Another thing I must tell you of was while I was flying over the Black Feet, I had the most beautiful Eagle flying beside me and it was as if he was watching what I was doing. You remember the Eagle nest in the top of that tree that I took his food several times. Yes, Mary said I also remember the time you got to close and hooked the kite in the tree and tumbled down like a rock in the grass. We were lucky those that found you took you and cared for you. Was it luck or the hand of God?Β 

My travels have taken me many moons from my home in the East, and I have never doubted that I will one day arrive at the land in the West with the great ocean and along with that faith I have found you, which some could say is luck. I laugh at that as I laugh at what we think is luck. Some think we make our own luck but then some think that what is luck is a supernatural accordance that we can have the ability to vary the direction it turns out.Β 

The Chief has given us a large home that I am proud of, but I would like to be moved to the edge of the village where our furry friends can come and go without passing so many people. Dan, they put us here for our protection and to be close to all the villagers. As to protection with three mountain Lions and a grey wolf sleeping in our home could you imagine what would happen to anyone that would try to enter with our permission?Β 

Β Β Β Β Β Β 

 

Β Β Β 

 

Β Β Β Β Β Β 

 

I had not forgotten that so many have come by each morning to hear me speak of the Great Spirit and to ask their questions, now I mention it I would not like to stop that, and I would miss the smiles and warm wishes that come. Maybe I should not be so hasty in wanting to move there is not much time left of the day by the time we share our morning meal and have our spiritual discussions. I can imagine the number of people who will attend now that we have taken to the air and put fear in the enemy. I bet it will be many of moons before the Black Feet will attempt to attack this village again.

Mary, have you an idea of the amount of time before you bring Adam into our home? Why are you anxious for the little one? That is a fact, but I also look forward to traveling again and seeing what lays ahead. Look up there it is the Eagle again; he is watching us. Dan, you think there is only one Eagle in the world. Mary, I think that there are many more Eagles in the world but there is only one that watches over us and I think it is the one we had a hand it feeding. It’s fact now I say it the word more makes me think of Moe and with Eeny, Meeny, Miny what could we possibly name the next friend but Moe.Β 

Nuzzle, I would like you to catch a rabbit and put it out in the middle of the meadow on that stump we use as a landing mark. You three cats are not to spend time close by that for fear you will scare Moe from taking that rabbit as a meal offering from us. When we leave this village, he may travel with us, and he could be eyes in the ski to warn us of approaching danger.Β 

When I came out of my teepee to start the fire as usual it was already burning bright. I looked up and Ange was smiling at me. I gave her this name not being able to remember the given Indian name. It turns out that when I gave them a name which seemed to fit and a name, I could remember they were proud and held that name dear to them.Β  Ange was my aunt’s name, and this gal was small and looked like my aunt, so the name was easy for me to remember. So how is it Ange, you are up so early and already have my fire going.

Great Eagle, you saved many of us from losing our village and our lives, which is very important to me and others, so this is nothing to repay a small amount of goodness in return for that. I do have a double reason though if you would answer my question before everyone shows up and takes all your time. First please do not feel that your question is any less important than anyone else’s and I would be happy to answer it if I can. I would only ask this of you knowing you will answer it honestly. Would your God accept me and treat my family as he does yours with us not being white? My God is color blind he loves all and calls them his children. How do I learn more of him? You keep coming to my fire each morning and you will learn as others have been learning and as long as we are here, we will teach you and all.

This was a normal morning and the same questions as before were ask again in a different way and I spent many happy hours talking and teaching on Christianity. I was not a minister, preacher or anything that gave me authority, but I found the more I talked with these people the closer we became as friends and that was as important to both Mary and me.

I had discussed this very subject with Mary for several reasons she was an Indian and she had ask the same of me when we first spent time together but what I found is the Indians had a very deep believe in a supreme being in fact more so on the average than many from back home. I had found no one so far that did not believe in a spirit or something of that nature which made me wonder why without the written words passed from one generation to the next, how they all had this undeniable belief. I keep reminding myself they are supposed to be the heathen the uneducated ones.

After our little meetings each morning and as I have told Mary if I were to leave and sneak out to hunt for the day and not attend, they would feel I had broken some rule that said I had to do this it became so big a deal in fact I had days when there were over fifty who attended. Back home they would have passed the plate asking for donations and here they brought things without my asking and there was so much stuff that I am wondering what I will do with it when I leave.Β 

Tonight was a special occasion because the Chief and all the counsel had invited us to the main counsel fire for an award he said. I had learned to speak their language and that helped in our relationship. I had no idea what he was going to give to me, but I was still excited to be the guest of honor for whatever reason as long as I was not to be tied to a pole and burnt.Β 

Mary told me we had a full month before the little one would join us so I did not want to leave the village till after the baby was born and then I felt it may take a few more days to make sure all was well. What I mean by that is I would like to know Adam our first born is healthy and has all he needs to grow and not have any problems. How long or how old he has to be is not something I know now but I have no doubt that I will know when the time comes.Β 

Every morning, I would go to the fire pit outside and shortly after breakfast I would open the discussion to spiritly conversations. The questions they ask are the direction I would take the teachings. Many of the time the same question was asked in a different way, but many were the same and each time it was received by those in attendance as if it were the first time and they enjoyed hearing it. The hunger for the spoken word was obvious by the attention of those attending and the number of those that attended. Each morning it seemed as though more and more were joining us. And by the size of the crowd that was true.

The questions that Mary and I had were answered at night when we would gather at the main firepit for the tribe and that was in front of the chief’s teepee. The Piute had many chiefs, and each had a particular job or position to full fill. Among those of position in the tribe was the medicine men or woman as the case may be. Many women were gifted in knowing which plants to use for what illness. I was amazed to learn that around this area were over one hundred and twenty plants that could be used for anything from illness to fix the body to fill the belly for hunger. It was just a matter of knowing which plant did what and they had those that did nothing all day long except find and prepare those plants for use later on.

A medicine man had a lot more standing in the tribe that a doctor did back home. A doctor back home went to school for many years depending on what he was going to do such as skill in operation and that also depended on the part to be operated on but say a heart specialist he could spend up to twenty years studying and preparing for this ability. The medicine man started as a young boy/girl, and they would be trained from childhood and their whole live was devoted to learning and knowing. Some students were sent to other villages where a β€œhealer” was known to be very good and effective so the student would travel and live with that healer and teach the students and this could be for many moons at a time. So, to think the Indians did not know would be a big mistake. And also, spiritual awareness was taken very seriously and most of the time it was not a choice but a demand of a child.

Tribal chiefs came in many different positions because the Indians held to a ranking of the chiefs depending on a war chief who had to have been in battle and proved his value where there were young boys who would do anything they could to prove they were worthy of being a warrior. So, positions in the tribe were earned and practiced continually.

The closer the day came for Mary to bring our new member of the family into being the more women came by our teepee to make sure all was ready and that we had certain things that were necessary for the new member. Mary was not allowed to carry her washing to the river to wash that was taken care of by others and the washing was also completed by friends and family. Toward the last few days, they would not let Marry fix dinner or anything that could cause her to have a physical drain.Β 

The men would spend most of the time hunting or preparing to hunt or fight. Bows and arrows were being built all the time by someone in the village. When you walked though you could see the arrows being worked on or the knives being built but I don’t believe I ever saw a man just setting and doing nothing. All had a job to do, Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  Β  and they never stopped, lying in the sun as many from back home would do.

As the day worn on Mary became more reluctant to move about and to spend much time just visiting with neighbors and family. I believe the time draws near, she told Dan. What can I do Dan says I no little compared to the healers who are waiting to attend to you. Will you be at my side Dan I am scared that something may happen that I know nothing about. I would think that as important as this is, if you were in danger or if there was something you should know it would be revealed to you at this time. That is what I am afraid of what if. Dan took Mary by the shoulders in surprise and said do not continue with those thoughts. I would want you to think of our newest family member and how we should be prepared to welcome him into the world. We are going to be proud parents that are waiting for this new family member, and doubt is not part of this family. So, stop that type of thinking and start with a warm and friendly smile waiting on him. I will help you into the blankets that have been prepared for this very special occasion and maybe I should send brown fox to let the ladies who await the great event to come and set with you for a little while you gather your thoughts and try to relax and enjoy the last moments of the little one sharing your belly. Dan, the pain is more than I could ever imagine, even my back is hurting.

Brown Fox thank you for stopping by to check on us and yes, we need you to go tell Roben and the rest of those in her camp that the moment draws near and Mary could use the advice of those women.Β  Chief Iron Hand came to the opening of the tent and leaning in asked if they thought the time was near the little one would make his appearance. Grass hoper came to the entrance and said I have checked her, and she is part way into the delivery now so yes this is the time. With that Chief Iron Hand said I will send runners back to the village of her fathers and let them know that a new member of their family is about to arrive. Chief Yogi of the Ute tribe will know of this before the new moon arrives. With that he turned and left returning to the official community fire pit and ask that there be built a fire even though it was not dark nor cold he wanted everyone to know of this special event.Β Β 

Mary’s pain was causing her to want to scream and yell but her status as a princess would not allow her to do as she wanted so she held her tongue and did not cry out as expected at this time.Β  The three cats would not be forced away from Mary and Dan was called to assist in removing the animals, so the women were free to move about. Upon entering the tent Dan pointed to each cat and with just hand signals each cat got up and followed Dan out of the tent. That is a relief if ever there was one White Water said to Grasshopper. The women were busy making sure Mary was comfortable and they had water heating, extra bladders of water were hanging outside the entrance, and pots were on the outside fire heating water and inside the ladies were laying out cloth to be used as necessary. Because of Mary being a princess, she was given a ritual to the Paiute Tribe, and many were sending smoke signals to the heavens, others were sounding drums, even youngsters were pounding sticks together making noise to let the God be aware of something important happing in their village.Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β 

Afternoon became evening and evening became nighttime and as the hours drew on the excitement in the village grew accordingly. As the moon appeared, through the curtain of clouds and just over the mountain the cry of the little one could be heard by all and at the moment the wolves in the forest the cats at the fire pit started to howl and Nuzzle leaned back and putting his mouth to the heavens declared the new one to be here. The cheering and yelling went on for a long time, but Dan was not disturbed by it, he was a very proud father. Later when ask about all the animals making the noise they did was that not a surprise to you Dan. Β  I never even thought about it Dan said we have been living with this mixture of birds and animals so long we just accept things the way they are. Β  One thing is for sure Adam will never be short of a protector or be lonesome with all that is waiting for him.Β Β Β Β Β Β 

Adams birth brought something I had never considered, Mary’s mother was a healer and a princess of the highest order. Her father was chief for years and was known as one of the greatest leaders of all time. Mary was known as a princess, but she did not tell Dan because she saw into the future and knew he was to be her man and when he was on the way to her village, she knew it and watched his movements toward her. She never had doubt that he was coming for her so when he showed she did not want to scare him or give him any reason to doubt why he should not be her man. Some would not accept the responsibility of having a princess of a nation as big and strong as the Utes so she did not play this part as much as most would have. Now that Adam was born, he became a high-ranking member of the family tree and with that he had honors that members of the tribe wanted to bestow upon him.Β Β 

For many tribes in the area having another member of royalty join was something to celebrate and the chiefs of many tribes meet in the ceremonial area to unite the Ute nation of all tribes and the Piute together that such a man was a member of this supreme leadership, and his birth should be acknowledged by all. It was decided that the next full moon would be the timer, and the celebration should continue until the moon had been divided in half.Β 

Hunters would be bringing meat for this great even and the women would be making decorations, gifts for Adam and the warriors would be entering contests to decide who was the greatest to be the protector of Adam for the rest of his life. When someone of this birthright is born everyone is humbled and feels this is a token given from the great creator and as such all should be made aware of his birth. The village grew so big that Dan found his Teepee again in the middle of the village. He liked to be on the outskirts so the animals could be free to enter the woods without disturbing neighbors.

The tribal leaders felt that because of Dans unlimited ability of helping with fighting the enemy and his searching for the locations of those necessary to feed the people they wanted to use this time to also welcome him and let all know that he was a chief of the tribe and was to have all honors that all great men of the Piute Nation. Never in the history had anyone ever heard of a Whiteman having this position. Secrete warriors of the nation were called together and as a group of special warriors’ part of the ceremonial dance would be used to install Dan into a leadership position of this group.Β 

With all the celebrations gatherings of visitors and preparations for the celebrations going on no one paid any attention to another visitor from the territorial governor who was in the process of signing a treaty with the Piute Nation whereby they would be moving them to a reservation. The treaty was important to the white man but to the Indians it was obvious that the Piute’s were stronger than the white man and they only wanted the treaty because they felt they were weaker than the nation of Piute’s and to be included is the Utes.

Freeman was the name of the Whiteman who was trying to get a counsel of this tribe to gather to sign a treaty. Dan did not know the significance of this treaty or that he would play such a big role in it. The excitement grew as the celebrations began, and Freemont found little attention to him and he found that others did not care that he was a representative of the Government. The stories that were told to him about Dan’s ability to fly and his animal kingdom that supported him was more than Freemont could understand. He knew that Indians had a different culture and looked upon the great creator in a different way than the white man but to actually believe that a man could fly was taken with a knowledge that people create folk lore in all sociates. So, this was a joke to him and he thought they would acknowledge the fact it was not possible to fly so he just waited for the celebration to come to an end.Β 

Freeman was watching the dancing and listening to the drums pounding away and to him this was very annoying. Mary had several lady friends who had begged and begged for the chance to help tend to little Adam so it was not a big surprise to anyone when Mary would appear and dance and take part is the celebrations. As she was on her way past the ceremonial tent which was the largest in all of the village and where many of the festivities took place Freeman stopped her and wanted to know how long these confounded drums were going to continue. Well as she spoke to Freeman she did not address him as mister or any title she did not see him as anything but another visitor to her village and found no reason to give honor to this stranger. These confounded drums as you call them are part of our lives they are talking to the great spirits in the heavens and they are announcing the ritual that our people have done for many generations. And as a stranger to our village, you would not have knowledge of the power and voice the drums play so I will not speak to you as a fool I will address you as a stranger and I will tell you that it would be wise for you to learn about these confounded drums and the dancing in step in order to drive the sound into the earth and the Gods below. Those drums are very important to our people so if you are to learn or want to learn I would suggest that you tune yourΒ  ears to accept those sounds as a voice of our people talking to those spirits and try to understand that you are very lucky to be able to hear them and if you would care to take part in the celebration not only would you find it to warm the heart it will also lead you to further knowledge of our Gods that oversee this celebration. Freeman stood with his mouth open he had never heard a woman address a man with such knowledge such forcefulness. Watching Mary Walk off left Him with an admiration of not only her but the admiration of the drums and there meaning. She had opened his mind to the possibility of knowledge from somewhere he had not known he was lacking.

Freeman watched the ladies bring Adam out of a special teepee that he had not even paid attention to. Now that he looked he saw many colors painted on the bottom but as it got to the top the colors seemed to flow into the very hide incapsulating the posts. He keep looking and the decorations were all handmade with every one of them without ever being told he knew they were there for religious reasons. How had he know this? Such workman ship from people who have only the very basics of life to work from. As he looked he found the drums had been quieted down and he turned to look and they were pounding them just like they had been. The fact he had been drawn away mentally showed him that perhaps there is more to the hole ceremony than he had even considered. Noticing many going to the meadow just beyond the ceremonial area he saw many fires burning and all seemed to be watching Dan and Mary as they held little Adam up. Drawing closer he could hear as Dan was speaking to the people.

His grandmother the great Chipeta most respected wife of Chief Ouray of our nation told of him before he was born. Mary’s great-grandfather Bold Eagle the most famous of all leaders of our nation told of his name before he was born. I am Great Eagle honorary chief of our nation and hold him before you as proof of his beginning. Before his journey through life, I say to you that as his mother, grandmother, and his grandfather the most respected warrior Chief Ouray have told of him.Β  He will make you proud. As Dan lowered Adam the crowd began to yell and the drums which had be silenced while he spoke began to sound again. Men were pounding rocks against trees, logs and anything they could to make noise. The chanting of Adam, Adam had started and was now heard throughout the village.Β 

 

As Dan walked along the line of people that were showing him with praises and pounding on his shoulders and back to the point you would think he would be in pain by all the fuss being shown to him. At the end of the line Freeman was waiting to ask Dan how his mother, Grandmother and Grandfather could possibly tell of the boy years before he was born. Smiling Dan told him when I first came to Mary I had no idea that what you say could have been possible but Mary has told me of how many sons I will have and has told me of my daughter and I have learned that what we know is of little value. The great one in the heavens know and I have without a doubt became a believer in what they say.

Do they know how the treaty will end between us in the future? I have not ask but I would advise them to turn their backs on you and not sign or believe anything our government says to these people. What? you would go against your very beginnings and side with these uneducated and illiterate people? Uneducated, illiterate by your standards not by those of the world that can read the trails of every animal on earth. If left alone they will feed their own and not cause any harm to this world. You are the ones wanting what they have it is you that is forcing them to fight. Freemont you and all who are like you have a very narrow vision of the outcome that will change the lives of many just so a few can have what they want. The uneducated are those that have not the knowledge to see what the most obvious thing in the world is. And what would that be Dan, Freemont ask. That your greed and hunger for what others have is causing much harm in the world on both sides.Β 

I understand that you are putting together a lot of people and they are going to walk from the Southern States across the Mississippi River in the winter most having nothing to ware on their feet and in the middle of winter. Not just one family, not just a few you are moving thousands of people from the Cherokee, Choctaw, Chickasaw, and the Seminole to just name a few of the tribes you are moving thousands of miles. You tell me of education and illiteracy and are in the process of wiping out tens of thousands of people and all because of white man’s hunger for riches. The tears that shall flow in many great nations shall be remembered for ever because of this greed. Freeman I could never tell an enemy let alone a trusted family to even consider what you have come here to discuss with my wife’s relatives. If you want my friendship you will get on your horse and go back and tell all that the Piutes are not as dumb as you thought they were and try to persuade them to reconsider and find another way to solve the problem of riches by way of murder. The Cherokee was lied to and now they die by the trailside with frozen feet. Talk not to me about education and illiterate anymore. And with that Dan turned and joined those in the crowd.Β 

 

By morning all was quiet and calm with fires burning low, the smell of dying fires and smoke lingering. Dan pushed aside the flap and stood outside the teepee as a runner for the tribe approached him and told him. Dan the chief is having a special counsel this afternoon to meet with Freeman and discuss his treaty. Go back to the chief and tell him I am honored and proud to have gave such an honor but I believe the treaty to be another hollow drum of the white mans. I shall take no part in voice or presence at the meeting. If I were chief I would send Freeman home without his tongue. Then turning continued on into the brushes brushing against Nuzzle his timber wolf friend.Β 

Returning to find Mary out front of their home preparing a meal for the morning. Good morning my sweet princess said Dan as he walked up. I was told you refused to give counsel in the Chiefs gathering yesterday. That is right, I do not feel what the white man is saying is worthy of giving anytime to the subject. Did you tell the Chief this? Yes I sent word back with Little Wolf when he ask me to join them and told him my feelings. You do know that to not attend when ask if an insult to the Chief. If he should send word when I was ill would I be forgiven? Yes you would be. If you were ill and I was attending to you would I be forgiven? Yes Dan you would be forgiven for that also. Then perhaps you can see that when ask to attend to something I cannot accept makes me sick. We will speak no more of this now, Mary said.Β 

Venison fried to a light red floating with wild mushrooms and wild onions was set before Dan as he sat down with a third cup of coffee. You know you are the best cook of all the princess I know. I believe I am the only princess you know.Β  Then what I said has to be as all other things I say no doubt. What is that which you are building up to say this morning Mary. The thing we came to this village was to bring Adam into our world which we have done. We have gave him the blessings of his ancestors and our God. Is there another reason why we should linger here. Not that I can think of now, let us dwell on the subject a day or two and we will imagine our journey which will bring to light anything else we should do here.Β 

At counsel the chiefs were told of Daniels words and the fact that he was preparing to leave the village was brought before the counsel and murmuring was so strong the chief had to stop for a few minutes until order could be maintained. No one would dare speak out loud when not addressed by the chief but it was obvious that many disagreed with what was being said. Before continuing the chief stood and held his right hand up and out toward all in attendance and said listen to me my brothers as most can see Great Eagle has a loud voice with our people and before we continue I would ask Grey Fox to go ask Great Eagle if he would please come to our counsel and explain to us his feelings. Later upon entering the group Dan started to set at his place where he would normally be positioned for a meeting and the chief stopped him. Great Eagle you have many brothers here who would hear what you have to say on this treaty the white man is offering. What I would say most would not want to hear. Please Great Eagle speak as you would from the breast and with the knowledge many of us here do not share.Β 

All in attendance know of my heritage and know I was raised among the white man and my blood is from that birth but my heart is among those of you and I have no desire to place distance between what we have now by voicing my words. I know you want me to speak anyway so I will say this. The white man has many soldiers, many hand full of hundreds of warriors who could come into this village and in moments destroy everything. Not only do they have many people they have weapons you have never saw. They have guns that shoot bullets big as the rocks around this firepit. They have guns so big they have to move them on wheels one at a time. When an enemy is so much larger and stronger than us to fight them would not be a question in my mind that outcome would be to lose all of you in a heartbeat. What I say, what you say has very little value to them they will do as they desire and they will not hold to what they say in the future. You are doing the only thing possible hearing what they have to say and hoping they offer much because you have no voice that will be heard. The outcome of this will be as the white man says so I with a heavy heart do not want to hear this they offer.Β 

I will answer any questions that you may desire of me. The questions were few as they were ask but with one question another was added then that brought more questions and those made more and the meeting lasted for hours and hours. Dan felt worn down to total exhaustion when it was finally over.Β 

Returning to his camp he feel into the robes and just lay looking at the nothing. What is it Dan what has got you so tired and in a land of another. I hated doing what I had to do Mary it was not good for me to have to tell others that they had no chance and life would be over for them as they know it. We will leave as soon as we are prepared to travel.Β 

 

CHAPTER THREE

 

ADAMS FIRST JOURNEY

 

After a week of preparations Mary brought the three cats to her side and said we will leave today and you three shall be our advance protection against any who would want to harm us. You can leave now and stay one days travel ahead of us then after circling the campfire you can join us for our final meal of the day. Should you need anything or want to tell us anything do not return use Nozzle to let us know. We will be traveling many miles and many days so prepare for a long journey.Β 

The cats sprang to life but went into a different direction than that which Mary had indicated for them to go. Unknown to Mary Dan had been in the meadow getting horses ready to leave and as he bent to pick up a large pack to put onto Buster four men stepped before him and surrounded him each having a weapon prepared to use if Dan should resist. Tom the leader of the men said in a very meaningful way that they were here to show Dan the errors of his ways in not accepting the warnings that Freemont had tried to instill in Dan. You have no idea the power or the scope of people that feel you need discipline because of your lofty ways. And just what do you think you are capable of teaching me.Β 

As Tom started to raise the sword he had in his right hand he felt the sharpness of teeth upon his wrist. He looked down and a Miney, Dans pet lion which had Tom in a grip that let him know that he was about to lose his hand. Seeing this, Wendle tried to raise his spear to stick the cat that held Tom, and he found he could not raise it and looking down looked into the eyes of Meany who had a firm grip on the spear and was growling at him. Tom became aware of another cat just setting and snarling at them and to make it worse he suddenly realized the Large Grey Wolf with teeth showing the hair on the wolf was standing on end and the stance of the wolf left no doubt of his ability to attack. The others, with Tom, stood in silence afraid to move or speak. Shadow Dans horse was directly behind those facing Dan and as they suddenly realized they also had a horse showing teeth which is rare to say the least. Fred looked at Tom and said I think we are undermanned here Tom even his horses are ready to fight. At that moment a great white-headed Eagle landed on Dans shoulder and was watching the men. The growling of the cats and the snarling of Nuzzle snarling and juices running down his mouth and the stamping of the horses behind the men was the only sounds to be heard.Β 

Dan just stood and smiling at the men told in a voice of much command for the cats to allow the men to not move but should they it would be ok to let them know they were facing death. Now gentlemen let me explain something that is not taught in the schools that you had attended. Not only are you in danger from us you have been in danger sense leaving the fort. Had you been able to do to me what you had intended but you would not have made it back to your camp. These are not just our friends they are family and Mary here has more influence than just this tribe. It would take you a month to get outside of those that would go to war with your government and all your armies had you been able to do this thing you were never capable of doing.Β 

Now that you have been made aware of your weakness and stupidity I would ask each of you to drop your weapons and strip to the last garment on your body.Β  Jack started to say I will not take and about that time Nuzzle moved up to him and with a very deep chested growl stood in front of him and he stopped what he was saying and began to disrobe. Why would you do this to us Tom asked? As a white man you use paper and pen to send information I send you back and will not have to explain anything you will do it for me. When you pass each of those that will see you will know of your ignorance and laugh and ridicule you which will remain in your memory for ever.Β 

Up on joining Mary Dan said, β€œI know that you had to know the danger I was facing and you allowed to happen without a warning why?” Well, when I told the cats to go one direction and they went another direction I stopped and thought of what you would be facing and I was about as worried for you as I would be if a squirrel should attack Nuzzle. Why should I worry about those that are not capable of holding on to their own clothing. And I also smiled when I watched those men try to walk without sandals. You have sent a strong signal to the white man with your strange behavior Dan.

Loading of the camp and took only small amount of time and Adam was laughing and enjoying the whole thing like he had saw it many times before. Each of the horses feel into line as they left the small meadow and the day travel began at a very leisurely pace.Β 

At the end of fifteen miles Dan ask Mary to send Moe out and see if he could find a good campsite for them for the night. Dan could get Moe to do many things for an Eagle but he was not sure he would understand this one and knew that in a few days that also would be taken care of just by repeating it over the next few days.

The start of each journey is slow in getting adjusted to life on the move. Each night only that which is necessary is unpacked. It is all unloaded relieving the burden on each animal but the packs were left in a line as they were taken from each animal so the next morning they would line up and Dan would load each in a turn and the time necessary to be ready was short.Β 

Evenings were enjoyed around the campfire by all and even Moe would land close by and seemed to like the closeness of this small group. Adam was busy as usual with the things that keep a small child entertained so he became a joy for all to watch him as he discovered another small treasure that could be from a shining rock to pinecone. Food was still backed in bags should they be needed but mostly coffee, salt, pepper and flour were used daily and they were keep in one place and loaded and unloaded many times.Β 

Nuzzle would bring rabbits, squirrels and other small game but it was not unusual for one of the cats to drag something of a larger size into camp on occasion.Β  Deere were plentiful and that was often left by the trail when Dan would stop and load parts as he came upon them. The group worked as a team and all seemed to know when something was necessary and it would be waiting for them alongside the trail.Β  After climbing the Sierra mountains and winding along the river to the great lake in the sky that had been told about they agreed to spend a little extra time fishing and just resting.

The first night Dan was amazed when he pulled in some trout over 20 lbs. such size he had never saw before it was a thing for him and he found the fish to be extremely tender and tasteful for such a big fish. He decided that it had to be because of the extremely cold water and it was so pure they drank right from the lake.

Dan remembered the story that had been told of Kit Carson finding this lake and going back East and telling those that there was this lake up in the ski that was so big you could barely see across it and it was above the clouds and the fish were up to fifty pounds. They knew him to be one to string a story to the point of breaking it but this was not even considered to be true. Talk as he did could not make others believe what he had found. The lake became known as Lake Tahoe after having been called Bigler the native Indians just referred to it as da’aw without any other words necessary to indicate the body of water. The Washo Language simplified and mispronounced their version of Washoe word da’aw or da ow and ga.

They all agreed after one month that if they were not on the trail again before long that at this high elevation the winter would come soon and it would be a hard one to live in.Β  So, after gathering extra food supplies they were ready to move and Mary told Dan it is a good thing because they were just about out of most things they needed. They followed the river North out of the basin and when it turned East again they left the river and began the descended into the valleys and meadows and the trail dropped so fast that it was only a few days before they were in warm weather and evenings were so warm a blanket was not necessary.Β 

Dan approached a trading post and was asked many questions as to what they had saw and how the Indians had treated them and how they managed with such a small boy. By now Adam had begun to walk and was talking a little but his words were not as those in the trading post expected he spoke somewhere between Piute and English. One word would be traded of another depending on what he was trying to say. One thing became evident no one was getting close to that boy without either a cat or timber wolf protecting him. It took some talking for Dan to convince them that the cats were a pet and could be trusted. No one had ever heard of a pet cougar and top that off with three and with a pet Timber Wolf then throw in an Eagle and no one would ever imagine that this was one family tied together with the love of the world.Β 

Dan I am told that as we drop down in elevation the weather gets even warmer and there is water most of the way to the ocean. Ezera has told me of many of those that live only to kill and steal what others have. He said it would be wise if we were to travel with others and not take any chances. Yes Dan said but how do we explain all of our fury friends to these people who has never saw a cougar or a Timber Wolf. Mrs. Harmer would not be able to control herself if she saw Nuzzle let alone Eenie, Meenie, Miney or Moe. And if all of them were approach the Harmers wagon together, I think the smell would be really bad.Β  Even the animals would not want to smell what the Harmers would spread as they ran. Well, I don’t expect to face that problem anytime soon so we will not look for that problem right now. We will load up on the necessary supplies and when we have loaded them away as we feel is necessary we can move on down the hill and get started on our way. Mary I almost forgot I want to get more fishing line the last I had is getting weak from age. I am told there are some good-sized rivers down the way we are going and I would like to take advantage of them. Is there anything that you have missed that you would like to get while we are here Mary? No, I can think of nothing they have that I desire to have but maybe a few trinkets to trade when we find some of our friends along the way.

I must tell you Dan about those men you went outside to visit with just a little while ago. Yes, Mary what do you know? I see that have many bad things about to happen with them. They are working with more men and they are going to take this trading post away and use it for their own profits. They intend on killing everyone in this village so no one will know what has happened. When will they do this Mary? They wait for us to leave so that when we get to next trading post we will tell of everything being as it must be here. How far away must we be before they feel we are on our way. They have a man waiting two days travel from here to wait and watch for us. He will then return and tell of our departure and that will begin the slaughter of those here. Well, that’s an easy answer I will just tell Ron Johnston of their plans and they will be ready. They are prepared for that also if we should say anything that would cause Ron or anyone at the trading post to show alarm they have men ready to kill all of our friends the three cats, Nuzzle our wolf friend even our horses and they speak of Moe our friendly Eagle as possibly needing shot. They have many men ready to move and take over.

 

Maybe Mary we should ride over to see Yonger our Indian chief in the little meadow and ask him for his help. They have many men that would be very happy to take a few scalps from the white man. That is the wrong direction for us to travel and when we started toward the little meadow they would suspect what we were doing and could start sooner. That cannot be the answer either Dan. You must think of another way to talk with Yonger. We will put off leaving for one day while I think this further and perhaps ask my father for his guidance. We can tell them we are not ready to go and that we must have more preparations for Adam. I could offer another if it would help Dan. What is that Princess? I am with child again and could use a few days of rest. Why did you not tell me of this? I was waiting for the right moment when we could share our joy but this could now be that moment.Β Β 

After a day of laying around and doing nothing Dan finally concluded that he must leave as they expect them to and then when they have passed the man on the trail two days travel they will make camp and make all things look as they should be. After the man leaves to return to here I will take kite to meadow and will return to Chief Yonger and drop a message in his camp telling of their plans. Can Yonger read white man’s words? Mary ask. No, but that is not a problem I can use the same type of signal they use when sending smoke signals. Also, I can use the same hand signals we use when standing before him and need to speak most Indians can speak different languages because of these hand signals that are common.Β 

I will take the runner who is sent to watch us two days to return to village and I can travel over the mountain in two or three hours I will talk and tell of the attack days before it happens and all can be ready.

We shall leave at sunrise and be on our way. I will bring all together tonight and let them know and we can load before the sunrises and be ready to leave. Go stay your goodbyes tonight and let all know we will return whenΒ 

God allows it.

As they were leaving those that would come along to see them and be with them on their parting trip. Started but they dropped off as the sun got higher in the ski. By early afternoon Mary and Dan were well on their way and had sent Moe to watch from the ski and Nuzzle to check for a place to spend the night. Nuzzle came to Dan and was indicating someone was following them. Do not bother with them he told Nuzzle I want them to follow so stay away from them. This seemed to satisfy Nuzzle so he just laid down by the fire and went to sleep.Β 

Mary had told all three cats and the Eagle to watch for a meadow where Dan could make flight with his kite. Moe was circling and came to Mary landing beside her as she was preparing the evening meal. What is it Moe she ask? Moe would hop and lay one wing over then hop and lay the other wing over which indicated to Mary that Moe was talking about the kite and Dans flight. Yes Mary said to Moe he would be going up when we find the meadow long enough to do this. Moe jumped over to Nuzzle and though enemies before they were now friends and Moe poked Nuzzle on the nose and looking up Nuzzle leaned his head from one side to the other looking at Moe. Moe turned and took to flight then sat back down and came back to Nuzzle and again turned and hoped and took to flight. As Moe left the ground Nuzzle was behind him running and following Moe. Dan smiled and said Moe has found the meadow and he is taking Nuzzle to see and we will know which direction we are to travel in the morning.

Dan are you sure you can travel that far that fast? It will not matter because I can beat whoever is to run and tell that I am returning. Now you mention it I could have Nuzzle make a visit to his camp and cause him to be held up for a day or so if I should decide. Dan could you not just go to his camp and tell him that you are going on and make him believe and then fly. Mary if I were to do that I would have to lie and I have never lied in my life. Dan you talk much just answer me yes or no have you ever lied. Silence. Well Dan are you going to answer me? Mary you want a yes or no and if I say yes that is a lie and if I say no that also is a lie. Please explain to me Dan. Well Mary I have told things that turned out to be wrong was that not a lie. But you did not lie on purpose. Now you know why I could not answer you with simple yes or no. Much more information is necessary sometimes that is why I take so many words.

I have been thinking on talking with Moe our Eagle friend and ask him to fly with you every time to go up. Why would you think that necessary Mary? Well Dan every time you take off I get a little feeling in my stomach and I know you will be ok but I cannot help but feel concern for you.

To be honest with you I get a little nervous just before leaving the ground but when I get into the air and flying like a bird I feel the emotion changes to one of awareness and excitement that overrides the fear I felt. We will spend more time teaching you how to do the same thing then it would be exciting to fly together and enjoy together that, which is so special.Β Β 

That’s OK Dan I will still speak with Moe and he will know that it is my wish he travel with you and if we should fly together he will fly with both of us. Mary is it because you are a princess that you can speak to Moe and he understands or is it as when I speak to him I think he understands me but I never know till he does that which I have ask. Oh, he lets me know Dan when he understands and he will sometimes turn his back on me when he does not want to do that which I have ask of him. I have had the ability to speak with many animals in my life so Moe is not exception or any different for me. My friends when I grew up were of many different kinds. My mother got very angry with me when I insisted a skunk spend the night with me. I just cannot understand some things Mary what a childhood you must have had.

That night was spent putting together the kite for the next day’s flight. Attaching the rope and lining up Shadow for takeoff the next morning was easy and tireless the wind was blowing up the canyon so it gave lift fast and before I knew it I was above the trees and making a small gradual turn to return to the trading post. I was not a bit concerned about who was on the way to let them know I was out of the area and gone. On the ground the wind was getting very strong I could tell that by the way the trees swayed and the branches bounced from the wind. In the air the wind is not a factor because the strength of the wind was between the wind and the ground and if you are not on the ground what effect that has only matters when in opposition to your flight path.

As I approached the trading post I could tell that many were busy moving boxes of what I could not tell from this distance. I decided that I should not get to close for fear of them seeing me and knowing what I was there to accomplish. So, I moved downhill far enough that I felt they would not know I had passed and I flew right on by.

I was following a trail that had been used so many times in the past that I appeared to be a wagon road from the air. I could see the village a long ways away and I turned a small amount and sailed right to them. As I drew near I saw those that at first saw me then I could see and hear the excitement of those that first saw me approaching. They were yelling and screaming and pointing to me.

More people looked up and stopped what they were doing and holding their hand over the eyes shielding out the sunlight on their faces. I turned and dropped lower so that when I went over the camp I would be able to signal to the chief and those that would be watching what was about to happen. Chief Yonger waved as I approached sense he knew me and I had told him of my ability to fly and. So, he knew I had this ability and he was waving franticly at me. As I approached him I gave him the signal for enemy and an attach was on the way. He was signaling how many and from what direction they were coming. I did not have time to answer that but went over several teepees and beyond the horse heard that was grazing by the river. Turning downhill, I was again flying into the wind so with the mountain dropping away and the wind lifting me I gained a lot of height in a hurry so turning back to camp I again lowered so as to come close enough to make signals with my hands. This time I indicated that it was not this location that was in danger but the trading post. Knowing the trading post was a very important to these people because they traded and got supplies there. This time over there were more standing and watching and most knew the hand signals and were giving me back thank you and letting me know they understood.Β 

This time as I flew over I was heading in the direction I wanted to go to return so I just gained what was necessary to be over mountain top and continued back and around trading post again. It was still early afternoon when I approached the meadow and could see Mary, Eenie, Meeny, Miny and Nuzzle all watching me as I approached. Moe our Eagle friend who had followed me everywhere I had gone was still on my right side as I approached the meadow I saw him land beside those that were waiting for me.

We got the kite secured and taken apart enough the wind had not effect but I noticed it was not blowing as hard as it had been earlier. Mary turned to me and ask if I had contacted Yonger and the people. Yes I told her of their excitement when I came over their camp and the number of people who were signaling to me and thanking me. Do you think they will stop the attack on the trading post Mary ask. With out a doubt they will because they depend upon those food supplies such as floor, salt and sugar so you can count on them getting to the post and they will stop any foolishness that those men would try to create.Β 

So, we can continue on our journey and not worry about that any longer. That will make me very happy to not and I will think about what is to come before us. The cats did not want to leave the meadow and laid watching the sky to see your return. They wanted to see you and they did not go hunt our supper tonight so we may not have any fresh meat. We still have time would you send them again and I will talk to Nuzzle and see if he can help with a little something.Β 

That sounds good let us take all this and return to our camp and we can start the fire and get things done. Dan do you think it will be a problem of starting in the morning? No Mary that sounds like the thing to do now we have been here several days now and it is time to move on. It will take us another ten days or so to reach the next trading post so getting started is a good idea.

 

CHAPTER FOUR

 

DROPPING DOWN INTO CALIFORNIA

 

I will send Eeny to spot for us this morning Dan said. Oh, you think now you know which is Eeny and which is Meeny do you. Of course, I do Mary I have always known to tell them apart. Well then maybe you don’t know a male from a female because I remember once when you said Eeny was a male then you said female I did not say anything but now I find you confusing to say the least. The days of not knowing is a lot easier now that Eeny is so much bigger than either of his sisters. I thought I may have to do like those friends I had back home that could not tell their horses apart. The cut the tail off so they could tell which was which and that worked until the tail grew back. So, then they cut the mane off and that did it for a while but that grew back so they decided to measure them and see which was the tallest. It turned out the white horse was two inches higher than the black one. Dan why do you spend time telling these stupid stories. Because you love to hear them that is why. Where do you think Teyah our friendly female deere who was such a great mother and gave her milk so that the three cats could live. A deere is more of a sticker to one place they usually never travel over a few miles from where they are born. When hunted they will run around the mountain but most times will end up back where they were found. She no doubt stayed where she was happy and if we should go back through there I will bet we will find her again. I am glad you do not suspect harm to her Dan. Mary you are the one who sees all this stuff why could you not find this answer within you. I do not know all Dan I only receive that which is necessary most of the time. Like I could see and hear what those men were going to do at the trading post but I do not know what happened after we left. When we get to the next post we will without a doubt hear of that so all we have to do is be patient.Β 

Dan will we have the money to buy what things are needed on our travels. Mary have you forgotten the gold we found in the cave back there. We have enough with us to buy the trading post and fifty more just like it. Money will never be our problem so do not even think about that. I just do not want to use it if I do not need to because that will spread that we have gold and that will bring us problems we do not need. I am trying to figure out how I can spend it and not put us in danger.Β 

I think I would like to stop somewhere and not have to cook or load or unload anything for a few days if we can find the right spot Dan. As we drop down into the valley we will find several small villages and one of those may have what would be our best opportunity to meet our most basic needs. I have heard of a place called Hang town that may offer us a cabin and some friends that will assist us in our daily chores. What will we do with our friends Dan what would they say to having three grown mountain lions running around the house. I can make them understand Nuzzle because he can be so friendly they will think of him as a dog. I would never be able to get him to not be at my side he has been there his whole life and I would never try to change that.Β 

Mary if we can continue at the pace we have set I believe we can make it to that little village in one more day. How do you know this Dan? Nuzzel has warned me we have in front of us many people and that would be Hang Town. That is a bad name for a town I wonder where they got that from. No doubt in my mind they had to have hung so many people they got the name from it. Every town has something about the name that would indicate its source. Some are named after a man and that would be easy to figure out and just the same presidents, and famous people have been chosen for the name.Β 

Let us make camp here by the side of this stream and we can continue on in the morning and I will send Nuzzel to find how far it is to the village. Just a moment Moe Mary said very loudly. She raised her arm and spoke again Moe and out of the tree not noticed before was Moe waiting for his dinner. Tell me how far to the next village she said. Moe took off and was gone in a flash. Mary Dan said do you think he understood you. Wait and watch what happens now. In less than time than it took the water to come to a boil Moe was back and was standing on the edge of the pack used for traveling. Moe spread his wings and as Mary counted he raised and lowered his wings showing Mary how many times he had to flap to get to the village. Are you shore that is what he is telling you. Dan are you stupid or just not paying attention. I don’t know how far he goes on one flap but I know he is telling me that so tomorrow when we get to town we can figure out and know for the next time. Seven flaps is not very much so the town must be close.Β 

Hello the camp was heard and the three lions were already in the bushes and Nuzzel had moved over next to Mary. Come on in if you are friendly if you are not be prepared to be friendly. As he stepped out of the darkness which was just beginning a very tall man holding a rifle by the barrel set the stock on the ground and as he did a small woman shorter than Mary came behind the man. Sticking out his hand to Dan he said my name is Sam what be yours. And Dan told him his name and said this is my wife Mary.Β 

What brings you to my camp Dan asks. Well young feller he says I have been hunting a very large man that has been seen in the woods here and I was wondering if you had saw him. Is he bigger than you? Oh yes I am like 6 feet four and he is way over my head. I just saw him at a distance but the Indians were chasing him and I could not get close enough to shoot him. Why do you want to shoot him? Dan asks. He could be dangerous as big as he is. You want to kill someone because of his size? That makes no sense to me. Well, it does not matter to me what you think but I would like to be the one to take him to town and brag about me being the one to find and kill him.Β  Well Sam I do not hold to what you think is important we live our lives trying to help not hurt others. So maybe it would be better if you were to leave our camp and not return if you live like that. I will go and do as I please it matters not what you say I am too much for you to mess with.Β 

With that Dan held up three fingers and the mountain lions appeared beside the man and Nuzzel moved over closer to Dan and the hair on his back started to raise showing his concern for the man. Now Dan said what was that you were trying to say about size. These are your pets. No, they are my family and you are about to find your size has little value here. Maybe we should look at you like you are talking about the other big man you spoke of. Maybe we should kill you and we can take your body in and hang it in the town square and let others look upon you as you would have them do. No please allow me to leave and I will not be back. Let me explain so you will understand that if you continue to chase that big man for the reasons you say there will be very little chance we do not meet again and if I meet you again I cannot promise that my friends here will look at you with kindness in mind. I would suggest that you find how you got here and follow those footsteps right back where they started and stay there if you want to live to get bigger.Β 

As Sam left the fire and was heading away Mary said to Dan do you think he will take your warnings? With that Dan held up three fingers and pointed at the man and gave the indication they should follow the man and at the same time Mary said and make sure he leaves the mountain. With that you could hear the screaming of the lions as they chased Sam. That should make him understand his size has not much value here.Β 

The cats and Nuzzel returned much later and all set around the campfire and enjoyed an evening meal and containment was obvious to all. Even Moe dropped in and was watching as Dan through him a large piece of meat which he took and that is unusual because most Eagles would never take a handout from a person they only took what they had got. It is so nice when we can all join and enjoy the stillness that the forest offers.Β 

 

The next morning as Mary was setting food around on the stumps that were arranged around the area for tables she was not smiling as would be expected. What is the problem my princess you do not look happy today. I have a dark cloud in my mind and I do not know why I feel as I do and I cannot see a reason for it. With that Moe sweep down out of the ski and was squawking and waving his wings and jumping around and flapping while squawking.

That is what was bothering me this morning now I know. What is it princess? The man they hunt is up on the mountain and in very much pain. They have him where he is in danger of his life. How do you know this? All things have a voice if we hear, I did not listen or I would have known before. When you say all do you mean that plants also speak. Oh yes Dan they have many voices if we just listen. How do you do this Mary how can you stand to have all these voices and not drive you crazy hearing them. When you go to villages and many people are speaking how can you stand this? I also have ability to shut off that which I do not want to hear. But I have to be careful because just like the giant up on the mountain I did not listen but you have to go help him. We have to stop this chatter and you must take your kite up and rescue him.Β 

 

Mary what are you suggesting. The man is on top of the mountain and he is in great danger because he is injured and cannot run or hide. So, you will have to fly up there and pick him up and take him out of danger. Mary I do not know if I can do this how will I land and take off with him. Dan why must you land why can he not take ahold of you when you come over him. Mary this what you ask has never been done before and when he grabs my kite the extra weight could force me to crash. I do not know if the kite will support two of us. Well don’t take the water or the coats or the guns or the bullets and all the other stuff you usually have. If you do not take that stuff the kite should be able to take more than just you. What you are suggesting is possible to get me killed. OH, Dan you worry about stuff that is not necessary I have looked at the future and know you will return in good health so stop this chatter and prepare to fly.

Can you talk with him Mary? Yes I can and he knows you are going to be coming for him. Is he on the top where he can get to a cliff overlooking the valley. I will tell him that you want him on the side next to the cliff. Mary is it possible for me to learn to talk with him. All it takes Dan is concentrate on him and in your mind say what you want him to know and he will answer you. I will try it but we must hook up Shadow as fast as we can. I have put the Eagle kite together because it is much larger than the crow. I will circle and see if I can find where he is and then I can decide what is necessary. Moe are do you know where this man is? Yes he indicates by a nod of the head. Take me to him then Dan says as he lifts the kite on his shoulders and yells lets go Shadow.

For Shadow this is just another day of pulling the kite so she now just takes off. When Dan gets above the trees he heads out into the valley trying to gain what elevation he can as fast as he cannot knowing where the man will be. Moe fly’s to the side of Dan and turns toward the East and uphill so Dan follows Moe and he must be on the correct side of the mountain to give him lift because he is over the mountain in a hurry. As he turns and looks he sees many warriors side by side and facing the top of the mountain. Dan knows what they are doing and he goes over the top and watches for the giant. Circling and watching Dan sees Moe land on a tree branch and when he sees this he can see the man crouched down in the bushes on the edge of the cliff. The opening beside the bushes is just what Dan is hoping for and he fly’s down and crosses the open ground and as he does the man hobbles out to the edge and Dan is just barely over the ground as he passes the edge and is out away from the mountain. He is so busy watching he did not see the man hook on to the kite but he felt that pressure on his legs from the man hanging under him holding onto the ropes that Dan is setting on. In only a fraction of time Dan is out over the valley and away from the cliff. He now looks down at this man who is very large and he is very hairy even his face has much hair. The arms of this man are as large as Dans legs. This is truly a big man to say the least with him below Dan he cannot see him only his face and arms so looking what he is doing he decides the best thing he can do is get this thing onto the ground before something goes wrong. Turning toward the meadow where he knows Mary is he turns and starts to drop toward the camp. As he passes over the lake beside the camp he feels the giant let go and cannot see him but knows he must have fell into the lake. With the loss of weight, the kite is able to climb just enough to make a smooth turn and he heads toward the camp.Β 

Β 

When Dan lands he is all alone in the meadow and he looks toward the lake and he can see Mary helping this man up onto the back of Shadow. Amazing Dan thinks never has anyone ever been able to get onto Shadow and this guy is riding him back to the camp. Dropping the kite and climbing out from under it Dan heads to the camp to see what he can do to help.Β 

Nozzle is running around the man and jumping up and down like he is an old friend. The three cats are just standing and now they are laying down just as if this is an everyday occurrence. How can this man be so welcomed into his camp to fast is what Dan is thinking. As Dan arrives the giant is just setting on the log facing the fire pit and he is larger than any man Dan has ever saw and he has never been told of anyone this large. The guy must be over nine feet tall. Walking up the guy nods his head and without opening his mouth Dan knows he has just been thanked for saving him.

 

Blood is on the ground under the leg of the man so Dan grabs a rage from the top of the saddle pack and leans down to stop the bleeding. As he looks closer he can see a hole in the back of his leg and the blood is seeping out. Dan wraps the rag around the leg and ties it stopping the flow of blood. It may not be stopped completely he tells Mary but it should slow it way down. Mary pulls a buffalo robe over and lays it on the ground and tells the giant to lay on the on his stomach so she can look at the wound. Somehow the grunts and whistles are making sense to Dan he can understand part of what the guy is saying to Mary.

 

First Mary would like to know what name this fellow goes by. Ooga (sounds like oh-ga) is what it sounds like so that is what I will call him. Concentrating on him I find I can get imaginary thoughts at least that is the way can understand what is taking place here. Mary is right when she tells me to just not try so hard just let my mind be free and somehow the information is translated to me. I think I can read what he is saying Mary. He has just told me that he was a long way away from the man we called Sam and as he turned to go into the bushes he was hurt really bad in the leg and he fell and the leg would not work and he says with the pain he could not become hidden. I do not understand if he can move why he could not be hid Mary.Β 

 

Dan there are those like Ooga here who live in the forest and they have a way of disappearing from our eyes. I do not fully understand it but they have a way of just blending into whatever is near. It is like they become invisible to us all at once. That is there way of protecting themselves from others. As a child they are taught by their parents how to do this and all who like him have this ability. So, when he was hurt it took something away from him and he was not able to do this. That’s right Dan he says he lost it and even now he says he can’t do it because of the pain in his leg.Β 

As Mary was speaking to Dan she was pushing the hair aside so she could see the hole in the back of his leg. As she touched it he moved and grunted apparently it hurt him when she touched it. Dan I think the bullet is still in there and it has to come out so I am going to need some hot water and a sharp knife to remove this. Does he understand what is about to happen? Oh, he knows but this is new to him he is trusting me to do what is necessary.Β 

 

Mary put the knife into the flames of the fire and got it hot then she waited a minute for it to cool and while she did this Ooga laid back and he looked like he had gone to sleep his eyes closed and his head just king of relaxed as he was laying on the side of his face I could not see as much as I would have liked to but it appeared as though he just went to sleep. Mary pushed the knife into the hole and as she did she said I can feel it right here it did not go very deep. His skin is like a buffalo he has very thick hid and with all this hair and perhaps as far away as Sam was the bullet did not have much power by the time it got to Ooga. Anyway, I need another knife to hold the bullet against this knife. Turning Dan reached into his shoulder bag and got a small knife and handed it to Mary. This would be perfect she said and with that using both hands it was only a minute and she had the bullet laying on the blanket beside Ooga. When she did this she then made the blood run allowing any infection to be washed out. How did you learn how to do this Mary. Dan do you think as a little girl I did not learn anything? We teach all young children many things as they grow so they will be prepared to face many hardships in life.Β 

 

Ooga turned and was about to get up when Mary put her hand against his chest and pushed him back onto the bed. No, she said verbally this has to have something to stop the blood flow I will tie it so it will not bleed. As she was speaking she was tying a rag around his leg just above the knee. When she was finished Ooga just looked at Mary and with a nod of his head he had said thank you to her.Β  You will not be able to walk for a few days you will have to lay still and let the leg mend so get use to laying on that bed and do not worry we have many friends here that will keep others from harming you. Nuzzle began to howl and pretty soon I could hear others answer him and I knew for sure that Nuzzle had ask for a few friends to help secure this area and keep others from coming to our camp.

 

Ooga turned out to be just like all men who are hurt he wanted more attention than I had expected from him. I had to bring him lots and lots of water never in my life had anyone drank so much water as he did. She found he enjoyed roots and berries and because of the time of year we had many available to us. I filled my hat many times and he would put his hand into my hat and it took only moments and the hat was empty.Β 

 

After a few days of laying around I thought he would try to get up and move but he was content just lying there letting us feed him and bring water to him. Finally, after ten days or so I brought back a bag of berries and he was not in his bed I turned to Mary and ask where did he go. She laughed and said he was laying right there where he had always been. I looked again and said no he is not there Mary he has gone somewhere. About that time Ooga appeared just as he had been before but now I could see him. Mary has the ability to disappear now so does that mean he is well. No Dan he still cannot walk but he is strong enough to change as he just did. No wonder nobody can find these guys they hide right in front of you. I have heard stories of these big men in the redwoods of California for years but I just figured that it was more baloney than fact.Β 

After two weeks of care Ooga got up and limped over to the side of the fire pit where he took up the bucket I had for water and drank the bucket dry. During his stay I had learned that I could tell what he was thinking and knew whatever he wanted me to know. We sat around the fire pit many nights and the cats enjoyed him; they would lay beside him and even put their heads on his legs when they could. Nuzzle would just lay and watch him it was amazing to see how he had become a part of our family.

 

You know Mary that if I were to tell my friends back home that I had a princess for a wife, a horse that would fight for me a timber wolf and three mountain lions and a pet Eagle they would not believe a word I said after telling them all of this.

 

Which brings to mind I was just thinking about our new visitor Sam and was wondering if he had left the mountain or if he was still wanting to shoot Ooga just for the fun of it. Perhaps we should send Moe out and see if he can find Sam and then we would know if he left after my warning or not. Giving a loud whistle and screaming like and Eagle Ooga looked up wondering what was going on. Mary turned to him and told him what Dan had said and Ooga just shook his head.Β 

 

Dropping out of the ski and landing on a low branch beside the fire pit Moe just stood and look around like what had they wanted. Mary looked at Moe and said aloud do you remember who Sam is? Moe raised and lowered his head in indication that he knew. Have you saw him lately she ask? No was Moes response to that. We were wondering if you would see if you can find him we want to know if he left the mountain or not. In answer Moe just took off and was out of sight in a few moments. Dan then gave a nod to Nuzzel and said go find the cats and tell them what we want and spread the word that if he is anywhere around here we want to know. With that Nozzle took off and Mary just sat down beside Dan and putting her hand on his arm said what would you do if he is still here Dan.

 

Before I can do anything I would like to know that Ooga can walk and move as he should be able to. Ooga looked up and stood up but as he did you could see it was a job for him to get onto his feet. Well, that answer that we will just have to wait a little longer until you can function properly Ooga. What is it you would have me do Dan? We have been together so long now that I do not know if I read what you say or if you are speaking out loud to me. Why would I bother to speak out loud to you Dan that would be a waste of my energy.Β 

 

CHAPTER FIVE

 

Hiding in the forest

 

I have been doing a lot of thinking on this subject and it bothers me to think that someone can just decide to shoot something or someone and it not have consequences. Perhaps he learned his lesson and has left the mountain as you told him to do Mary said. Somehow I cannot picture in my mind him doing anything he was told to do. We will just wait and see first if he is still here and then we can decide what is to be done to protect Ooga from getting shot again.Β 

 

As Mary was setting out the dinner plates Moe landed and hoped over to her. Well, is he here she asked him? Waving his wings and squawking it was obvious to all that Moe had found Sam and he was here. That does not surprise me, in the least Mary I did not think he was worried about what I had to say. While he was talking Dan walked over to the tent and got his rifle out and brought it back and laid it on the log. Moe can you pick that up? Jumping across the fire pit half flying and half jumping Moe reached down and picked up the rifle and raised it over his head. Then bringing it back down to chest level he took off holding the rifle. Bring that back here Dan said in laughter as Moe circled the camp. Moe came right back where he had gotten the rifle and leaned it against the log just as he hand found it.Β  Well now that we know it is not to heavy for you which does not surprise me because I once saw an Eagle try to take off with a one-month-old Holstein cow calf and he almost got it off the ground he keep trying but the calf would raise but not enough for the Eagle to fly so he had to leave it but he would have taken that calf if he could have. So, it is not surprising that a fifty-pound rifle was too much for you.Β 

 

Here is what I would have you do Moe. I want you to go watch Sams camp and when he sets his rifle down and walks away from it I would like you to get it and bring it to me. Do not try if he is close to the rifle just wait for him to leave it long enough you can get it. Perhaps it would be a good idea if Eeny or Meeny would go along with you just to make sure he does not try to shoot you with a different gun. If he brings out a pistol or another Nuzzle rifle I would like you to jump in and take it away and bring it to me also. For you to get the gun would be enough I would suggest you take it out where Moe can get it and he would fly it back easier than you can carry it through the trees. That is if it is a rifle if it is a pistol then you could bring it to me easy enough.Β 

 

First we will remove any chances that Sam will find us and shoot Ooga when we are not watching. After Ooga can walk then we will do the next things that can teach Sam a lesson to be remembered. Yes Mary the depth of a fool is darkness and the wise man sees it. He knows not what he attempted and his eyes are blinded by that darkness. Knowing nothing and caring no more is why we must bring light to his path. After we take his teeth he will begin to see the light very brightly. I may not be a wiseman but I can sure bring Sam to the light.Β 

 

As the days passed and Ooga’s strength returned his usefulness became visible to us. He would go into the forest and return with things to eat we had never saw before. Many times, he would have hands full of roots we had no idea of what or where they came from and Mary had spent her younger life learning all the plants and berries that one could ever encounter yet Ooga would present to her and just stand and wait for her to comment on them. He had a way about him that continually amazed us his strength and stamina was so far over anything or any human I had ever meet. Standing beside me one day he just squatted down and as I looked over he had shot passed me and was hanging from a tree limb that must have been twenty feet up. Other times he would run towards the tree and it was like he could run up the tree. He would put his foot against the tree and then take another step like a lizard would climb a tree he did not stick to it he just ran so fast that his first steps against the tree just carried him up it. His speed and stamina was way beyond mine and I do not believe I have ever saw anyone to match what he showed me.Β 

In the starlight we can see Sam setting around his fire pit eating a rabbit he had shot during the day. He was talking to his horse and telling him how he was going to find that big man and if he had to drag him by his heels he was going to take him to town and show the others that he had tried to tell them there were people out in the woods different than us and we should be aware of it. I set that rifle right her by you Granger now where did it go? I am sure no one walked into camp and took it so it has to be here somewhere. Perhaps I am giving you too much time by the river and you are getting lazy with that tall grass and not watching the camp like you should be.

Moe had come flying into camp that afternoon with Sams rifle and just set it on the ground beside Dans rifle and then just looked up and watched to see what anyone would say about him bringing in the rifle. Nuzzle came into camp several hours later and he had a pistol in a holster dragging the belt full of bullets. Wow Dan says you too did really well I will make sure and reward both of you for this. Ooga will be pretty safe now that Sam has no weapons. Mary looked over at Dan and said, β€œhow many guns do you have Dan?” Oh, I would have to stop and count but you know it would be more than these two. Yes she said that is my very point we do not know for sure that he does not have more weapons the only way that we can be sure is to send Moe back and let him watch Sam and see how he gets his dinner and what other weapons he has. Then we will know for sure rather Ooga is safe or not and we cannot allow Sam to have another chance of killing him.

Ok Moe starting tomorrow morning we want you to go find a tree close enough you can watch Sam and let us know if he has more weapons. Now I would like each of you cats to get up close enough Sams horse gets nervous and starts to stamp and jump around knowing you are about. Then you can scream a few times and Moe will be up in the tree watching and that for sure will tell us if Sam has any more guns or not.Β 

The next day Moe took off early and before he left Dan made sure he had a good breakfast and he gave him another piece of meat to take along with him. The cats knew when Moe left what their jobs were so they took to the woods and was gone immediately. Mary, it seems we have a fairly good sense of whether Sam has more guns, and we’ll have a definite answer soon enough.

Was going to do a little fishing this morning but now I don’t think I can put my mind into it so I will just lean back and have another cup of coffee. Thirty minutes later Moe flue into camp and was dancing around like the ground was on fire standing on one leg then the other and flapping his wings all the time. Well, what have you got to report Moe don’t keep it a secret. Moe immediately flew over to Dans rifle and was picking it up and setting it down indicating Sam had another rifle. Well go back and keep an eye on him and if he tries to shoot anyone of our family come get us. With that Moe went to flight and was gone. Ooga what do you think about all this? Maybe you can offer some advice to this. Yes he let them know he could walk into the camp and bend the rifle barrel so that he could not hit a tree if he were on a limb. How can you do this and be safe Ooga? He will not be able to see me when I walk up and he knows that I am in the woods so I don’t have to worry about him telling others because we know he will anyway. Beside I would like to pinch him on the back of his leg so hard he will be days before walking.Β  Well, you have been out here in these woods so long it would be stupid for me to tell you what to do or how to do it so I will just follow you and be in the bushes if you should need me.Β 

Later that afternoon while Sam was preparing some meat to be hung over the fire pit to be smoked he looked up and that Eagle was back setting on the limb watching him. Sam said to Granger do you feel something is wrong or is it just in my mind that I smell something different. Granger shook his head up and down like yes I smell something. After living with an animal night and day for years you learn to read each other pretty plane so this tells me we have a stranger or a strange animal somewhere about here. About that time along came a skunk and it just wondered though the camp and out the other side. Sam had ran to his gun but when he saw the skunk he just sat the gun down and turned back to the fire pit. Then he heard something and turning he watched his gun that was leaning against the log just bend in half. That is not possible how can a gun setting there all by itself just fold in the middle? This makes no sense if I had not saw it happen I would not believe a gun could be made so flimsy that it just feel apart. It was as if someone came along and stepped on the middle of the thing. Ouch Sam yelled as he felt a bee had stung him on the back of the leg and he fell to the ground holding the back of his leg. Man, that hurts what was that that hit me. Sam had to crawl over to the log and could not get up onto the leg it hurt so badly.

Mary did you have anything to do with that skunk walking into that camp at exactly that moment? Well, I did promise a few eggs for his breakfast if he would just wonder through it was not like I had to beg him or anything he kind of wanted to do it anyway just to watch Sam run.Β Β 

As Sam lay on his back with his eyes closed he felt as if he had fell of a cliff and his neck hurt something awful and he had to force himself to open his eyes it’s like he had been ran over by a heard of buffalo. It took all of his ability to just force his eyes to open. The first thing he saw was the meat rack he had beside the fire pit was ripped apart and all the meat was gone. The fire was out and the coffee pot was laying in the pit flat as a squaw track; the bottom had even been bent out flat. The bladers he had for extra water was not just emptied into the fire pit they had been shredded from top to bottom. Looking around further he saw his horse Granger was gone and the rope that held him was torn in half. That horse never had the ability of breaking that rope how did that happen he wondered. Looking further he saw the stirrups to the saddle had been ripped from the saddle and lay beside the fire pit. His blankets he used for bedding had not just been torn apart they were also in ribbons ripped into shreds. His head hurt so bad he felt back and had a large knot on the top of his head. Not wonder he thought someone hit me and knocked me out. Shaking his head he looked over and his saddle bags had been ripped in half and the front was open showing that everything inside had been destroyed. He had many bullets and a power horn that was also missing. Turning his head and looking at his tarp, he had tied between two trees for a wind break and in case of rain had been torn down and it also was shredded so much it would be unusable. Oh, my what else and as he looked his bags of flower, coffee, salt and what little sugar he had was dumped in a pile of horse manure. His camp was a total disaster from one end to the next.Β 

Laying there his head hurting his neck hurting and his left leg was throbbing from what ever had hit him that part he remembered. Man would I like a drink of water and ever thing that I had is destroyed. What will I drink and what will I eat now. As he lay there he took a final look around and then that was when he saw the paw prints around the fire pit and as he continued to look he noticed there were many of them and he also saw a very large timber wolf pint in the mist of all the lions. But what really got his attention was the very large man’s footprint. Look at the size of that man’s bare footprint that is one big foot if I have ever saw one. He could not stand to put his foot next to it but he could see the print was almost twice his. He just leaned back and tried to figure out what he would do at this point.Β 

 

At supper that night each of the cats did not want anything to eat and neither did Nozzle. What is it with you guys this evening you usually eat everything I can set out. Even Moe did not drop in for a free piece of meat. Mary said I just see a little bit of what has happened and I think tomorrow morning we should take a little ride and to see what has happened to Sam. I think that would be a very good idea Mary.Β 

 

The next morning after breakfast Mary saddled Dawn and Dan saddled Shadow both putting saddle bags behind their saddles and both put a roll of bedding just in case they were to spend the night. Adam was still had to be carried by Mary and she had a special basket attached to the side of her horse so she could attend to him when the situation was needed.

Mary had ask Nozzle to lead them to the location and he was out front. Running ahead then stopping and turning his head back and watching to make sure they were in his sight. Crossing a small meadow Dan turned to Mary and said is that Sams horse over there against the trees. Yes I think it is who else’s could it be. Walking up Dan took ahold of the rope that was dangling from the horses neck and said this has been pulled apart not cut or untied as one might expect. We will bring it with us until we can decide what to do with it.

Continuing on Nuzzel came back and sat in front of Dan and just looked at him. What is it you want Nuzzel Dan ask. When Dan walked up Nuzzel just turned and walked to the side of Dan keeping in step but not getting very far from him. As they came through some heavy bushes Dan could see the campsite and all the distraction that had taken place. Stepping further into the camp he heard Sam moaning and he looked over and Sam was laying on his back his mouth was open and his eyes were closed but he was moaning and groaning. Leaning down Dan took from his shoulder the water bladder he carried and poured a few drops of water into Sams mouth.Β 

Licking his lips and in a very low voice said β€œMore” and Dan poured another small amount of water into his mouth. Sams eyes came open and he looked into Dans eyes and said β€œyou”, β€œyou are the one that caused me all these troubles”. No Dan said you did I told you to leave the mountain and you gave not thought to it. All this could have been avoided had you listened to my words.Β 

I was attacked by a giant of a man. He gave me no warning I just woke up in pain and the whole camp had been destroyed. As to no warning Sam how much warning did you give him when you shot him in the back of the leg. He was running away and I tried to stop him. Looks like you did a good job are you happy now you stopped him. I did not know he would do this kind of damage to me. Just what did you expect him to do Sam after you shot him. Was you expecting a gift or welcome just what would you have expected. Give me some more water please. Oh, now we finally get some please I did not know you knew the word.Β 

I have not eaten in I do not know how many days but it has been before he destroyed my camp. You come into our forest and now you want us to take care of you. Is that what you expect after all that you have done, Sam. Well, it is the Christian thing to do Dan. What do you know about Christians Sam you go out to kill and now want us to be Christians. What part of religion teaches you that it is ok to kill just for the fun of it. Dan leaned down and poured a stream of water into Sams mouth and it ran down his chin and onto his chest. Lapping it up as fast as he could Sam continued to drink as fast and as much as he could. Hold on their Sam I have been trying to give you just a little bit at time.Β 

All this time Mary had stood back and was looking at the camp site. Eeny, Meeny and Miny were lined up shoulder to shoulder just watching. All three were setting on the rear ends with heads looking all directions and not a noise from any of them. Nuzzel had ran into the pile of can goods that had been knocked all over and were laying spread wide. Looking up Sam ask how can you be friends with all these animals. Well to begin with Sam we don’t try to kill them and we treat them with the same respect we want from them. Maybe you should learn a lesson from all of this if you live through it.

What am I to do at this point Dan I cannot walk and everything I ever had has been destroyed. I don’t even have a gun any more everything is either missing or destroyed. Do unto others as you would have them do unto you shore shows as meaning full for you Sam. What would you like us to do now we are not going to set here and take care of you and we are not taking you back to our camp so what would you like us to do shoot you. Oh! No as bad a shape as I am in I do not wish to die could you take me to that trading post down on the river. Yes that would be very good.

We will have to make do with what you have so get prepared for a ruff trip. Pulling Mary off to the side Dan ask Mary do you have any of the gold nuggets here that we found. Yes Dan remember we put several into the bottom of you saddle bags. Mary I have a little surprise for Sam I would like to put a couple of gold nuggets in his pocket so he does not find them until he is being taken care of and those that find them will want to know where and how he got them. Then they will be coming up here looking for gold we do not want that. Mary I am not figuring on staying here I would like to pick up and pack out as soon as possible.Β 

Ok Dan I will slip a couple of little ones into his pocket and we will leave him at the station. Gathering up Sam and sense he had nothing it did not take long to get him mounted and they were on their way. Traveling about five miles was all the time they had that day but Sam told them that at this rate by tomorrow night they could be in Little Town.Β Β 

Making camp was fast because they found a camp site that had been used before and the campfire pit already dug out and there were stumps pulled around the edges. Even had extra firewood available now that is what I call good camping. When we leave we must leave it the same way.Β  Getting Sam off and into a comfortable position took a little effort but when Ooga took ahold of him he came out of the saddle and onto the ground in one quick motion. Turning to Ooga Dan said β€œbe careful we don’t want him to know you are here are had anything to do with his camp even though he knows let’s not give him anymore to use against us when he gets to his own people.”

 

After a getting everything ready it only took a little time and the party was on the way. It took Mary longer to get Adam ready and happy than anything else. Mary said to Dan I will surely be happy when Adam can walk and he had better by the time we get his brother here. Are you sure this one coming will be another boy it could be the girl you told about. No Dan this will be another boy I am sure of it.

After reaching the Little Town Dan pulled up in front of the sheriffs office and went in and found the man setting behind the desk had a belly big as a fifty-gallon drum and his boots that were on the desk had holes in the bottom and looked like they had been worn out twenty years ago. Well young feller what can I do for you. I am looking for the Sheriff. I am what’s left of him speak or go fishin. My name is Dan and I had a guy come into my camp up on the mountain East of here and he had been hunting a man and I ran him off after he told of wanting to shoot him just because he was so large.Β  So, what do you want me to do seems as though you took care of the situation. Turns out I had told him if he came back I would make life ruff on him and the next day I find he had shot the guy in the back of the leg just above the knee. And how do you know he was the one and how do you know where he was shot did you find the man. Yes we did Sheriff and I took him to our camp and we dug the bullet out of his leg and he is now doing good.

Seems like you do me a favor so I can cross that as to your needing my help. That is not quite how it ended up Sheriff we later found he had his camp destroyed and he figured I did it. First off stop calling me Sheriff I have a name and it is Penyton and I would thank you to use that not Sheriff. Ok Mr. Penyton we have him outside on his horse that we found on the way to his camp.Β 

Is he alive and breathing? Yes he is. Well, the next question I have for you is how did you find his camp and how did you know he was in trouble. First finding his camp was easy because I just let Nuzzel track him and Nuzzel is the one that came and got me to go to the camp. Nuzzel is a talking dog I take it. No Mr. Penyton when you have lived long enough with animals they let you know things if you listen. Yes I had a dog like that once he was very smart I had been training him not to eat and I just got him trained and he died on me.Β 

Perhaps we should go out and you can introduce me to this man, what is his name? Sam is all I know when he came into my camp he made sure I knew and he I one big fellow. The man he shot was bigger than him? Yes the man he shot is almost nine feet tall. The sheriff through down his cigar and looked Dan in the eye and said β€œdid you say nine feet tall. Yes I did and he is built to fit that height. Not in my life have I ever heard of anyone getting that big Penyton said as he went out the front door.Β 

Sam was leaned over and tied to the saddle so he would not fall off and when the Sheriff approached him he looked down at the Sheriff and said arrest this man Sheriff he tried to kill me. That is interesting to say the least now we have a killer wanting justice. Hell, there is no law against shooting an animal sheriff. Sam that is your name isn’t it? Yes. Dan here said you shot a man he didn’t tell me he was an animal. Well Sheriff what would you call a creature that is over nine feet tall and is covered in hair not skin like we have but hair like an ape. First thing comes to my mind his I would call him hairy. But can you tell me more about this guy we have been hearing rumors of others saying they have been seeing thing out in the woods that are like a big gorilla.Β 

Can you help me down from this horse? Dan lifted me up here like a ten-pound sack of flour.Β  He don’t show the strength he has but if you had watched him put me on this horse you would have a great respect for his strength.Β 

Lifting Sam from the horse took a few that were standing watching all this and when he was on the ground he could not stand his leg was hurting so badly. What happened to your leg Sam. I don’t know I was in camp and it was like something took a big bite out of it and I cannot put weight on it to walk. Do you need to see the doctor? Yes I think that would be a good idea but I have very little money. Reaching into his pocket he brought out two gold nuggets that were big as marbles. What do you mean you have no money where did you get those? I don’t know Sheriff I never saw them before.Β 

The men in the crowd started to yelling he has gold nuggets big as walnuts he has found where they are. The people started to push Sam and got right up in his face and wanted to know where he found them. Regardless of how many times Sam said he knew nothing about them the more the people got mad and insisted he tell them.Β 

Thing got out of hand and the Sheriff was screaming and yelling for those that had ahold of Sam to let him go. The crowd had grown in size so fast that the Sheriff had to shoot this six gun into the air and yell shut up all of you I am tired of all this. Let go of Sam and you can talk all you want to him later right now he is telling me he has been out hunting Big Foot. With the crowd already excited and growing in size fast the words went out in a hurry that Sam had shot Big Foot and that surprised the Sheriff because no one should have known. Little did Penyton know that nothing said in his office was a secret to anyone everyone knew two minutes after it was said. Word spread through town like free drinks at the bar.Β 

While this was going on the Mayor of the town Mr. Brown who had been watching all this heard all of this plus he had gotten a look at Mary Dans wife and he had turned to his assistant and said I am going to get that woman for myself. She is the most beautiful woman I have ever saw. Crowley the assistant pointed out that she was an Indian and there would be talk if he were to have a squaw in his house. We’ll let em talk I will have that woman and not allow the old bitties talk all they want I get what I want and they can go to blazes for all I care. How much resistance can one guy cause I have many men who can handle him and I will see him run out of town and he will be lucky to have his life.Β 

Sam had been carried over to the doctor’s office but the problem was he was on the second floor and it took four men to get him up the stairs and into Dr. Smith’s office. While that was going on others were crowding around Dan wanting to know if he had any gold and if he knew where Sam had gotten his. Dan explained that he was camping and just meet Sam and knew nothing about the man, which was not lying. But the shoving and crowding was making Adam cry and he was throwing a fit that would not stop.Β 

When others came around Mary and Dan the lions came running into town and Nuzzel knocked one man down and was standing oh him. The crowd went wild running and screaming the town is being invaded by mountain lions there are hundreds of them and the hysteria grew and the more that ran the louder the crowd became. Mary had gotten out of the saddle trying to calm Adam down and when all the excitement started she was having problems getting into the saddle when all a once she was lifted and placed in the saddle. Thank you Ooga I was in trouble trying to get onto the horse. Dan just jumped from the sidewalk which was higher than the street but he made one swift leap and was astraddle of Shadow and when he hit the saddle he just said lets go now. Shadow turned and headed out of town and the Mayor was watching and was to far away to slow Dan or Mary in their efforts to leave. So, with dust flying Mary and Dan was going as fast as the horses could travel and no one was in the way because they had ran for their homes. The dogs from town were barking the windows upstairs were full of those wanting the last words and not wanting to miss anything. Horses were running wild though the streets and to make it worse Rip Raffel’s pigs broke through the fence and were running around chasing the dogs.Β 

Ooga was swatting dogs from one side to the other the dogs did not see him but knew from the smell and they were trying to attack him. The show that was going on was exciting to say the least Mrs. Fowler later told everyone the dogs were being thrown into the air and nothing was there to throw them. The sight was total disaster from one end of town to the other. Pigs running wild, dogs cats and horses fighting just to make noise.Β 

The men were gathering around the front of Bill’s Pool Hall trying to find a way to find where that gold was and part of them wanted to know about Big Foot and the fact he had been seen. We have to find that camp where Sam was and it may be a good idea if we could find Dans place all so if he knows Sam had gold he may have gotten his hands on it and it could be in his camp. We have to check everything and Big Foot will just have to wait.Β 

Leaving the town and crossing two streams Dan slowed down and allowed Mary to ride beside him. How is the little one doing Mary he asks. Oh, he has stopped screaming and has been laughing now he thinks all that noise was for him. He is enjoying all the people and all the attention we all got. I don’t think it would be a good idea to go back to our camp except to load some of the stuff and get away from there as fast as possible.Β 

Β In the meantime, back at the Lost knowledge the local newspaper Jules Cutrate a writer who had come to town because he had heard stories the Big Foot had been heard of in this area. So, he was meeting with Ed Frisk the publisher and owner of the daily paper. Ed you know I came to town because I heard that Big Foot was here and now that this opportunity has come to light I want to have help from back east to help me follow and get all the information possible about the giant of the forest. My readers are all wanting to know more about him and what he looks like what he does and why no one can get close to him. So please help me hire someone while I am waiting for help from back east.

Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β Β 

Ooga lead Dan and Mary up a stream until another stream lead into the one they were following. Turning to the right and continuing up stream staying in the water so the dogs could not follow the scient and footprints would not show. Ooga had so many attempts to follow him over the years he knew just what to do and how to do it so no one could follow him. Continuing up the stream it came alone side of a cliff so the water was washing against the mountain and as they got to the side of it Ooga reached out and taking a hold of a tall rock that appeared to be leaning against the mountain which it had been doing for a thousand years but know he pulled and it came away from the mountain far enough we could slide inside. The rock was so large no one would ever imagine it being moved but after getting on the inside I see that Ooga had called for help and there were four other fellows pushing the top of the rock far enough we could walk right on in and not have to unload the horses or anything. We all followed Ooga into the mountain and turning I could see why no one could ever find this places. We had not left the water we were still in the water up to our knees when we went into the space opened to us. After going in the men just let the rock settle back against the mountain and it would have been impossible to know we had turned from the water.

The whole family joined us as we went into the mountain. Even the three mountain lions had no problem going with us but I had not realized that Ooga was talking to them all the time. Nuzzle would be by my side regardless but I have no doubt he had heard one way or another the thoughts of Ooga. As we went back into the mountain I could see very plainly because there were torches on both sides lighting the way. As we went in the trail was slightly up hill so the further we went the higher we were above the water from the stream. The opening was all of twenty feet wide and I could not see the top so it was not like I was in a cave it was more like I was in a large valley that was very dark. But like I say the torches had everything we could see but I suspect that Ooga and those that had now joined us did not need the lighting I think they could travel this without the lights. Don’t know what made me think this maybe it was another thing that I just knew in my mind without verbal words.Β 

Later I learned that Deep Pockets (don’t know if that was his real name but it is the only one I ever heard used) the town banker had called a special meeting with all the share holders in the bank and had explained to them that with the gold that had been found on Sam it could very well start a gold rush which would bring many people to this area and the bank would make a very good income from those that would be coming in to build and to buy things necessary to mine for more gold. So, he was explaining to all that they must join those that were out hunting for Dan and see if they could learn more from him about where the gold came from. He felt a thousand-dollar bounty for bringing in Dan and another thousand if they could bring in Big Foot. This he told them would give the extra incentive to get this done.Β 

 

As Dan and Mary rode back into the cave they came to a very large room which to her surprise was well lit. Looking up she could see a very large rock that seemed to bring in the light and spread it throughout the room. She stopped and pointed up for Dan to look and he said it looks like a crystal but I have never saw one that big before. Looking around the room they, both were lost in what to say there was so much to see. A water fall at the back into a pool of water that was so clear you could see the bottom of the pond it fell into. Starting at the pond and winding up running all the way around the giant room was a trail leading to the top which was a long way up. At different places were openings like small caves that were on the trail. So, in effect they had a stairway to more possibly private caves.Β  Children were in the pool playing and swimming and they were just like Ooga they had hide that was very hairy exactly like Ooga. The pool was so large it made it impossible for Dan to count the children and the fact they were running all about did not help. The fact the room held a very good temperature was not lost on Dan either. Coming to a stop Ooga was standing with several others that were his size and they also looked like Ooga but each was different but not by a lot. Some a few inches shorter some taller but all built the same way and obviously they were welcoming Dan and Mary into their homes.Β 

I don’t know if I hear them or if it just comes to me what they are saying but I know that we are the first to ever be allowed to see what we are seeing. The fact we had helped Ooga and taken care of him was what had done the trick. It was known that we would never be allowed to tell others what we were seeing and we knew that but they knew we would honor that. Dan had no idea how many people were here but they were all busy doing one thing or another. As Dan took a few minutes more to just look around he saw many small openings in the walls that were perhaps five feet wide and twelve feet high just guessing.

 

In the center of the room was a large table with stacks of greenery that was piled very high and there were many different plants there. People would just stop by and take a hand full and walk off eating it. A small boy came by and took both Dan and Mary’s horses and another young man took ahold of Buster and led them off around the corner from where Dan could not see them. This place is Hugh Dan said it does not end with what we can see it goes on and on. Yes Mary said and what is up there where that trail led too. The women were cleaning the branches on the table and Dan noticed that they just like the men were hair all over their bodies and the woman had large breasts just as other women in the world do but these were hairy and the nipple had no hair growing around them.Β 

One of the women came up to Mary and picked up Adam and held him to her and Mary could tell she was very pleased to be allowed to hold him. She indicated that they were to follow her so Dan stepped up beside Mary and they were led around another corner and an opening of about five feet was on their left and this woman just walked into it and as she did she picked up a small stone and when she moved her hand across it the stone lit up and the whole room started to shine from the light. Looking around there were several beds with skins of some kind stretched across a wooden frame. A table was against one wall and several chairs but Mary did not know if she could set on one they were so tall. She went over and sat on a bed and it was just right for her height. Anything they wanted she was told would be furnished and they were expected to come to the middle of the room after unpacking all of her stuff. She looked around and there were deer antlers all along the wall that were used for hooks to hang stuff on. The woman left after Dan had told her how much we appreciate the hospitality.Β 

Dan she said when she picked up Adam have you ever in your life saw a cave so large. Never heard of any around here but we are new to this area and who knows what else is around here in all these mountains. I would like to go up that ramp or whatever they call them and see if we can get on top of the mountain. When we go out I will ask that question what do you have in mind Mary. Well Dan sense we walk into that little town things have grown terrible in the world. What do you mean Mary. Well first I did not have a chance to tell you but the Mayor of the town wants to capture me and make him his woman. I can stop that if I can get on top of this mountain by just putting a curse on him.Β 

Woe! little princess are you saying you have the same thing as a witch? Dan a witch was a title gave to someone who does harm. I do not do this to harm him I do it to save me and if he is like this to me who else and what will he do in the future I can prevent that. Dan there is more to this there is a man who wants to write a story about the man we call Ooga and he calls him Big Foot and he wants to get all the information possible about him he has offered a hundred dollars to anyone who will give him any information that he does not have. Dan that is more money than some of these people make all year. The barber is offering free haircuts to any who brings him information. Sally’s is offering a free poke to any man that will bring information. The grocery store is offering twenty dollars of free food. It has gone crazy here the people are so greedy I have never saw such as this is. Are all of your people this way Dan? No Princess, not all but those that are greedy have a way of making those around them be greedy also. Hunger for what one does not have is a strong incentive to be tight with money. Some have a signal and they touch there elbow with the palm of the other hand indicating that you are such.Β 

How can we go anywhere or do anything with all these people wanting to know if you can tell where Sam got the gold. This gold is making everyone in this village crazy with hunger for riches. Like the Mayor in my village if a man were to want me from you he would have to challenge you to a fight and the winner would take me and I would have no choice. This, however, would not be possible because my statis in my world would not allow them to challenge you. But we still have rules even though they speak of us as uneducated heathens.Β 

Let us join the people and learn all we can from these who live in the forest.Β  The men in town are saying that we are hiding in the forest and they will not stop until they find us. Even if they could follow our footprints under water they could not lift that large stone in front from the outside. You notice that they had built a place at the top of the stone on the inside where they could put many men and they are at the top on the inside pushing which allows the stone to move.Β 

After taking care of little Adam, they walked into the great room to see all the people in lines facing a great picture of a cross and all were on their knees with their heads bowed. Dan said they are praying and we must not do anything to disrupt this. I have not ever saw so many people with total silence as this. But Mary you have noticed they don’t speak allowed like we do anyway. The silence that I felt was strong inside me when we entered anyone. I could not understand how that could be with the children running around playing the women working and all those men doing whatever each was doing and not a noise was amazing to me. A few grunts and many whistles from one or the other I was in shock of all that silence but it is very relaxing to me. We must be quite while they pray.Β 

After a few minutes all stood and put both hands in the air and then they reached down and picked up whatever that was they were kneeling on and all went a different direction. Everyone busy I noticed that each seems to have a job to do and everyone stays busy doing whatever it is they are building. Most I noticed make baskets and water containers. In my village they would be making arrows or bows but I do not see a weapon being built. Let us ask Ooga why and if they eat meat.Β 

Ooga walked up and with him were two others and they stopped in front of Dan and Mary and they spoke but not verbally I heard what they said Dan told Mary. Thank you for your hospitality Mary said in her mind and one of the men held his palm out with the fingers up and Mary pushed her hand against his and then Dan did the same thing and all both of the others with Ooga did likewise. Then Ooga said this is Muta and Aero they are leaders here in the home.Β 

Aero ask if there was any questions. Mary said yes I would like to know if that trail leads to the top of this mountain and the outside. Yes he said Mary we knew of your coming the same way you knew of our people. We know that you have the gift of your people and have many powers they do not have. We have accepted you into our lives because of this and we also feel the warmth of both of your hearts and we see many good things. We also know of the hunt the villagers are doing trying to find the yellow rocks and also the desire to capture you. Do not let it bother you in the least we have been hunted for hundreds of years and so far they have only caught a glimpse of us once in a while. This is a game to us and we enjoy playing with them but we have a big advantage we know what they are thinking and when they set a trap we already know where and what it will be. So do not be alarmed we are very experienced in this game.

Thank you Aero for that and yes I know a lot more than I have told Dan about but that will come in time. Right now, I would ask that we be allowed to partake of something to eat. Would fish be alright he asked? That would be wonderful, Mary said. With that Muta turned and with a hand he pointed to the pond and three men came forward and jumped into the water and in only a moment he raised up and gave another a large fish then he ducked down and came back up with another and he did this until he had four nice fish that were each about an arm length each. The men holding the fish walked over and put them on the table where several women cleaned them and washing in a bucket that must have been there for that very reason cleaned them off and then she walked over to the wall and rolled a rock that was setting on a shelf to the side and in behind it was what appeared to be a small fire pit and she placed the fish on what looked like rods of some kind and in a single motion the fire came to life. I will have to learn how she did that Mary thought to herself. Then she just rolled the rock back in front of the opening and turned to us. Reaching into a bag beside the table she brought out what looked like potatoes and she placed these on a wooden plate and began to cut them into pieces. Another woman was cutting up carrots at least that is what they looked like.Β 

Ooga said that they did not drink coffee but they had it available and knowing Dan was a big user they had a regular coffee pot waiting on the side of the table and the steam was coming off the pot so Dan knew it was hot. In only a few minutes Dan and Mary sat down to a table and among the things that were available to them was milk for Adam and a bowl of something that looked like ground corn or whatever it was but there was a large bowl of that and a small bowl for Adam.

After breakfast Muta walked up and ask if they would like to see the top of the mountain now. Yes I sure would Dan said and Mary said let me get a pack to put Adam in so I can carry him with us. She left returning with a wooden frame with should straps that allowed Adam to be hung on Mary’s back in a special soft leather basket tied to the frame for her backpack.

On the way up the walk Ooga joined them and together they were going up the trail when Muta ask Dan if OogaΒ 

 

CHAPTER SIX

 

Enjoying the fruits of life

 

had told him of the ships that came to the mountain at different times. Ship to a mountain how can a ship come to a mountain Dan ask. Well, Muta said maybe it is not a ship because it comes from above and not out of the water but it is as big as a ship. Now Muta had Dans full attention and Dan ask if Muta had heard that Dan had wings and could fly. Muta stopped, turned, glanced at Dan, and asked, “You think you can fly?”Β  I have flown many times and when we get to the top of this mountain it may just be a perfect place for me to take off from. Ooga turned to Muta and said he had been saved by Dan flying over and he hung onto his legs while he lifted him from harms way. Are you telling me Ooga that you have been in the ski like a bird with Dan. Yes I told you that before. I thought you were just imagining it. No, he can fly like an Eagle and sore in the winds.Β Β 

Dan wanted more information about those that Muta had called ships that came from the ski. Did they land here on the mountain top he ask? Yes they come every so often and they may just land for a few minutes or they once were here for several days. But we never know when they will arrive. Do you see those that fly this ship Dan ask. Yes we have spoke to them on several occasions. We will go into this subject again but right now I would like to look at the top and walk around it a little bit and kind of get the feeling of how big and what is here.Β 

Walking around and looking down Dan saw that indeed there was a cliff and it went straight down from the top and was about fifty feet wide with no trees or anything to get in the way of Dan taking off from here. In fact, Dan said it is the perfect place because there is even room to land here and I can get a run at the edge of the mountain if I should want to. The mountain was very large on top and had a few trees but they were not very tall and Dan called them scrawny little things. Walking around Dan could see where something had burnt the surface of a pretty big area and it made no sense to him how it had seemed to even heat the vegetation that had been growing there. Dan ask Muta is this where that ship stopped. Yes it was here several times and each time it stopes right here. Mary notice that where this is it is much lower than the surrounding area so with the ship setting here no one from below or on another mountain would be able to see it. I don’t understand this but they would be able to hid and no one would suspect them of being up here on this mountain top. This is mighty interesting Mary I would like to know more about this and I wonder how many from Little Town have saw one of these ships. Not sure we will get on good enough terms with them to find the answer but if I find someone that is one of my first questions.Β 

You know Mary that these people have knowledge and don’t even know they have that knowledge. What do you mean Dan? Well think about it my flying was a big thing to others what would they think if they saw something as large as a ship. Also, I would like to know what could burn the ground so bad across such an area and another thing is the whole area was burnt the same all over. Think about this Mary a fire burns some places and others it does not like a tree can burn but next to it is not as hot but this burn was total and from side to side nothing that did not get totally burnt.Β 

Mary another thing I found out was during the conversation of those ships I was told that when the people from the ship were talking with Ooga and friends they talked of time. I do not understand all that I hear but the way I understood it was they were told that time is like a coin. Two sides the one side is the past the other is the future. When one wants to look back they think of the past but when wants to think of the future you must think in the future. How can one think in the future when it is not here yet. They say we have the ability of either one. Both in our heads just a matter of getting head adjusted to that type of thinking. Makes my head hurt while trying to think about it. May be I think in the future I lay down and take a nap that be my future.Β 

You go take a nap I think I will go to the mountain top and make a small fire and then I put Mr. Brown in a deep brown hole where he no longer wants woman. OK, see you later I don’t want to watch that it is better if I take nap and stay away from that stuff.Β 

Dan went to their house and Mary went to the top of the mountain and Nuzzel, Eeny and Miny went along to be with her and on the outside of the mountain. The cats with all the camping saw Mary shape the fire pit and immediately went and started bringing in firewood. This time she told them we want green wood not dry wood we want lots of smoke to let the gods know we are talking. After getting the fire burning and much smoke boiling out of the fire pit. Mary stood in front of the smoke and began her communications with the heavens. Along with the name and title of Mr. Brown the Mayor of Little Town she described the man as to being two inches taller than her and had a face like a frog his face was covered with marks of some kind and his eyes were like two holes in the snow. She went on to describe him and then she said he will no longer be able to concentrate on women and he would not be able to bring strength to his body parts necessary to satisfy him or a woman. He would no longer desire a woman to even be around him he would be happy to be alone and not have the even hear a woman’s voice. She told of the headaches and pain he would get when he tried to talk and he would not be able to even think about touching one. With this she ended by repeating the family tree as far back as her great grandmother and the knowledge that had been passed on to her and she also told that she would not receive any displeasure or problems from putting this lifestyle on Mr. Brown because she was doing the world a favor not one that was only for her benefit. She knew that by giving others a future of negativity she could receive part of that so she wanted the Gods to know she was helping more than the one she was hindering. With that she threw a bag of bones she had picked up and through them into the flames. Let this begin she said and then put the fire out.

Crowley turned to Mr. Brown and said we have all in place for when that woman called Mary should show up here in town. We have men waiting to capture her and we will put something in her mouth so she can’t yell and let others know and we have cabin ready for her. I have changed my mind I no longer want that woman in fact I want you to get Mayble out of my house and out of my sight. I never want to see her again or any other female that has been my sore spot and cost me all this money and time. That will be the last time I spend money on such trash and such nonsense as I have been doing for years. What has happened to you to change so much so fast Mr. Brown? Finally got my head straightened out and can see that I have been wasting a lot of time and a lot of money. Get rid of the men pay them off and send them down the road if I need them I will let you know. Good day Crowley and with that he turned and walked off.Β 

Turning to Dan Mary said I would like to know more of what they told you those that were in the ship talked and I would like to know as much as I can about what was said. Well, we can ask for more information but it was confusing to me he was talking about Energy and that all things on our earth has energy. Has the sunlight got energy Dan? That was another thing he said that all of earth have ways of transfer thoughts and one of them was that each verbal thought had to have a definition as to its meaning. Without this definition what one said the other would not know the meaning. Well, we know several languages and we have not dictionary how do we know. His point was that we have idea of what energy is but we not understand that energy is a lot more than most understand. Yes sunlight has energy but so does a thought when verbal to the world.Β  Mary many of these things I tell you but I not know what the thing is about anymore than you do. But he did say a thought is an energy but a different kind so thought is not the same type of energy a thought he says is a whole different thing. A thought can go around the world ten times and not even have a way of timing it because it happen before you can time. He even went beyond that he say we can move our thoughts anywhere we want to and we can understand more than verbal. Look Mary we are talking with Ooga and several others and we not move our lips. I have gotten to the point I can walk up and know what I am to know very fast. He says there is not time except the time we put on it. Whatever that means. He also said that if the mind was to put a message to a friend in another country he would be able to speak to them as we speak to Ooga.Β 

Dan this is more things than I have ever been allowed to even talk with other leaders in my village. Well one more thing before we stop talking about it I must tell you. Let me think how he said it. Oh! He said that our mind travels by a different energy and if the mind could overtake the body then the body would be this energy and that energy could travel and when arrived wherever you want you can trade the energy back and be where you imagined you wanted to be. Dan are you telling me that I can think about our village and then go to that village and be with my family in a heartbeat. Mary listen to me I do not understand all this and I want to know a lot more about this and also those that visit this mountain. I would like to know what they look like, where they came from. He did say the name of another universe and I don’t even know what a universe is. I will promise you this, Mary after we have stood on the bank of the great ocean on the West we will return here. I would like that Dan. I do not like living in this cave because I like to see the sun rise in the morning and I want to see it grow dark slowly. I not use to walking into sunshine from darkness. But I do want to know more about this travel and also I would like to see those who float the great boat in the ski.Β 

Now I would like to take Adam and go set on the banks of a lake and just relax and enjoy the sunshine. I am not sure if we can do that right now the forest is full of men who are everywhere looking for us. I think I can stop some of that let me take our whole family to the lake and when someone shows we will chase them away. The trouble with that Mary is one of our furry friends may get shot chasing someone away and then we have other problems.

 

Ooga what do you suggest we would like to leave the cave and spend a little time in the forest what would you have us do? Go on top of the mountain and you have what you want and no one can find you there. Can we take our horses and mules also? Of course, you can just ride them up the trail and they we be happy when the see the sunshine also.Β 

So, the whole family was laughing at Adam trying to walk and Moe landed alongside of Adam and walked beside him as he stumbled along. Mary do you know how many kids have ever saw an Eagle let alone have one for a personal pet. Yes Adam is not old enough to understand how lucky he is to have such a bird to be a friend. Dan have you looked down to see if you could fly from here. Yes Mary and I have no doubts that I could take off from here and also land here so this is an ideal place for us to be camped. Do you think you could fly and take Adam with you? I had not thought about it but if I had a way to hang him in front of me I could take him for a ride. We will talk about this later.

Dan I have a suggestion that you may not want to help but I think it would be a good way to stop them from hunting us. What do you have in mind Princess? Well Dan they have a camp somewhere and they all go out and hunt us from that camp. I would like to have our friends help us and also Ooga and his friends. Just what would take so many people to do. I would like to cause them problems kind of like our friends did to Sam. How would you knock out that many men at once. We do not have to knock them out we just have to cause a lot of troubles and cause them to be in confusion. How would you do that? Allow me to show you. We first must talk to those that would help and I think many would enjoy causing those that hunt them to have problems. I will go along with this crazy idea as long as we both know that no one I to be killed. Oh, Dan I not want them knocked out I not want them dead I just want them to have many problems.

That night at the campfire the townspeople had built several fire pits to cook and to add light to the camping area. As Tom went to walk between two fires his front foot was knocked sideways and his step which should have been along side of the fire pit seemed to be pushed sideways and he stepped into the fire box with all the meat hanging into the fire and he knocked most sticks and the meat feel into the flames. His pants caught on fire and he jumped and pulled himself free of the fire but everyone was yelling you crazy idiot you knock everything off and spoil our dinner. Are you drunk what is wrong with you.

Rodger reached for the rack that had held the meat and he lost his balance and dropped the water jar he had into the firepit. The flames died down and the sparks flew everywhere. John came running to grab Rodger and he stepped into the fire pit next to this one trying to help. Johns pants caught on fire and he was screaming and yelling. Martha was putting meat onto the fire next to that one and the smoke and flames were so much she could not see and she was staggering around trying to get herself in control when Bob ran into her and pushed her into the rack holding the meat for the fire pit. The dogs started to bark at something that no one could see but they were running around barking and twisting this way and that like they were trying to bite something that no one could see.Β 

The confusion and screaming came from everyone who was around watching and they started to laughing and yelling of the stupid stuff happening. Doug jumped up from his log and was threating to shoot the next guy that stepped into a fire pit. You dumb thing he was screaming at Martha and she was yelling back at him. The noise got the dogs more excited and the barking got worse the crowd noise got so bad you could not talk. Someone stumbled and feel into the table that had all the plates, glasses and pitchers of water. The table got knocked over with all the confusion and part of the salads, ketchup, mustard, bread and fixtures for dinner went into two different fire pits and that that did not was trampled by others. Betty Boston went into a fit of screaming and yelling that added to the excitement. Who turned the horses loose no one knew but they were running into the crowd and trying to get away from all of this the horses were running through the tents alongside. Somebody was throwing whiskey bottles into the fire pits making the flames jump and dance higher.Β  Tents were torn down tables were overturned. Somehow all the beds that were in the tents seemed to just roll into the isles. Children were running everywhere hunting their mothers and fathers and that added to the turmoil. Kids yelling for Mom or Dad, dogs barking, men screaming at each other. Some were fighting and rolling into the tents and tables.

 

The next morning as the men sat around the campfire holding their heads. Some with black eyes some with slings holding their arms, some with crutches carved out of anything they could find to support themselves. This is a fine how dee doo if I have every saw one. Look at this crowd does it look like we can assemble this into any king of manageable society. Gladys says she is packing up the kids and everything they brought and she is leaving. Yes Tom said mine woman says the same thing she is not going to stick around for more of this. We will be lucky to have enough to make much of a hunt out of this and I don’t see how we could expect them to ever return.Β 

Setting on the mountain top looking down ten or twenty Big people were setting and watching the activities. Dan turned to Mary and said that was a great idea and I have another one. Way back when I was in Boston I owned a shop and I took pictures for a living. I developed and framed these and sold to my customers. So, I have experience in photographs as we use the term today. My idea is based on the fact that our next biggest problem is the newspaper man who is offering all this money and is going to bring thousands of people here to chase and make life terrible for those they call Big Foot. Mary I know how to stop this and have it over forever.Β 

OK Dan I believe you what do you need to do this? Well first I need the camera. How do we do that she asks? If I can explain to Ooga what it looks like he could walk in while invisible and walk right out with it.Β 

Ooga I have a special favor to ask of you. Let me explain what it is I need. Drawing in the sand on the bank of the lake Dan drew a picture of a tripod and what the camera looked like. Then he told how he would know about the room where Jules Cutrate has his developing equipment. After Ooga walked in he waited for Jules to take a picture and then he went back to Dan and described what he had saw and wanted to know if that was what he wanted. Yes Dan told him Ooga went back and Jules put the camera away for the day. Ooga just waited for Jules to turn his back and Ooga walked out the door with the camera, the stand for the cameras and the bar for the flash which Dan had forgotten to mention.Β 

Bringing all the camera and attachments to Dan Ooga just stood and waited for Dan response. Ooga how did you know to bring the flash bar? He used it while I watched and if he used it I thought you might want to use it, so I brought it too. Now what I need to do is get you to find me several pigs that we can use in our pictures. That not a problem I have many such friends. When you want them? We will go down by the lake and set up a place where I can take the pictures I want.Β 

Lining up the pigs and putting one in a dress that Mary had gotten from a little girl she had been saving for her own daughter. They dressed a pig in a dress then got it to stand next to another pig and when all ready to take the picture he had Ooga step between the camera and the pigs so when he took the picture you could not see the pigs only Ooga. So Dan took many pictures then with Ooga and several others he took all the equipment to town and late at night slipped into Jules’ dark room and developed the pictures.Β 

The next day Dan walked into Jules Cutrate’s office and lad down several photos off Big Foot. He was standing down by the lake which gave depth to the picture but the trees in the background showed just how large a man he was. Jules looked at the pictures and immediately got excited and was offering Dan as much money as he had ever thought possible for taking pictures. That is more money than I got for selling the hole studio back home. Jules paid Dan for the pictures and then wrote a brief description of what they were seeing and all the proof necessary to show what others could see in the forest around here. When Jules put them into the envelope to send Ooga walked up beside Dan and together they watched the image of Ooga disappear like it had never been there and all that was shown was a family of pigs and one had a dress on and the other was leaning over her like he was helping her up or something. In the background were many other pigs.Β 

Yes Ooga when they get these pictures back inΒ 

Boston Jules will not be as popular as he once was. No one will ever want to hear him speak of the Big Foot that he told so much about and then sent a picture of a family of pigs for proof. Will be interesting to wait and see how long it takes Jules to pack up and leave.Β 

 

Dan that was a very clever idea that you had and I am sure we will not have to put up with him much longer. That will draw the offers for money for information to a dry up. Now what else do we have to solve before we can continue our travels to the ocean. Andrew is getting to where he can walk but I am getting so big I can hardly walk. Soloman will be our next boy and he will be a great man with your people.Β 

I think the way to find if we have problems or not is to just walk right down the sidewalk and I will take you into a cafΓ© which I will bet you have never sat at a table and let someone else wait on you. Come on Mary get Adam and lets go to town.Β 

Walking into Diana Diner they were escorted over to a table that had a highchair beside it. Putting Adam in the chair the lady turned and set a menu in front of Mary and said that is the specials the regular everyday good stuff is written on the blackboard over there. With that she left and returned with two glasses of water. Would you like coffee she ask. Yes Dan said and Mary said, β€œcan I have what I want?” Of course, what would you have Mary. I would like some peppermint tea. Laughing Betty, the waitress said we do not have peppermint but we do offer a green tea. That would be fine Mary said and Betty turned to Dan and ask if he knew what he would like to order.Β 

Looking at the wall and then the menu Dan said I think I would like some of those griddle cakes and a half dozen eggs not turned over just make sure the yokes are not broken. First I need to know is that mush that they speak of is that like oatmeal a bowl of ground up wheat or corn. Yes Mary that is about what it is. Ok bring one for Adam and I will take a very large fish. Where do you see fish Mary? It is not on the menu and not on the wall. You said I could have anything I wanted now you limit me to a list of things. Mary if your intention is to make me angry you are wasting your time. I can set and drink my coffee and enjoy the day just fine.Β 

Ok Dan just order me something to eat I want to see how they fix it. You will have to have permission to go into the kitchen but here. Betty can Mary be allowed to look into the kitchen. With that Mary got up and followed Betty into the kitchen where she stood and watched as two male cooks were putting eggs on the skillet and a large steak was on another stove top but both men were very busy cooking. One of the cooks turned to Mary and ask if she had never saw a man cook before. Yes she said but never when he did not have to bend over the fire to do it. For such a pretty woman you have never saw the inside of a white man’s house. No, she said I have never. I lived in the villages of many but none cooked on what ever this is you use. Joining Dan at the table Betty sat the bowl of cereal in front of Adam and Mary added a little milk and she turned to Dan and said what is this white stuff that they have in this little bowl? Oh, Dan said you have never tasted sugar have you. “Sugar? What is that?” Mary asked, curiosity flashing in her voice.

“Well, Mary, lick your finger and then put it into that bowl,” he said, gesturing toward the glistening granules. Mary did as instructed, her finger sinking into the fine crystals. “Now taste it,” he continued, his tone gentle and encouraging. She brought her finger to her mouth. As the sweetness melted on her tongue, a delighted smile spread from ear to ear, and her eyes lit up with pure, sparkling joy. The surprise of the sugar’s delicate taste and the rush of sweetness made her giggle softly, savoring this simple pleasure for the first time. If I put this on Adams cereal he will want it every time I serve him this thing they call mush. We can arrange that princess we will be around others for the next part of our journey I am sure.Β 

After breakfast Dan took Adam and put him on his shoulders and then with Mary at his side he walked down the sidewalk looking in all the store windows and Adam would squeal and point to different things and Mary was amazed at the different cloth that was on the dresses. Mary said I have never saw so many colors and they are so bright and cheerful to see. A few people nodded but no one said anything derogatory or degrading to either of them so they just continued on down looking a enjoying the sights of the shopping area. You know Princess I was wondering about Barber that was giving those free haircuts to. that I never did hear what happened to that barber that was giving free haircuts. Dan I forgot to tell you somehow he started to loose his eyes sight. Real 130 Strange how he just developed this eye problem out of nowhere and he was cutting their hair show bad that most of his business dried up and he was trying to sale everything he has so he can move. Mary you didn’t happen to have anything to do with that barbers eyes sight would you? Not as much as you may be thinking I did offer a few suggestions if that counts against me. Do I have to stand you on your head and shake this out of you Mary. Please tell me how he went blind and you only offered advice. Well, he was offering money to everyone for this information so I just offered some advice. Ya and they took that advice and now what Mary? Turns out he didn’t listen so what he lost was his own fault, not mine. Please explain this for me. I was very honest with him I told him that if he sold information and it was not true would he not get into trouble Dan? Well, he didn’t listen he like the Raccoon that got killed on the railroad tracks he didn’t listen. You know Mary I am sure glad you didn’t go back East to collage. Why Dan? Because sometimes I cannot understand how you can be so wise and yet so unschooled. Big words makes little man. But I not just have my knowledge I have added several grandmothers that have added to my wisdom. Do you think that because they were smart and died that you got added educational 131 rights. You foolish man how you not ask if you not know if I can help explain something I will be glad to do it. We not go into that now we have to many things that we should be doing. Most obviously my education will be interesting to say the least but when we get snowed in one day I will want to know more about the Barber because I would feel bad it you had participated in his loosing his business. Mary started to say something when Dan reached over put his hand over her mouth and said you forget more stuff than anyone else I know of but you will get days and days of snow and more snow and on those days I am standing at the window so bored I am about to count snowflakes I will remember to let you say what you were about to say. Until this kiss me and don’t hold back for anything. Mary is there anything else we must do before leaving. You are many months away from delivering Soloman and Adam is getting big enough that he is less work so we should be looking at leaving soon. One other little bitty baby thought I have been having most beautiful Princess is that lady who own the dress shop you had told of her giving away free fighting for information would you like to tell me that story now or have me read it in the paper? You know if they tried to print it no one would believe it anyway. Ok great leader of my family please give me in 132 idea of how a woman who had never saw a store that sold anything a year ago now tells everyone the problems that they created. No, don’t tell me I want to leave before the snow fly’s so lets jump to the ending did the shop burn down. No Dan it is still there, whoa that is good news. Now no one died or got killed did they? No Dan again they were not harmed. I know this is a slow way to get information but I also know it is faster than the other way let her tell it. Look Dan I tell more someday when it matters so for now let me just say the simple truth. She got caught with stranger in her bed and when it came out there were others that knew but didn’t want to talk about it. The customers stopped shopping there and she close business. OK Mary I take that and we forget for now and he thinks to himself ya you not chase that subject any more and be sleeping in visitors tee pee tonight. I do not want to ask but curious was there others Mary? Yes Dan there were many even the maids were betting and they also got a little learning done also. Ok lets figure on leaving in four days that should give us plenty of time to get ready. That is fine Dan but I want your promise that after we go to the great sea in the West that you not hunt for reason to not come back here. You 133 know I spent a lot of time in special tee pee for all in counsel of our tribe so you must promise me we will be back and live with them until we learn the secrets. Yes Princess but you know I receive just as you do only mine comes from God and the more I learn the more I realize even though you speak of the difference I truly believe we speak of the same deity. But Dan I know you spend time with Ooga, Muta and Aero but you not tell me of the last ones but I know you have a lot of information because you talked many days with many of them while I do other things you learned a lot of things we have not spoke of. Dan it is the first my mind ever thought of anything even close to this. Not an Indian in the world knows of these machines, men and equipment. We will be back and that my very special princess. We also must speak about the Pirates and what we are to do with them wanting you to come to their village and talk to their people and let them show you they still hold you in high regards because of what you did and they want to have celebration and want us to know the feel very bad if we had this celebration as the Little Town did and the Indians felt they were just as any to what had taken place. Mary we cannot turn this down but we cannot be spending too much time or we get snowed in. We should have stayed down on the flats where it never snows we 134 had no business going back up there. Dan you know that you saved many lives and now have many friends who want to thank you can you not accept that they need that giving to us for them to grow the same as the whites. After talking it over Dan decided he did want to spend some time with these Piutes and gave up the idea of leaving this area now. He would wait and decide if the move was beneficial to the total knowledge that he now felt was available to him. No one had ever befriended a Tree Man that is what he was called by these people. After Dan had moved into the village and got acquainted with those around him he learned that they had a incident with the Tree People years ago. When Chief Joseph invited Dan to attend the group fire pit where only the men of leadership in the village could attend. He found the Chief’s grandmother when a small child had been playing up in a tree one day as a small girl and when she fell she would have fallen into the river and as small as she was they figured she would have drowned. But when she fell several women were washing clothes at the time and when the baby fell many looked up and watched as she fell. They told the girl was halfway to the water when she just stopped and in mid air lay with her arms out like she had lit in someone’s lab. She was in the air with no 135 nothing to support her but she did not continue to the water she was part way between the tree and the water. Just hanging there and when the ladies started to yell and scream for others to look the young girl just floated to the bank and was set down on her feet. Many eyes to see this and many to tell the story but and not all was the same they each had to add something to what they saw so when finished the story was told for two generations and the only thing they told the same and all agreed that Tree Man had caught her and set her down. Since that day, respect and goodwill between the village and the Tree Men have continued, with numerous stories of their friendship. Since that time at the river years ago the villagers know for a fact that they can disappear and appear when they want and they have communicated many times with each generation. They know of the people from out in the clouds but it is very hard to get any information because they feel it is not to be spoke of. Dan would come back and live with these people when he returned if he did not find out right now what he wanted to know about this. Like what did the people look like? What language did they use and was it spoken out loud? Many more would come to him when he was facing one who knew. He had come to learn a lot from Ago the night they were alone and Ago was eager to talk. He not only 136 spoke it he could make me see the picture of what he was talking about. He started with telling me that those men with the big ships came here because they needed here on this place they did not have at home and this was the only place they could go to that had it always. I did not learn exactly what it was they wanted here but he was showing me bee hives and the plants where those bees were. I will have to talk more with him to learn of this and also if he had been on there ships and sailed where did they go? What did he see in the ships cabin. I would like to know what they looked like these people from the heavens. The next day was a special time for all these Tree Men not that the women don’t mount up to whatever was necessary but they we never spoke of when using the term Tree Men. But the celebration lasted three days and I could not get anyone to even think of speaking they were into celebrations only. When the celebrations were over then they had to gather certain berry that was in season and everyone got involved in gathering, and storing, these berries. As it turned out my eagerness to learn about Tree Men and men sent from heaven was over road by my deep expectations of seeing the Pacific Ocean. I had learned that name from those in a small village in California Valley. The term Pacific Ocean they claimed had been handed down for generations. Anyway, the more 137 I thought of that ocean the less I thought about the other subjects. What was it I was thinking I went into very deep thinking trying to find what I cared about those and that? There may be a reason, but for now let’s just pack up and go. With that I went to camp and together my princess had made me promise we would come back and live here awhile. But with one child, one pregnant wife and a bunch of friends we left the mountains and entering the low and much Oak Brush we left all behind.

 

The Great Eagle Book Two

Posted on November 25, 2025December 21, 2025 by Verl

1
PAGE 1 SUMMARY
OF BOOK ONE
PAGE 4 CHAPTER ONE WHERE IT
ALL BEGAN
PAGE 17 CHAPTER TWO LEAVING
THE VILLAGE

PAGE 27 CHAPTER THREE LIVES
TREASURES
PAGE 41 CHAPTER FOUR SPECIAL
GUESTS
PAGE 60 CHAPTER FIVE ACCEPTED
BY THE PAIUTE
PAGE 70 CHAPTER SIX LIFE IN
THE PAIUTE VILLAGE
2
Before we can resume our journey, we must first take
account of where we have been. Dan became our focus, or
we could say or guide for our travels and through his eyes
we left Boston He had previously owned and operated a
photo shop and selling it to friends he took the money to
the bank and while depositing it had an offer from the
banker for his family farm. Having lost his mother and
father he took the money and sold the farm.
Not knowing that others were aware of the large
amounts of cash he had received he took what he needed to
travel and deposited the rest in a different bank. After
purchasing those things and without hast left within a few
days on a journey which would take him into a world he
had not experienced or expected.
His travels were interrupted by those wanting his
possessions and cash. After being confronted with fighting
or running he threw a guy down the town water well.
Leaving from there he was forced to kill two more when
crossing a bridge heading out of town, he had been faced
by a large number on horses intending to stop him. They
had not expected the resistance he offered when they faced
him in such overpowering numbers. He forced two riders
on their mounts over the edge to death.
Later in a small town in Kansas they again met him in
a local bar and tried kill him and he was forced to confront
3
two while the others were outside waiting for him to be
escorted out by those that would teach Dan that they were
an imposing force to be dealt with. Dan had shot two while
trying to drink a beer and while the Sheriff was outside
questioning the others had allowed Dan to leave unnoticed.
Trying to overtake him and get even for losing
members of this group they had forced him to climb to the
top of a mountain West of Denver where he had laid in wait
hoping to end this confrontation. Having covered himself
with his ground cloth he had tied it down with small
branches along the edges, enabling him to tie his rope
beneath the ground cloth and lay on the rope leaving his
hands free and giving him relaxation from holding the
cover down. The wind was violent when he fell asleep. He
awoke floating out over the valley the ground cloth had
become a kite that he was hanging from. He watched those
chasing him raise riffles to shoot him become ashes after
lightning had cremated them. At this unfortunate act he
asks God why he had not just run them over with a herd of
turtles and not hit them with a bolt of lightning which
would be hard to explain sense there was only one small
cloud in the sky.
Traveling on he lands safely and meets an Indian
warrior, his wife and daughter. Having watched him come
4
from the sky figured he was a God and became friends
whereby the took him to their village to meet their family
and friends. While talking with the villagers the villains
that had chased him all the way from home now to get even
shot him. While spending weeks recovering, he spends
time outside the teepee he is living in and is set in a
makeshift chair allowing him to comfortably visit and meet
members of the Ute Tribe who are helping him to recover.
During this time, he teaches them of his God and the ways
of his people. The friends he meets are curious about how
he came from the sky and how it was possible to do such
things as this. They felt for sure he must be a God for this
to have happened.
Dan meets many friends, and he gives them names in
English the same as they gave him the name of Great Eagle
in their language. They accept his names as tokens of love
and affection and many meet with him just to receive this
new name. One of those he meets is Mary whom he later
marries, and they spend their honeymoon in a special
teepee prepared for them by the villagers. During his
honeymoon with Mary, he finds that she has a gift whereby
she can see the future and tells him about three sons and
two daughters that will arrive during their lives together.
5
CHAPTER ONE WHERE IT BEGAN
6
On our first morning after of our wedding I said Mary,
before we leave our village, I would like to offer a prayer
to my God and to your creator for our journey through life
together. Well Dan, Mary says to begin with I would like to
join my creator and your God and agree that from now on
it shall be just one and the same your God shall forever be
my God, and we will not speak of them separately. So may
it be Mary, as our lives become one our God is one and our
children shall know of this God.
As we have vowed in our wedding ritual, I pray our
journey through life shall be blessed and guided by our
God, and I would like to offer that we call him Father also.
Let our father be at our sides and in our hearts together
always and forever. May we and our children always be
healthy, safe, and have food and shelter. Amen
We must plan our departure together and rather Tom,
your brother wants to go with us or not. Nuzzle our wolf
will not allow us to leave him and we will also need to take
Shadow my horse and friend along with Dusty the mule
and we will need to choose another one for you.
Mary, do you remember Little Jack that lives down by
the river? Yes, I do, Dan. Well Mary every time I mention
God; he has a negative response and does not believe in a
God or a creator. I think that he is so into himself that he
cannot think someone could be greater than him. He would
7
never admit to anything that could be more important than
himself. I think that if I were to go through life with only
one arm it would be easier than without my God. I have
been saved from death so many times that to believe no one
helps me would be about a self-centered as an earth worm.
Sorry to bring those bad memories to the surface but it was
on my mind so strongly I had to speak of it.
As Dan and Mary are enjoying the sun rising over the
Eastern mountains and drinking a first morning cup of
coffee. Jaw walks up and says it’s good that you are up, and
I do not have to shake your robes to get you going today.
What brings you to our honeymoon camp today, Jaw? Our
village is running out of meat, and we have been searching
for it in all directions and cannot find where the animals
are, and we have talked about having you help find them
and were worried that you could be enjoying the time in the
robes so much we would not see you till our people starved.
Jaw, we truly enjoyed our time together, but we know
we have a lifetime to spend together and if we can help our
people we would surely do so. What do you have in mind?
We were wondering if you could fly up high and travel
around and find where the large herds have gone. We have
spoken with all our leaders, and everyone feels that with
your wings you could save days of our search. I will be glad
to do this Jaw, but I feel that for me to do this we must have
8
wind I do not know for sure because this is new to me but
when there is wind it seems to be easier to go where I want.
Let us prepare our breakfast and we will join you at the
chief’s fire. That will not be necessary, Great Eagle, the
village has prepared a special meal for you and many of
our family and friends will be attending, and the food is
ready and waiting for you.
On arrival at the Chiefs fire many faces, and family
smiles were shown and pats on the back and hugs not
normally expressed were shown to Mary and me, but we
accepted it gracefully. Upon receiving bowls of elk meat
and mushroom cooked in a combination of vegetables and
different herbs the meal was very good and tasty. Meals
were shared but not broken with any verbal
communications because eating was a Salome thing with
everyone in attendance.
After eating Chief Yogi stepped forward and raised his
arms over the fire and those in attendance kneeled or
moved back and became silent waiting for the Chief to
speak. Speaking to Dan he said many lodges have gone
without meat for several days and our warriors have been
all directions hunting for them and with the cold about to
overtake our village and our homes without food we have
offered our God many dances and sent many smoke signals
asking for guidance to help us in our needs. We feel that
9
your wisdom and ability to join our feathered friends could
lead us to find the animal heard. I have asked that a high
mountain top be found, and the brush and vegetation be
removed so that I could begin my flight above the trees and
make my flight begin high. Has this been found? Yes, Great
Eagle, the mountain directly to the sun, has been prepared
for you and we have a good trail to the top. I will go up
with someone who will show me the way and let me look
and with the proper wind I will begin my search to see if
all is as spoken.
After looking over the valley from the mountain top
the only thing that was necessary for a successful lift-off
was to remove any of the small rocks and roots that could
cause me to stumble before reaching the edge of the
mountain. The area around the top had been cleaned with
plenty of room for my kite and someone to be on each side
to help me run to the edge for lift off. Up on top looking at
the side of the mountain Mary asks, β€œare you sure you want
to jump off this edge, Dan? You are maybe eating the crazy
weeds of the valley that cause the horses to stumble and
become wild.” We call that local weed, but no Mary, I have
faith and believe I have the ability of joining the Eagles in
the sky. Had I not watched you from the ground looking up
I would not believe this to be so, Dan, but I will be standing
by your side when you jump to join our feathered friends.
10
We will have the kite ready before the sun sets this
afternoon so anytime you think it is wise to do so we will
be prepared. We will wait for the wind to blow and then I
will feel the strength and will ask my God to protect me
and make my flight a worthy one, Mary.
Running to the edge of the mountain and jumping off
looks stupid or a lot or belief in oneself and someone to
make sure from heaven would sure be necessary also.
Getting prepared to do this is a soul-searching experience.
If someone had done it before and could tell me not to
worry would have helped but never ever in the years of my
experience have, I ever heard of anyone being this dumb.
Having flown before makes one know that it can be but not
having left the ground by being pulled like a kite is a lot
different than this. What must I be thinking that would
create such a belief in my head? I hope I have not let the
fact that I am looked upon by my village as a great and wise
leader have influenced me to believe in something to do
with my reasoning. Before I attempt to jump off the edge,
I feel it is necessary to have a strong wind to assist me so
that is a big factor facing me for tomorrow morning’s
flight.
Here it is almost daylight, and the wind is blowing
hard now. What is my excuse? I have none and I spent most
of the night visualizing my flight over the trees and
11
watching the animals run. I am excited to do this. I feel it
will be a great success that I will accomplish. Many
villagers are gathered at the mountain’s base to watch me
either make history or fail dramatically. The team of men
that I had agreed to help me at the final moments of lift off
have taken the kite to the top of the mountain and have built
a fence on each side of where I will leave the mountain to
gain flight but those holding up the tips of the wings will
run into the fence and not trip over the edge in helping me.
We have signals worked out between us telling us what I
need to convey the location of the game and the type of
animals I see. The number of animals is to be indicated by
up and down movements of my legs. I will circle over the
herds showing where they are and continue to do so till
those on the ground can find them. If I am too far away, I
will fly back to where they are then by flexing my wings
will return and circle the herds. Those on the ground will
know then to follow me. We have worked and discussed
the possible things that may be important for those on the
ground to know such as enemies or when I can find nothing
to hunt in this area I will return and land.
We have had our morning meal and are now in final
preparations for the actual lift-off so the excitement can
almost be felt in the air around us. The kite was brought out
of a protected small cave created by others to house it and
12
keep it from wind and rain. Once I had stepped over the
ropes that held my seat so I was standing in front of a small
seat with a back rest and making sure my water and a few
pieces of elk jerky were where I could get to them when
hungry. I had a pistol in a holster at my side and tied a rifle
to the center of kite directly over my head so I could get to
it, if necessary, also in a bag in front of me were extra shot
and powder should I need them. I did not carry much for
fear of the weight, not knowing what my limits were and
did not want to find out. If I had too much of course I could
drop them and lighten the load.
Once in the proper position I saw I had a friend on the
left holding up the wing and turning to the right I saw
another friend waiting for my signal to carry me to the
edge. Holding and to the kite and saying a short prayer I
nodded my head (we had practiced this over and over in the
meadow below, so we all knew the routine well) and off we
went running as fast as necessary knowing I had to clear
the mountain far enough the tail did not catch and forced
me to drop.
At the last moment Jaw walked up and said Dan, if you
have any problems, I want you to know how very special
you were to us. Thanks Jaw but I really didn’t need to hear
that at this last moment. I turned and signaled to others to
run, and I ran till my legs passed the edge and I continued
13
to run even though I was no longer on the ground. My
friends ran into a fence they had put on each side to prevent
their going over the edge and I noticed they had a rope
around their waste also. As I cleared the bank, I could see
the trees way below me and as I left the mountain my flight
only lowered a few feet and then it just kind of took to the
air in such a way it felt graceful but there was a moment
there where my stomach was in my mouth so to speak.
As I felt the air lifting my wings and I could hear the
movement of our soaring and swishing air movement but
was peach full and very pretty looking out over the treetops
with the many lakes providing additional coloring and
astonishing view. I just allowed the wind to carry me, and
I did not try to turn or move in any direction, but I did
notice all the people on the ground waving and could even
hear the yelling as I left that valley and flew into the next.
Making myself comfortable by sliding back onto the seat
helped a lot from other flights. I leaned one way then the
other just feeling the kite respond to my commands which
were very satisfying to say the least.
Thank you, Father, for your continued guidance and
protection. Now I have a little favor I need to ask of you.
Could you guide me to an area where our brothers, the elk,
deer and buffalo are hiding? I love this feeling of flight and
seeing what has never been seen by anyone before.
14
Wouldn’t it be great if somehow, I could take a picture of
this like I did in my studio in Boston? Hey, maybe with a
little thought I may be able to figure out a way to do that.
It is clear to me that the birds do not fear me and seem to
just give me space and not crowd me as I move over the
mountains. Things look so different from up here; I had
traveled many miles on my trusty horse Shadow just so I
would be familiar with this area so when I flew over, I
could return to where I started when ready. The best way
for me to get here is to look at the lakes and I must name
them so I know where I am always just by knowing each
and naming them should help but for now, I have a good
idea because I am just following the mountain ridge and
staying on this side of the biggest mountain.
I can see a few deer in a meadow but only three or four,
but I am not sure if from up here are they deer or elk? Does
not matter I will continue to look for more before signaling
those watching from below. The Chief of the hunters was
wise when he put scouts out in different areas where they
could watch me and prepared to signal to those on other
high places so word could be spread fast as to my signals.
I can see a warrior waving at me from a high point of view
right now which makes me smile knowing he is excited
seeing me wave and return his signals. Such an adrenalin
rush to be up here and see others waving and excited just
15
watching me. I have only been up here a little bit, but it is
kind of cold and next time I must remember to have a coat
with me. I do not see many animals so I must move further
down the mountain area further away from here to find
where they are. I have traveled many ground miles in the
time I have been up here.
I can see another village with many teepees. Let me
get closer and maybe I can identify who they are and see if
they are friends or not. They are all out watching and
looking at me they think I am a very large bird, and they
must be able to see my legs hanging down, so they know it
is a man up here. That is a village of Black feet for sure. I
must notify my Ute friends of this village so I will hang a
red flag under my seat as I circle the village which will
indicate as to the enemy being in this area.
I continue to travel to many hills and valleys but no
game anywhere that I have located. Maybe further East will
help as I turn and pick up an up draft taking me higher and
I can see a lot further, but I am so high I don’t’ know if I
could see a herd of buffalo from up here. I think I must get
a little lower as I go over this next hill. I can see a party of
hunters carrying something over their shoulders and by the
looks of the horses and men I would figure they had a very
successful hunt. Going in the direction, they came from I
see off in the far side of the big valley many animals so I
16
have found what we have been looking for I will hang a
white and brown flag under my seat as I circle this area
letting others watch that I have found where the game is
feeding. As I continue to circle, I see movement and
looking closer I see the red and white flag showing me they
know and acknowledge my signals. Now they know where
the game is I will return to the village and enjoy a warm
meal and a little relaxation.
On flying toward our village, I see many of the enemy
on the trails heading toward our village and they are
painted for war. The horses, even from this height I can see
the war paint standing out. I swing around so I am between
them and our village and drop toward them flying like I
was going to run into them, and I am making the sound of
the Raven and screaming it loud. I know for a fact that
Indians are very superstitious, and they believe the Raven
to be bad medicine and afraid it causes their Gods to turn
against them and the fact that a great big Raven was
hovering and attacking them was taken right to heart. They
turned around and without even speaking to each other just
started running back to where they had come from. They
are looking over their shoulders afraid I will follow them.
I turn and head toward my touch down point in the
meadow. I will let others know what is happening.
17
Seeing the meadow below I circle the area a few times
making sure all is well even though I know it is because
now I see a large crowd of people waving at me. I fly past
the meadow and turn back and as I push myself toward the
front of the kite it tips toward the ground, and I start my
descend towards the ground not going down as fast as I
want, I pull myself forward more and the kite drops to fast
so I move back a little and let the slope of approach be even
and I descend smoothly toward the meadow. As I touch
down there are many grasping my wings keeping them
level and helping to stop me. Never have I had such a
smooth and even landing and with all the cheering and
screaming it makes for even more excitement.
As it turns out many of the warriors were after the
game we had found and had left the village unprotected
with only the old men and women left at camp. Somehow,
they knew what I had done in turning the enemy had
protected their homes and old ones. Here I thought they
were excited from finding the wild game and it turned out
the big deal was the latter. I was a hero in the eyes of all
my friends, and I wanted them to see that it was an
opportunity offered to me, and it was created by my father
to bring me to this point. There was no doubt in my mind
that this would be told repeatedly in every village and the
story would have dancing and singing to match the story.
18
When I got to Mary, I asked her if she knew this was going
to happen. She told me that she did not know but she had
the feeling that my flight was going to happen, and it was
going to be a great thing.
The next morning when I spent my time with my
creator I spent time thanking him and letting him know that
it was obvious that he had taken a hand in all that had
happened and that I was thankful and humbled by all that
had happened and was also very happy that the lives spared
because of my ability to fly was turning into not only a
lifesaving thing but a belief and gathering of those who
believed in the spirits of our Gods. It is amazing to me that
by just following and not trying to force this to happen I
was almost guided to flying and helping in my trials and
worries about the whole thing. How much of what happens
in our everyday life is the same way, father is our destiny
planned for us? Do you have more of this in my future that
will offer lifesaving opportunities for me and others?
Where does my future lie? I will continue to keep praying
for your guidance and hopefully can learn to listen as
always. Amen.
The hunting party returned with ten horses loaded with
meat and the excitement was so strong that it could be felt.
Chief Yogi insisted that we have a two-day fiesta (he called
it Piatukkanana) and celebration thanking both our creator
19
and Dan for guiding us to the winter’s meat and the
protection of our village. It amazed me to see that someone
could eat and dance from morning to night and then get up
and do it again. The drums sounded letting the spirits know
the people were happy for and this made me think of the
Bible and the Lord telling us to speak in tongues and let the
spirits know of our true feelings. Coming from a city in the
East and thinking how intelligent the people were and not
understanding that even though these people had no formal
education they had values taught by the family, village and
customs tying all together. These people were looked on as
barbaric and dumb when compared to what whites thought
of themselves. But the Indian has a culture that is working
for them and in their way, it held on to truth and honesty
among the families. The forest and streams are not harmed
by these people even after generations. All those I meet
have a great and powerful desire to worship and sing,
dance, and talk to their gods it was a unity to be admired.
Everyone added food and drink to the celebration and
frankly I was so tired and worn down that it was hard to
hold my head up and Nuzzle, my constant companion,
would be at my side when I attempted to imitate the others
dancing around the fire. Nuzzle seemed to have a step
sideways which was really eye drawing to see a wolf
stepping and lifting and keeping time to the drums. He had
20
been at my side so much that everyone in the area accepted
him as part of the family and was looked upon as just
another member of the tribe.
As Mary and I retired to our little teepee we crashed
and hardly moved after lying in our robes. Thank full that
we didn’t have to build a fire or prepare meals we were
already stuffed and could not eat we just collapsed and
knew nothing till someone was sliding something up and
down the walls of our home and I could hear a familiar
voice saying, β€œAre you going to sleep past the sunrise?” To
sleep beyond the sun rise was a show of sickness or laziness
to the members of the tribe. I usually got up and had gone
to my spot of worship and was talking to my father by now
so the fact I was still in my robes showed others of my
laziness. I raised my head and told Frank you had better get
past that loneliness and accept that you have a weakness
for my company, and you will miss me terribly when I
leave for the great waters in the West. I will join you when
I can get my eyes open, and my honey is ready for us to see
the world together. Go find someone with a weakness for
your company and leave us to be. β€œI will be back in a little
bit with others if you have not joined our gathering at the
fire in a short time”.
Mary, as you heard before we joined them, I would like
to talk about our leaving on our trip and what is left to do
21
before we leave. We have decided which animals to take
with us. Dan I have very few possessions that I want to take
with us so the packing will be mostly camp cooking and
robes and whatever we will be taking for shelter. The guns,
bows and arrows that you have will be yours to get together
and sense most of them are hanging here in our shelter it
should be easy for usto be prepared. How soon do you wish
to leave Dan? I know the longer we put it off the harder it
will be to leave but I have a great desire to see the great
ocean and I have an entering feeling that our journey will
be of great value, and we will meet other people that will
be an inspiration to our future. Somehow, I have a pulling
toward the West that has been inside of me for years and
now I have many friends to share the journey with which
makes it more exciting. What do you mean by that Great
Eagle? There is only me to side with you and I have spoken
with John, my brother, and he has not made up his mind as
to rather to join us or not he is undecided so who else do
you speak of? Well, I only had Shadow when I got here
now, I have Nuzzle, you and two other horses plus Buster
which offer me friendship and warnings of approaching
danger. If John joined us, we would have him and his horse
also and maybe with him we should consider another back
animal. Now that I think of it, we will need room for the
kite and the things necessary for my flight. So, another
pack animal is most necessary. When I traveled alone the
22
kite rolled very small and took up little room. Now, I have
bamboo for the edges and a seat that was added to my
possessions. When you call me Great Eagle, I know that
you are very serious, and something is going to be said
more important than normal.
Well Dan, I have been thinking about the kite and I
know that you wanted it to look as a Raven to put fear into
our enemy’s but know that is past I would like to suggest
that the kite be made to look as you are named the Great
Eagle and it should look that way from the ski and all will
know when they see the Great Eagle that a great warrior is
looking down upon them and that can have a great impact
on the friendship and admiration they will shower upon
you. Very wise Sunshine and I will have to think about this
for a few days and ask my father for his advice. One thing
is certain the women and men who helped make the Raven
will have a great impact on a new kite toward it looking
like an Eagle. Jaw suggested that I should hang in the kite
like I would hang from a tree and not sit on ropes. It brings
another thought possible and that is the fact that maybe I
could have more freedom to swing and change the course
of my kite easier. I think I would like to try taking another
flight and seeing what the change would make. If the only
difference between the Raven and the Eagle kite is the hide
which is made to be very thin and light, it would not be
23
hard to travel with both and only God would know what I
should do so I will pray about the changes.
This has been an easy time of the cold for us, and I am
happy we had friends and family to share our time with,
and I have learned the language and customs well and I am
very thankful for that. Nuzzles is growing so fast and
becoming such a valuable tool in our lives. No one can
approach us without his warning and the fact he has learned
to be quiet and still let us know will become a very valuable
thing for us. The other day without thinking I pointed to a
possum and said attack and before I could take a breath
Nuzzle had the possum by the throat and was about to kill
him, but he stopped when I said stop. So, both of us have
learned a lesson and I am impressed he listens as well as he
does. But I will not do that again unless an enemy
endangers us. Nuzzle seems to know what I want before I
even speak to him, I ask him to go get Shadow and without
further speech he took off and returned with my horse and
he was on his heels pushing him to run faster. Now I must
see if Shadow can go get Nuzzle but that is hard to do
because Nuzzle very seldom leaves us.
Mary, as we prepare for our travels toward the ocean
to the West, we must learn what is possible for us to have
as easy time in our new surroundings. On the way here I
did several things right and some wrong, but the outcome
24
was perfect. Had I doubted I should do it I would be back
behind a plow horse for the rest of my life growing crops
to get by. I believed that my father would protect and guide
me, but I had doubts about myself. I did not feel that I could
overcome my enemies and that fear is what drove me to the
top of the mountain I told you about. When I was on top of
the mountain with nowhere else to go and nothing, I could
see doing that would allow me to get out of that situation.
I was far from any possible way of surviving and at that
point I asked my father for help, and I went to sleep
knowing that he was watching over me. You must
understand that when I went to sleep, I was in as deep a
trouble as I had ever been. I had allowed my doubt of
personally fighting and killing the enemy to overcome me
and I had little faith I could step away from that and live. I
turned to my father at that point and without a doubt knew
he would overcome the impossible. From that low of no
possible way, I could survive and live I found next to be the
highest point in my life. Please understand Mary because I
had no doubt, he would protect me; he not only brought me
through that to a new horizon, way beyond my wildest
dreams.
From a mountain top to an Indian village with more
friends and family than anyone would ever think possible.
Now I have not just a wonderful friend, a beautiful wife but
25
a princess of my very own. From the very bottom of a depth
of survival to the top of the highest, brightest life I could
have ever imagined in a thousand years. I had lost my
mother and father and had no one left who would care if I
lived or died to a world with more friends and family than
I had ever heard of. After being snatched from the very
bowls of hell to the garden of Eden in one night, it is
beyond the realm of one’s expectations. We will tell this
story to our children and their children will hear about it
over and over and perhaps because of my faith I can teach
our children to know our father.
Mary, I am going to teach you and all our children to
read, and you will come to know my father as I do and
because you already know of the great one it will be easy
for you to accept him as I do. As we travel to the great
ocean we will be traveling through our life as a family, and
we will have the future of our children so close we can
teach them and guide them and as they go through life, they
will have what we have taught them without outside
influences. Having our friends and family is a wonderful
blessing but the more of them that are around us the less
our children will learn from us they will balance what we
say against what our friends say and even with the best of
intentions they would not be the same as ours.
26
We must teach our children to take pride in what they
do and learn that what they have they had to earn not to
expect it to be handed to them. The Buddies I had back
home had been lazy and did not want to work, they had all
been handed everything from their parents and they did not
find the true happiness that only comes from within our
hearts when we complete our own goals. We will teach our
children the value of hunting one’s own food and following
a path that has both snow and heat. Together Mary we can
build a future as bright as we want it to be, and we know
the value of letting our father influence and guide us.
We must learn what is necessary now while the
teachers are around us, that will help us to gain that
knowledge. Part of that will be for me to learn to help you
bring our children into the world because we may not have
others at that time to help. We must gather those herbs and
spices that are necessary for our health and well-being.
There is much to do and learn while it is available to us,
and we must ask for advice from all that will offer it. I must
ask for any who knows the trails we must follow to reach
the great ocean but so far no one knows what is beyond the
great salt sea. I stood on the shore of the Atlantic Ocean
and looked to the East and knew what it is like to look and
not see the other side of the water. So, it will not be a knew
thing for me but you have never looked upon such a great
27
body of water before so it will be exciting for you to see
this. The time will go by fast, and our travels will begin
before we know it so we must take advantage of the time
left.
I have taught both Nuzzle and Shadow to obey both
voice and hand signals and they can do things beyond what
would be imagined possible. I told you of the little guy who
rode the big dog and was named Trainer that taught me to
train Buster to follow us and because of his time in teaching
me to teach has allowed me to get the minds of our beast
of burden and our family wolf to move as we wish both
silently and as noisy as we would want them to. Anyone
who dares to climb on Shadow and expects him to obey
will get a surprise when he puts them in the dirt, he has
learned to only allow those he knows to ride him and that
could be a blessing for us.
Ata, Mary, and I have a wish to be taught how to bring
someone into the world if we were to have no one else
present to help deliver them. That is easy, Ata says just push
on my nose and the child will drop out the bottom. What if
there is a problem with us when it is to drop out and nothing
is there, Dan asks. Well then you have several choices, one
and the biggest is to ask the great creator for help, or you
can be the one to help receive this child. That is why we
are here for advice. If nothing goes wrong, we can handle
28
that but what are we to do if the child does not want to join
us. That cannot be known before it happens but it is
important to know that regardless when the time comes and
rather stubborn or not at the time it will come rather wanted
or not so all you can do is make sure nothing is in the way
of it happening and then do what is necessary to make right
that which could have been and it will not be what you want
but what the great one above wants. It will be what it will
be and remember you are only there to help as necessary,
and nature will determine the results.
We are only waiting for the cold to pass so we can start
our journey to the future of our life together. If you teach
the young ones to love you and have respect for you, they
will know how to do the same when it comes time for them
to do as you are doing. Teach each birth that they are here
as a gift! They are not here for anything they did but what
you did for them to be here and if they want to please you
with that gift, they must show it by the way they live their
life for you. If a child grows up and has not been taught that
someone is more important than they are, their lives will be
lived for nothing. Bringing a life into the world is a gift to
all and no one is more important than those that came first.
If taught young, wisdom will be engrained into the very
enter part of that child and they will live to please you,
which will please them also. Thank you, Ata, we are very
29
lucky to have someone wise and caring to give us this
wisdom. We will think of you often and you will always be
in our hearts. Well thank you Mary and please remember
you are among those of you in your own families and
remember to return often. It will not be till after we have
stood on the shores of the great ocean where the sun sets
each night.
Dan, John, has said he will travel with us for a few
days and then he will return to the village with his friends
and when we return, he will be grown enough to decide
what he wants to do in the future but for now he wants to
be among many. Mary, I never imagined it would be so
hard to leave and the closer we get to leaving the more
ceremonies the village seems to create. If we do not put an
end to this and get going, we will have to take part in a
ceremony celebrating the birth of our first child. For this
reason, I am telling you so all can hear we are leaving on
the morning after the first full moon. That will be soon Dan.
Yes, and that is why I picked that time.
30
CHAPTER TWO
LEAVING THE VILLAGE
31
Here we are on our first day of travel and I do believe
we have so many traveling with us that the village will be
empty. I am hoping many will return every day since we
have departed, they will only stay till they know we are on
our way and have no need for anything. We have been
offered everything we could possibly want or need for our
travels by those from our village just to show their love and
care. Nuzzle my friendly wolf has grown and seems to
understand what is going on but regardless he will not leave
our side and stays very close. He has turned out to be a big
part of our lives and we just love to find him under our feet
even with the problems it causes Shadow or Buster when
he gets in the way.
Jaw and Sunshine were so very sweet and caring to
name their first-born boy after you Dan. I was a little
surprised when he did but the boy has turned out to be a
blessing to them and though they call him Dan he may want
to use he is known in the village as a little wolf. I will miss
him he will be something I will think of often.
Over half of those following us dropped out of our
group and returned to the village but we still had many to
help us on the last few days of travel. We are getting far
enough away that those with us are dropping after hugs,
smiles and hand signals. We have found a spot for our camp
and with the trees surrounding us and the small stream it
32
will be enjoyable to stop early and take advantage of such
a good location. Those that hung on till the last are finally
gone and without a doubt we will miss them but being
alone really is satisfying.
This is our first week and we have adjusted to the trail
and found that if I am out in front watching for the best
route and any campgrounds, we want to take advantage of
like I had a hard time deciding rather to stop at the small
lake that was close to our traveling but decided we should
take advantage of the easy trials and warm weather so I
continued on. We are dropping to a lower elevation, and the
trees are getting further and further apart. Nuzzle has
stayed out in front of us most of the time and he returns
during the day, but he seems to be watching out for us, and
he has a bark that has a howl to it, so we know he is in front
of us, and he lets us know. After making camp and Mary
has prepared us a warm meal which Nuzzle seems to smell
from wherever he is because he shows up when it is done,
and he will sit and just wait for Mary to throw his meal to
him. After feeding him Mary looks up and says Dan, have
you noticed that Nuzzle stays out front and I really believe
he is watching for us and is it not strange that he has that
bark to let us know where he is and that there is no danger
in front of us, did you train him to do that? No Mary, I did
not, he just seems to know what we need, and he does it on
33
his own. I wondered what he would do if someone were to
be out there, and we didn’t know what would happen then?
Are we giving him too much credit for something that he
maybe is not doing what we think he is, but we will know
after a few days of travel. He does help with the meals
because it is unusual when he does not return with a rabbit
or something to add to our meal.
After these many days of travel Mary, are you getting
sore from so much riding? Well Dan, I have never had to
ride a horse every day like we have been doing and my
bottom is starting to let me know it is ready to stop but you
seem to know when that is happening, and we have had a
few breaks, but I think I would like to find a place we could
spend a few days and just rest. I will look for the next river
where we can catch a few fish, do a little swimming and it
should be cooler next to the water so I will keep an eye out
for it.
How is this spot Mary it is like God built this just for
us and heard our wishes and has prepared it for us. We will
be here for a few days so let’s make a good fire pit and I
will build a small area where we can get out of the sunshine
in the day and if it rain, we will be comfortable. I have been
trying to remember what was told to me about our direction
to travel and they have warned me of the great salt in this
lake we are passing, and I am told on the other side we will
34
have four or five days without water if we do not go far
enough to the North to miss it. Before we are away from
this lake I would like to go jump into the water and see if it
is as they have told me. What have you heard Dan? Well, I
was told you cannot sink because it has so much salt you
float without trying to. Do the fish float on top? Laughing
Dan tells Mary that he was told there are not any fish in the
lake, but they do have some shrimp they call brine that are
very small. Let’s go to the lake tomorrow and see if it is so.
Watch this Mary I say and while getting Nuzzles attention
I raise my arm over my head and make a circle with my
finger in the air and Nuzzle takes off and leaves in a run.
What is he doing Dan? I have told him to circle the camp
and make sure no one or anything of danger is in our area.
How does he know this, Dan? I have been teaching him as
we travel. When he returns to us, I have had him circle us
then I have taught him to go further and further and now he
knows with only hand signals. Also notice Mary that when
he gets out so far, he barks and gives us that howl again as
he circles us. He is such a smart puppy that I am amazed
by his understanding. Also, Dan, when we sleep, I notice
he watches the horses, and he even gets up and wonders
around our area like he is doing guard duty. I have been
told that the old men of the mountains that had a dog would
make a backpack put extra footwear on the dog so if they
35
needed a change the dog would have it. So, dogs have been
used for as long as men have been able to get them.
The last one in the water is the looser Dan. Mary says
as she runs laughing and splashing into the lake and down,
she goes face first into the water. Oh! Dan came to help.
She says I can’t see the salt has gotten into my eyes and
they burn bad. We should have known better and taken
more time when entering the water, I had not thought of
that, but it should have been obvious to us. Notice that
Nuzzle had not entered the water. He stayed on the bank
and was barking all the time we were running toward the
lake. Do you think he smelled it, or something warned him
about the lake. I have brought water to drink so I will wash
your eyes, and we can see if you float. After washing out
Mary’s eyes she found that by lying on her back she could
keep her head above the water and her body did not even
try to sink. We are like children laughing and playing in the
water. Now that we had tired of the newness of the salt
water we stepped out and our skins were drawn and shrank
to us like the skin had grown smaller and it was not very
uncomfortable feeling the salt all over our bodies. We used
what water was in the blader we had with us but ran to the
river on returning to camp and dove into the clear stream.
That was fun and different than anything I had ever
imagined but I would not do that again after what it felt like
36
when I got out. Yes, Dan, I will stay far away from that in
the future and not want to try that again.
Returning to camp, we were so tired from the swim
and washing that we found some beef jerky and that was
our supper for now washed down with cold clear water
seemed to satisfy us for the day. We were too tired to even
build a fire, and it was not cold anyway, so we just crashed
and let the stars twinkle overhead making our wishes come
true and thanking our father we were again safe and sound.
I don’t know how long Nuzzle had been at my side
pushing me and whining trying to get my attention when I
finally came around and realized he was wanting my
attention. Suddenly, I was not a bit tired, and the sleep left
at once as he turned from me and gave a low growl as he
looked toward the horses. I could hear Shadow pawing the
ground and knew Buster would be at her side, but it was
still too dark to see anything clearly. Mary rolled over so
she could put her mouth next to my ear, and she asked what
was out there. I shook my head to let her know I knew
nothing. I did not know but was glad she was awake. We
had made a practice of always having a gun by our side, so
I slipped on my moccasins, picked up my rifle and as quiet
as possible I jacked a shell into the barrel, so I was ready
for whatever was out there. Staying close to the ground so
I could put whatever was out there against the night sky for
37
any possible way I could see what it was. Nuzzle stayed at
my side as I moved forward toward Shadow and together,
we crawled very slowly advancing only when I knew I was
not stepping on something that would snap or break afraid
of making any unnecessary noise. Shadow was standing on
his hind legs, pawing with his front legs at the air before
him that I could see. Buster was braying and showing his
ability to warn him that he was going to fight right along
with Shadow. The noise from the other horses added to the
noise and the stamping and running around back and forth
had caused me to get excited also and up till now I had no
idea what the problem was. I was sure it had to be a cat or
something of that nature, but I could not see it and Nuzzle
took off from my side and growled and running into what
appeared to be something of his size. Now I could hear the
cat screaming and briefly saw it rare back and swipe at
Nuzzle which scared me for fear he would be hurt. I could
not shoot with all the animals and commotion going on, all
I could do was bring my rifle to my shoulder and wait for
an opportunity of a shot. All at once I could see the eyes
shining and without a moment’s hesitation brought up the
barrel and fired. Only God could have guided my bullet that
found the area directly between those eyes in the dark of
the night. Nuzzle was at the throat of the big cat in a
heartbeat and I could barely make out the cat laying there
38
on its side and knew for a fact it was dead. Stop Nuzzle it
is dead, good boy.
I went to the cat and felt behind its front shoulder with
the barrel of my gun and if it were alive, I am sure it would
have moved. I turned to the horses they had ran away and
I found no reason to chase after them tonight, so I just
called Nuzzle back and we returned to the camp and Mary
had built up the fire, so we had a cup of coffee and I told
Mary what had happened and after talking it over we went
back to bed and didn’t know anything till just before the
sun came up.
As Mary was preparing our morning meal, I could not
resist walking out and looking at the cat we had killed the
night before. Nuzzle was running back and forth from the
cat to me and back to the cat all excited like he was the only
one who knew of the cat. As I looked, I could immediately
see that the back right foot of the cat was gone, and it was
a horrible looking thing which must have been painful for
the cat which I also noticed was wet. She had been nursing
babies because the nipples were large, and they were all
obvious. The cat had to have been Hungary and with the
bad foot would not have been able to hunt so to feed those
young ones that she must have had somewhere would have
been hard to do. I felt bad looking down on that mother and
had no pleasure in what I had done.
39
Joining Mary as she placed a plate of food in front of
me, I was not as jovial as normal, which she picked up on
right away. What is it that bothers you, Dan? The cat I
killed last night had a foot missing and she had to have been
in real pain and desperate to try to attack the horses. I also
noticed that Nuzzle had cuts on his chest where the cat had
made a swipe and only touched his chest, but he left blood,
and he was very lucky to have been fast enough to avoid
really getting cut up. How did you know it was the cat you
were shooting and not Nuzzle Mary ask. I had saw Shadow
when she raised up trying to stamp on the cat so I knew
where she was on my left and the cat had made a swipe at
Nuzzle which I could barely see but nuzzle had moved
away and to my right and when the cat looked at me, I saw
the eyes shining and didn’t hesitate when shooting. The
amazing thing was I had the gun part way to my shoulder
and only took a second to finish aligning to those eyes and
looking this morning the bullet hit her right between the
eyes. She could not hunt because of the lost leg and that
crippling would limit her, but she had no choice, and I feel
bad for what I had done but it in the past so I can do nothing
about that.
Maybe we can find babies and help them, do you think
that is possible Dan? Nuzzle can you find those babies?
Nuzzle jumped up barked as if he knew and off, he ran.
40
Mary watched him leave and said, β€œyou don’t think he
knows what you said do you?” God works in many ways
of which I cannot or will not attempt to figure out so all I
can do is wait and watch what the future brings. Nuzzle has
already proven to me to be way beyond anything I would
have expected an animal to know or understand. Let’s
enjoy our meal and we will see what Nuzzle does. We know
that he has a nose for smelling cats and if he understands
what we wanted he would be able to follow the cat back to
where she had been so yes, it is possible he can do it.
We had not even finished breakfast when Nuzzle came
running back and sat before us growling and whining and
looking back and forth between Mary and me. The turning
and running a little way stopped and turned back to us,
indicating that we were to follow him. He wants us to
follow him, but I have no idea how far that may be Mary.
Nuzzle go get the horses and just as well bring Buster while
at it. We must be close because otherwise the cat would not
have been able to get to us but close to an animal could be
a long way to go for us.
After saddling and putting a few things together we
told Nuzzle we were ready, so he ran out and sure enough
took off. Not over a mile later we came to a small
outcropping of stone and one large rock was just behind
others but larger by far and under it as we looked and as
41
Nuzzle showed us was a small opening and getting down
on my knees and looking into the hollow, I could see kittens
and hear the fussing. They were not beyond my arms reach
but I was hesitant to reach in for fear of them attacking me
even with their eyes closed. Mary, I am not sure if I should
reach in, or not my scent maybe an unpleasant odor to
them? Perhaps Dan, you should wrap something around
your hand to protect you, and it may make it easier for them
to accept you. How many are there? I cannot tell but more
than one.
Taking off my jacket and slipping my arm into the
sleeve then into the pocket and holding it with my other
arm I reached in, and the first kitten put the nose against
the jacket probably smelling and as it did, I took ahold of
it which was hard to do because the jacket keeps me from
feeling it as gentle as I wanted to be. Bringing out the first
kitten, Mary was waiting at my side with her arms
outstretched asking for the kitten. Oh, Dan, have you ever
seen such a pretty little thing in your life? Look, its eyes
are barley open, and she is looking around like where is
mom.
Having passed the first kitten to Mary I turned and
reached back into the hole and another kitten came into my
hand maybe because the first kitten had been there and left
the scent. Turning, I handed the second kitten to Mary and
42
Nuzzle was smelling and growling at the kittens, so I had
to tell him to stop scaring them. Just like he understood he
stopped and just put his nose as close as I would allow, he
wanted to smell that kitten. Turning back and looking in I
could see one more who had pushed itself against the wall
trying to hide from me or maybe just the bashful one of the
kittens. But as I scratched the ground in front of it, she
made the forward movement which allowed me to get
ahold and bring it out of the small cave. Again, Nuzzle had
to smell it before I was allowed to hand this one to Mary.
Turning back, I looked but could see no more kittens.
The first thing Mary said is how are we going to feed
them? They will need milk because they are not old enough
to eat meat yet. As I rose to my feet, I explained to Mary
that the God who took me from the mountain and danger,
the God who delivered me from death when I was shot at
the village meeting, the God who delivered a princess to
me is the same God who delivered these kittens to us to
survive will answer that as sure as he meets all our other
needs.
When bringing the kittens to Shadow he pulled away
and did not want the kittens brought to him. As he pulled
away, I spoke reassuring words to him and held one of the
kittens high in the air so Shadow could see the small thing
and get a good look. As I held it toward him, I said are you
43
afraid of such a little thing just because of the smell?
Shadow raised her head and lowered it then raised it again
as if to say yes, I do not like the smell take it away. I refused
to accept that, so I kept the kitten in his face and walked
closer and kept talking and holding the kitten in front of
him. Finally, after several minutes of his stamping,
snorting, and pulling away with Mary holding the rope
around his neck, he finally calmed down and allowed us to
bring the cat within smelling distance, which he did but the
hesitation was obvious.
Nuzzle had accepted them after his smelling and
growling and smelling and barking at the small kittens but
he finally calmed down, but he also didn’t like the cats but
then they were a natural enemy to him as they were to
Shadow. Where they could possibly fit into our world was
beyond my imagination but if they were put into my care,
I had no choice but to accept responsibility and go with it.
Mary took a small blanket she had been wearing over
her shoulder and placed the three kittens into it and then
brought the ends up and tied them together which made it
look like a large sack with three little kittens sticking their
heads out and the eyes were partway open. And as she
approached her horse it stepped back not wanting her to get
into the saddle. I took the sack of kittens, and she climbed
onto the back of Dawn, and I held them as Mary settled in
44
then she forced Dawn to advance to me, and I held the
package toward the horse and stood still while she
reluctantly smelled and finally calmed down enough to
allow me to hand the kittens to Mary. I hope we don’t have
to go through this every morning with all our friends.
As we were returning to our camp site with the little
kittens, we noticed several vultures circling and decided to
investigate. We switched direction a small amount and
turned toward the area where we could see where they were
circling and landing. As we neared the edge of the lake and
next to a small growth of willows, we could see what was
left of the body of a small deer it was not very big must
have been caught by the cat I had killed the night before.
As we got upon the area I could plainly see where the cat
had attacked the fawn and must have stayed a day or two
by the looks of the amount of activity directly around the
fawn. Nuzzle kept looking toward the lake and tried to
follow the tracks of another deer heading toward the lake
but the mud and water were such that he barked and howled
but would not go any further. I could see the deer out
toward the lake but as I watched I could see it was buried
to the front shoulders in the muck and was just standing
there maybe twenty yards beyond us. Nuzzle could smell it
but could not see it because of the willows but me setting
on Shadow was high enough I could see the deer and knew
45
immediately that she had to have been the mother of the
one who had been eaten by the wounded cougar.
Mary, can you see that deer out there? She is stuck in
the mud and must have fought it to the point where she is
not able to move any further and has given up struggling
any more. If Nuzzle is afraid to go any further, then I would
not attempt either. It is so clear to me that she is a wet doe
and has been placed in this swamp for our needs so I must
figure out a way of rescuing her to feed the kittens. Let me
find a place out of the mud and we will have to get down
and find the way to accomplish this.
After building a small fire that seems to bring comfort
and rest, we are passing ideal moments when it finally
comes to me, I will approach the deer in snowshoes which
will hold me up and enable me to approach her. Mary, if
you return to the camp and get the ropes, the ones we use
to raise the kite into the air, we can use those to pull the
deer out of the mud. I will build the snowshoes out of the
willows we have available and tie them on my shoes with
the pigpen strings I always carry. We will have to tie the
rope around the deer not just tie it around her neck for fear
of choking her.
When Mary returned, I had the snowshoes complete
and asked her what she had done with the kittens. She told
me she had put them in our bed and told Nuzzle to protect
46
them and not let anyone near them till we returned. And
upon telling him he barked twice as he did and immediately
sat down as if to say to her, I should not worry. Dan, it is
not a wonder that Nuzzle seems to understand what we
want even before we tell him. No wonder it is so hard to
hunt wolves when they seem to read what we are thinking.
I have brought all the ropes and there should be more than
enough to even double them.
Putting the ropes over my shoulder I advance toward
the deer and as I do I use my knife to cut away several of
the willows so that I make a straight path toward the deer.
As I draw near to her, she throws her head back and forth
trying to frighten me away, but she cannot do any more
than that because she is down into the mud so far, her legs
are useless and obviously very tired from already fighting
the most obvious ending, she would have to face. Trying to
get away from the big cat that she knew would be death she
took the only route she had and ran till she could go no
further.
Before getting close I cut a willow that had a fork at
the bottom and was the biggest one I could find. I tied a
knot in the rope and placed it over the fork at the bottom of
the stick then very slowly I approached her and talking very
gently I told her I was going to help her not to be afraid and
I walked right up and pushed the stick down in the mud
47
behind her till I knew it was lower than her belly. So, the
rope was over her back and down in the back now I had
another willow with a fork like the first one and I stood
back and by judging the angle to the first stick I very slowly
and carefully pushed the second stick towards the other
one. By twisting the stick, I rolled it till I felt it hit the first
stick then pulling very gently I brought the rope under her
belly and up till I had a hold of the end of the rope. Now I
had the rope all the way around the deer’s belly but had to
tie the head so that when we pulled on the rope, she would
be forced to turn the direction we wanted her to go. After
tying it off on her to not put extra strain on her neck I
backed away from her and that seemed to calm her down
some, I turned and walked back to the sold ground feeding
the rope out as I went.
After reaching Shadow I tied the rope to the saddle
horn and then asked Shadow to back up and as we did the
rope tightened and when it became almost to the breaking
point I was about to stop and double the line when all at
once the deer started to move in our direction very slowly.
Shadow could see what was happening and keep a tight
rope backing slowly as the deer came out of the mud, she
tried to use her feet, but they just raised her a very small
amount, but she wanted the freedom and seeing it possibly
caused her to thrash around and try to get out on her own.
48
The further she got the more freedom she felt and the more
she rose above the mud the faster she threw her feet and
had she had more strength she would have made it by
herself, but she was so worn out she finally just allowed us
to drag her to us.
After finally reaching sold ground, the deer stood on
wobbly legs and just looked at us. She was so worn out she
didn’t attempt to do any more than just look at us. She was
covered in mud from head to tail and it was so thick it was
hard to imagine she would ever come clean. I knew better
than to release her from the rope for fear she would run
away and that would have been a disaster to say the least.
After all our efforts were over and we finally calmed
her down to the point of accepting us we had completed
our job. Mary started to laugh and the more she laughed I
finally started to laugh and did not even know why. Mary,
why are we laughing? She said have you looked at what we
have in our world now? We have a wolf, three coughers,
and now a deer where will it end? That is an easy question
for me, you have not counted the little bambino’s we will
eventually be receiving.
49
CHAPTER THREE LIVES TREASURES
50
Then she really started to laugh, what will our family
think when they come to visit? When we return with half
the forest creatures you will not have to fly to get their
attention, the family will get their attention for you. Mary’s
laughter caused me to laugh and as we laughed and enjoyed
the moment it came to me as maybe it was meant to. I was
brought from death several times and each time something
happened that was better than I had before. Mary, I was just
thinking that every time we have a change, that is obvious
to us, it turns out to be better afterword.
A natural enemy of ours is the wolf and we have a great
friend now because the fear of the wolf caused a woman to
give me Nuzzle. Now we have three baby kittens, cute as
ever and a natural enemy to the wolf and to us what will
the outcome be from sharing our knowledge, or food and
our love to a natural enemy? Interestingly, these little
kittens are known by various names: Puma, Mountain
Lion, and Cougarβ€”all referring to the same animal.
The deeper I think and the more I talk the more I
believe that we are handed a gift as great as we have ever
had and for us to doubt how wonderful it would be a big
mistake, so I want us together to take a few minutes before
continuing our journey and thank our father for giving us
the opportunity of growth and the responsibility handed to
51
us. Getting down on their knees Dan and Mary gave thanks
for the wolf, the three kittens, the deer, and the horses.
Returning to camp, Nuzzle was beside the blanket
watching the three kittens and it was so amazing to see that
one had to stop and admire the scene. Well Mary said we
must find a name for the three little ones. I can see it now
we have Eeny, Meeny and Miny and hopefully there is no
Moe. Let us clean up the doe and see how hard it will be to
milk her and feed our new friends.
Taking the deer by the rope, I led her to the river and
just walked in, but she did not want to follow right from the
start and going into the water was no different. I had to pull
hard and even then, had Nuzzle not got behind her and
growled she would never have taken those steps that
allowed me to wash and clean her but upon leaving the
water she followed me ashore just like a trained horse
would do. Walking up to Mary I said well I named the
kittens you name the deer. Let me think about that for a
little bit and I will find something to put the milk in.
Trapping the deer between a tree and holding tight on the
rope she allowed us to get one bowl full, but we had tipped
it and spilled it several times, but we finally were rewarded
for our efforts.
The bowl we had received as a wedding gift was a
perfect answer for capturing the milk. Mary had turned to
52
a plant beside the camp area and pulled a leaf from it and
coming over with the bowl of milk rolled the leaf into a
funnel shape and I held that while she poured milk into it,
and I held it over a kitten, and it immediately knew and
started to lick the milk. The other kittens started fussing and
wanting their turn, so I changed from one kitten to the next
and as I did, I asked Mary how we would be able to tell one
from the other. As you pointed out when bringing them
from the den, Miny held back and was bashful so look now
at them. Sure enough, one kitten was laying back not
pushing as the other two fought to get to the milk. Knowing
she is hungry but still holds back from the others I wonder
how long that will last. Did you notice that bashful Miny is
a female? No, I did not but you are right Dan, let’s look at
the others. We have two females and one male that is
interesting.
Nuzzle sat and watched just like a proud father and at
that moment I happened to notice all the horses had joined
us and were watching as we fed the little ones. I had to
comment that nature has a strange way sometimes. Look at
all these who are enemies and the attention they are giving
to the little ones, even the deer seems to understand what is
happening and looking on like a proud mother. Where all
this was going in the future was not for me to know but as
I watched the kittens suck in the milk, I had deep
53
satisfaction and felt a love for those little kittens that one
day could be a danger to us all.
After feeding each till, they were no longer hungry,
they lay down and went right to sleep. Each kitten was
laying either on the next or right next to each other but there
was no space between any of them. The deer wondered
over as much as she could with the rope attached and
started to eat the green grass around the tree. I had an idea
that it may work so getting up I went to the deer and untied
the rope from the tree and tied it around her neck and
undone that which went around the body. This allowed the
deer the same movements the horses had. Taking the other
end of the rope giving her about twenty feet of slack I cut
the rope and tied it around Shadows neck. The deer could
not run off because Shadow would not allow that, so I just
watched them eat together and went back to add wood to
the fire pit.
You know Mary we have a lot of different animals here
and I will not mention ones that we could add to our family
because I know that God is listening, and he would have us
feeding strange fowls and other things not normal, but I
know he hears and acts just like he had a right to. Careful
what you say Dan he may decide we need a bigger family.
We will not be able to travel for a few days will we, Dan?
Well, we do have a few problems to solve first, but we do
54
not have to wait till we can figure out how to pass the days
across the desert we are told we face. It may be easier to
travel with small kittens than if they were allowed to grow
bigger. Can we teach the deer to carry a few things such as
water or food even if it were only enough for her? It would
help. We know it will take over three days and maybe as
many as five to get beyond the dry area.
The next few days went by fast as we were teaching
the deer to accept us and not show fear every time we
neared her. Mary had been calling her Te-ah because that
was the word in her language for deer. As the days went by,
I found myself saying Teyah do this or that and before long
the name was so much a part of her that she becomes Teyah
forever. It was hard to say how old Teyah was, but my best
guess was two years old, so she adjusted to our presence
fast which helped our workload a bunch. Also not knowing
if there was a supreme being involved here, helping her to
adjust and be a part of our family.
Eating together and spending a lot of time around the
kittens and the family of enemy’s brought together and
becoming a family of understanding and love. How can one
express the unity that was created between all of us. Can
one train a cat? I have heard from Trainer that anything that
eats can be trained so I must accept that it can be done but
for how long and how much can they retain? It is so much
55
fun, and time consuming to just sit and watch the kittens
play and roll around teasing each other, hissing, and
swatting at one another. They took to both Mary and I as if
we were their natural parents. They climb on us they sleep
on us they want us to be right in their every movement
night and day. We have never seen any animal that has as
much love and affection toward us as these three. Even
Nuzzle didn’t have to have us as close as these three keep
us.
In the morning Mary, we should be ready to leave so
the meat we have prepared should be on one place and I
will fill all the water bladders in the morning so we will
have fresh water on the trip I believe we can start early but
we will have to find a place to stop and rest so we can
change our traveling from day to night. For us to cross the
desert even though we will be going North and West to
avoid what we can do, night travel will allow less heat and
more mileage per day. I would like to try and maintain at
least 25 miles a day so that four days should find us on the
other side of the hard part. This should be an interesting
group to see if anyone should come across us on our
travels, they would have a hard time adjusting to our
family.
Finding a few small trees and a shallow stream turned
our first night into a blessing and a good campsite we will
56
be lucky to have such again. After the sun dropped and the
temperature did the same, we packed up and headed out
having made 25 miles the first day. I felt we should be able
to do that again and were moving along with no one saying
anything and even Nuzzle accepted the travel speed to be
agreeable with him. Having stopped often to check the
packs on the horses so that they did not get sores and we
also checked often for stone bruises making sure all we
travel without being hurt. Because of the heat we tried to
put something on Nuzzles feet, but he would have no part
of that.
This being our second day I felt when reaching 30
miles we could have gone further but that was enough
knowing that once one was tired the chances of an accident
would be greater. We stopped and found no place we could
have shaded and luckily, we had no wind but rather that
would stay calm was not for me to know but being prepared
to use our ground clothes and some bamboo we built an
area that all could get beneath even the horses were
protected from the coming sun rise. We shared a few hands
full of corn with the horses and Teyah even enjoyed that,
which should not have surprised me because a deer eats
that kind of stuff whenever it is found. Sleep came slowly
for all accept Nuzzle which dropped down and put his head
on its front feet and never moved again for several hours.
57
Mary and I shared a few pieces of jerky we had prepared
for the trip and drank a little water which was shared with
all. We had a bucket tied to the side of our pack horse which
allowed us to get it without a lot of trouble. We unpacked
all the animals and laid another ground cloth over the packs
to protect them from the sun. We knew that each day we
would have to do this to keep the sun from destroying
everything, so we had figured out the easiest way to unload
and lay in an order of such that made for easy loading when
the time came. Tipping the side of the shelter on the side of
the sun allowed us to stay out of the direct sunshine and we
never got much sleep because of the heat but we did get
rest and that was helpful. Even the kittens seemed to rest
more than normal, which eased the burden on all of us.
As we started out as the sun went below the horizon
we loaded up and without many comments, we started
knowing we had another day of this to contend with and as
such there was no sense in wasted talking. When the moon
finally came out, we were all thankful and appreciative of
it because it did allow us to see any rocks or holes in the
trail we were following. We stopped this night every two
hours just to have a short break to drink a little bit of water
and check for any possible problems on the backs of the
horses and we even had a small sack on Tayah that she had
traveled with and did not seem to mind. The terrane
58
changed tonight, and we found that we had mountains on
the horizon as it became lighter, and we could see further
in front of us. I figured we had maybe four of five hours of
travel left to get into the hills and others could see the same
thing, so the pace picked up a little bit without my
encouragement.
When I stopped the group for a break it was not
appreciated as I would have expected all wanted to
continue and get over it with even buster the mule did not
want to stop, he could see what all could see and did not
want to stop. The sun had come up and it was starting to
heat up, so it was a hard decision on my part as to rather to
continue in the heat or stop and take shelter. The horses
seemed to want to travel faster and Nuzzle took off in front
of us and ran ahead. Finally, I could tell the horses could
smell water and that is where Nuzzle went without a doubt.
That took the decision away from me. I could not have
stopped the group if I had tried, I was lucky to just slow
them down to a fast walk. All I could think of was an
accident could be really bad on us out here away from
everything, but the thought of water eased my mind
considerably.
As we passed a few short trees and low brush I could
see what the horses could smell, and it was a pond of clear
water and as we approached all ran to the edge and began
59
to drink. I had to grab the horses to keep them from rolling
in the water with their packs on so as fast as possible Mary
and I unloaded everything right on the bank and never
worried about order of or location, just get the animals free
of the burden. We just dropped the packs and let the horse
wade into the water and did as they pleased. After enjoying
the swim in which we had all joined in frolicking and
splashing on each other we finally joined all our friends on
the shore laughing and laying out like we had just
conquered the world.
Having drank all we could hold and enjoyed a restful
swim we just dropped on the edge of the water and laid out
letting the sun warm our tired and weary bodies. The
kittens wanted milk, and they did not care rather we were
resting or not. Teyah seems to know when it is time, and
she willingly stands and allows us to milk her and
truthfully, I believe the milk builds up in her and she is glad
to get rid of it maybe it hurts inside to be carrying it. I had
taken a branch I had found and worked till there were three
holes in the branch big enough to slide the leaves into them
and each kitten could be fed when holding the feeder over
the kittens. They all had their eyes open now and could see
but they had not the strength to do much more than get their
little noses up to the dripping milk. Mary would hold the
60
branch, and I would pour the milk into each one and the
kittens had no trouble emptying them.
After feeding the kittens I had fallen off to sleep and
woke up with this furry feeling about my neck and when
finally coming fully awake realized Miny had crawled up
on my neck and was snuggling under my chin and on
opening my eyes just laid and could feel the heartbeat of
the little thing. May said she had been having problems
sleeping for fear of hurting one of the kittens because every
night they had been crawling under her chin and would not
leave. She was afraid of rolling over and hurting one, but
they would not accept being put aside, they wanted the
closeness of us, and it was becoming a habit with them.
Nuzzle never did get over laying at my feet and if he
was not there, I would wake up and wonder where he was.
So, after drying off from the swim and the sun started to set
making the mosquitoes start to gather, we got up and built
a fire right where we were not worrying about it spreading
to other areas because it was bare ground for a long way.
Mary started supper while I gathered the wood and made
the fire. The kittens had gone to sleep with a full belly and
Nuzzle was watching them with his head laying on both
paws, mostly sleeping also. Teyah had followed Shadow
into the tall grass and was content just eating away like no
one was around.
61
After supper and everything was put away for the
night, we built up the fire and the horses pulled in close
even though Buster was pushing in between the horses
getting as much warmth from the fire as possible and I
knew it was because the smoke forced the mosquitoes
away. So, with our family gathered around the fire pit I
offered a prayer for all and gave thanks for the full bellies,
the safe trip, and the complete and total love from our
father. Even the horses seemed to know and feel the safety
and contentment of the family unit.
The next morning after a small meal Mary had
prepared and having fed Eeny, Meeny and Miny they were
playing among themselves and not feeling we had to push
ourselves to be on the way and spent a few minutes
drinking a cup of coffee and just relaxing. I offered a
suggestion that we maybe should just find a place where
we could spend a few days and not try to push as we had
done. Mary agreed, however she wanted somewhere so that
we could get out of the sun and not have so many
mosquitoes. That sounded like a good idea so I saddled up
Shadow and taking Nuzzle (like I could stop him) we left
our camping area and heading towards the higher
mountains I just kept an eye on the horizon and let Shadow
go where he would. After finding higher ground I had
decided that there was an easier way to do this, so I turned
62
around and went back camping and told Mary. Why did I
do it the hard way when all I had to do was put the kite
together and, in a few minutes, I could see miles in each
direction, and we would know what was out there.
We unloaded the kite and strapped the bamboo to the
sides and pretty much had the kite assembled when the day
had slipped past, and the sun was setting so Mary suggested
we have something to eat and if the wind was in our favor
tomorrow morning would be a good time to take that flight.
Both Nuzzle and Shadow came in close knowing what we
were doing when we put the kite together.
The kittens had been a real problem when small
because of wetting the blankets and the necessary toilet
calls but lately they had got the idea that getting out of the
blankets and making necessary deposits in the dirt
surrounding them just seemed to become a habit with them.
Nuzzle had been a big help in this because at one time he
had picked up Eeny and carried him to the side and waited
and then by picking him up by the neck took him back to
the others. He took turns with each one and then he let them
be while he just sat and watched. Amazing to watch
knowing that he just seemed to know what to do and when
to do it.
Taking Shadow out into the top of the open area beside
our camp Mary took one side of the kite and I carried the
63
other and we set it down and would you believe Shadow
backed up to the kite and neither Mary or I had done
anything to move her there she just knew what was coming
and was looking back over her shoulder at us indicating,
β€œwhat are you waiting for”. We tied the rope to the kite with
the slip knot for easy release and I placed the water blander
for drinking beside me and a few pieces of jerky not
knowing how long I would be up there.
After getting all ready we tied the rope to Shadow, and
I just told her O.K. go slow and she did then when the rope
was tight, I yelled for her to run fast, and she took off and
I don’t think I made two steps before I was off the ground.
The wind was blowing into my face, and my eyes were
watering badly at that moment but there was nothing to do
or see so I just hung on and waited to be higher than the
trees, which happened really fast. Untying the rope, I could
hear Mary yelling at Shadow to stop so I didn’t have to
worry about that. As I climbed, I turned the kite away from
the mountain top in front of me and just followed the
mountain keeping it on my right as I just floated along.
It came to me how relaxed I was and not worrying
about anything I have been up here so many times that it is
like second nature to me. I passed over two small mountain
ridges and was looking toward the West because that was
the direction we were going to be traveling, so that is the
64
direction I wanted to find the right camping place for us.
Off in the distance, further than I was hoping to find it, I
could see a large lake which drew my attention. As I
approached the lake, I could see a small stream feeding into
the lake and on the mountain side above the lake looked
like a cave so I glided toward the cave for a closer look and
sure enough it was and if I were not above all the trees, I
would have never known it was there.
I circled the area for a few minutes looking for
anything that would make our lives easier or something I
should know but it was so inviting an area that I felt it was
perfect for our needs. Along the shore was a perfect place
to land if I wanted to but it was also green grass that
animals will take advantage of. One side of the lake had
rocks going into the water from the mountain side so for
fishing it would be nice to set on those rocks and fish and
no doubt there would be deep water there also. As I circled,
I could see small patches of timber, smaller meadows with
grass another steam going into the lake it was a beautiful
thing to see and I knew Mary would love this place so
turning back toward our camp I played close attention to
how we would travel to get here.
The deer and elk had gone to this lake so many times
the trail leading to it was clear from the air so watching and
following it I went to the first mountain ridge, and it just
65
seemed to stop but looking toward our camp I could see
how I could easily find a way to travel too here. I continued
to go directly East, and I could see Mary and Shadow out
in the meadow waving at me well maybe only Mary, but no
doubt Shadow would if she could. I flew directly over Mary
and when well downhill from her I turned around and
pulled myself toward the front of the kite and as it pointed
to the meadow, I just moved forward a little and I had a
very smooth glide right to Mary. As I came to the ground
Mary took ahold of one side of the kite and kept it from
hitting the ground.
I wish I could do that, Mary said as I climbed out from
under the kite. If you would like to do it, I will explain all
I know and there is no reason in my mind why you can’t
do that just as well as I can. We will talk about it till you
feel safe, then we will give you the opportunity to do it.
That is all good and well, but did you find us a camp site?
Mary, I have found a place so good you may never want to
leave it. I found a large lake for fish and a cave for our
home. I have no idea how deep into the mountain side goes
but it will keep us out of the wind and rain, and we can turn
our kitten loose and not worry about the great birds taking
them away from us. The only problem is the distance to the
place, I think it will take a long day to get there and maybe
two days’ travel, but it will be worth it.
66
After taking the kite apart and rolling it back into a
tight bundle we tied it behind the saddle and went back to
camp. Nuzzle came running to us and ran around and
around us like we had been gone for days. The kittens were
fusing and letting us know it was time to feed them. So we
went to the tree that May had tied Teyah to and filled the
milk bowl. As friendly as Teyah was, I suspected we could
quit tying her up all the time but not being sure we did not
want to risk losing her at this point. The kittens were
getting big but not ready for solid food, yet we will
continue as we are for now.
After supper we sat back having our nightly coffee and
just enjoyed the campfire while watching the kittens roll
and play with each other and anything that they could find.
Nuzzle stood over them like a big brother and was content
to just watch. He was getting to be a big fellow now, not
old but big. He came up above my knees and when he
pushed against me would make me take steps back, he was
so powerful and yet so gentle. We will leave early in the
morning so for now we just enjoy the beauty of watching
the deer and elk moving into the meadow and as it became
darker, we could just make out the antelope that were
moving into the meadow as it got dark. With the quite time
it was so easy to just lay back and relax and enjoy Gods
peace full world.
67
After giving thanks to our father in heaven and putting
away the leftover food from breakfast we fed the kittens
and gave a good-sized chunk of meat to Nuzzle and started
to pack the rest. I gathered the packs from the edge of the
trees where they had been laying and loaded Buster that
had moved right over to me and was just waiting to know
what was expected of him. Having traveled so much
everyone knew what was expected of them and we didn’t
have to chase any of the animals; they just walked right up
and waited their turn.
I started out as always being first in the line of travel
but this time it was obvious because I had seen the direction
necessary to get to the new camp site. The horses were
fresh and ready to travel and with the birds singing to us
we moved along, it was a very enjoyable trip, and it went
by fast. First thing you know was time for a break. Setting
by a stream and passing around a few pieces of jerky we
just had a quite meal and I handed Nuzzle a couple of the
larger jerky strips we had cured just for that reason. Not
wanting to spend too much time when we knew what was
in front of us, we continued and after climbing the last hill
we could look down on the lake in the distance and it was
such a beautiful site that even the horses stood and looked
as if to say they agreed.
68
Passing the lake and climbing a small hill I asked
Nuzzle to go into the cave and make sure we were not
sharing it with a bear or any of the kitten’s family. It
seemed like a long time before Nuzzle came back out but
as I stood at the entrance he came out and started to growl
and show his teeth toward me. As I walked to him to find
what had made him so vicious towards me, he kind of
pulled back and the hair on the back of him stood up and
he was avoiding me, which was very unusual to say the
least. Cut that out and act decent or I will slap you. As I
got closer, he moved back against the edge of the cave wall
and started to crouch and from appearance he was about to
attack me. I scolded him again and told him it was okay to
be angry but not with me. He must have remembered that
we were friends and not let whatever was in that cave
bother him. I pointed to the trees and told him to go take a
walk and when he could get over whatever was bothering
him, he could come back. He moved sideways to me to
avoid getting close and ran into the woods. Turning to
Mary, I said maybe I had better go into the cave and see
what bothered him so much. Just before I could enter the
cave here came Nuzzle walking out and sat down in front
of me like I have checked it out for you. Wow! Mary, did
you see that if this is Nuzzle that other one must have been
a wild Wolf and no wonder, he didn’t like me I am lucky
he didn’t take my arm off. He looked exactly like Nuzzle.
69
I couldn’t tell the difference but now it is over I should have
known by his actions.
Okay Nuzzle let’s go into the cave together I think I
need you by my side in order to check it out. As I entered
and looked up the first thing, I noticed that the ceiling of
the cave was way over my head and the room we were
entering was very big. There was room for all the horses,
the mule and all our packs to be stored. In the center was a
large fire pit that had been used before but by looking
closer I could see it had been many years sense. Along the
wall on the left were spikes drove into the wall and there
was a bear skin coat hanging on one of them. There was
room for many more and it even had a shelf below it and
along the wall allowing for pots to be placed for easy
storage. I knew because there were a few bowls still setting
there and a jar with designs on it. Turning I heard Mary say
look Dan there is a spring back here with a small pool of
water. Someone has lived here before and made it very
livable for us.
Notice the torch over there and another one towards
the back of the water. We will have it nice here for a while.
So, bringing in the animals we unloaded them and set all
the packs where we could get to them, and they would be
out of the way. What was truly strange about the cave was
it was not cold or damp but a very comfortable temperature.
70
The way the fire pit had been constructed when a fire was
going on there was a place to set things so that the flames
would heat whatever was on the little shelf. Someone had
a real imagination to build such a fire pit I will remember
this for future use.
Let us give thanks for this home but remember we are
only using it for a limited time before moving on so don’t
fall in love with it too much, I told Mary. Gathering up the
fishing line I left the cave while Mary was getting the food
gathered around close, I wanted to try the fishing and
hopefully add a little fresh meat to the meal. Mary said she
wanted to check out the very back of the cave and see
where it went. Setting down my small pack I realized that
it had not been to the back and didn’t want Mary to run into
another wolf or any other strangers. As I got to the back
wall, I could see jars of something sitting on another table
that was very old and dried up. Picking up one of the jars
while looking closely at it because of how heavy it was.
Tipping it into my hand I could see what appeared to be
several small rocks, but they were very heavy. Because of
the darkness of the area, I walked towards the front where
I could see better and looking at the stones found them to
be gold. Look Mary, what I have found. Oh! She said those
yellow rocks were in the steam as we passed them, I happen
to notice. If all those jars back there are full of these, we
71
will be able to live like kings when we join the white man’s
villages.
If we were in a large city where I came from Mary, we
would not be able to rest for fear of the strangers trying to
take them from us. What makes them so valuable Dan?
Because they are so rare to find, and they can be made into
jewelry very easily. It melts and can be poured into
whatever shape one could imagine. We will have to hide
these so that anyone who may come along will not find
them and take them from us. We will do that later right now
I want to go down and try my luck at fishing and see if I
can bring back a few fish for supper. You get the kittens
comfortable, and I will make sure Teyah is available for
easy milking before I go.
Gathering up my fishing stuff again I strolled down to
the lake and grabbed a grasshopper that was standing there
and in no time at all he was floating out in the clear blue
water. I had not even got comfortable when I had a large
fish fighting for survival. He must have weighed 7 or 8
pounds, and he was a beauty. By the time I returned to the
camp I had a string of seven fish all over five pounds and
Nuzzle was jumping at my side wanting to share his now.
When I entered the cave, I went to the kittens and put
the fish in front of them and they only moved over to smell
them and didn’t show any signs of wanting them to eat but
72
did play with them, so I knew what I had expected, to soon
eat solid food, but the day would come. We had a great
meal and after supper we sat back and watched the
reflection of the fire on the cave walls and that was fun
because even Nuzzle understood what they were after
running around like a small puppy and watching the
shadows. Laying down next to the fire, the kittens took no
time at all after being feed in crawling up onto my neck and
purring like a house cat. Meeny was a male cat, and he had
crawled under Nuzzles chin and was sound asleep before
anyone else. The kittens were so affectionate that you had
to smile every time they got close because they seemed to
live only to be close to either each other or to us.
The next day we spent walking around the area
looking at all the things that we could eat. There were red
berries, and a tree with a small apple and even a few grapes
were growing alongside the trail to the lake. We were
amazed at the things that were available to us even
mushrooms were in abundance around the trees. Mary had
found some wild onions and was gathering those for a soup
she said she was going to make. We never saw the wild
wolf again so he must have decided he wanted no part of
us. The kittens were big enough that they were starting to
climb out of the hide Mary had made for them to play in so
73
we could see they were doing good and growing faster than
we had expected.
The horses were not content staying inside of the cave
and were eating grass along the trail and Teyah was making
time in the greenery that was hanging down from the apple
tree. Seems as though she liked anything that was green.
We spent a week just looking and goofing off and doing
nothing but wasting time. I went to the lake daily for my
early morning prayers with my father then a swim seemed
to just be natural and before long we had all of us gathering
at the lake and enjoying the water.
Time just floated by, and the kittens were getting
around, but we kept them away from the water for fear of
them drowning but they were not afraid of it. They did want
to be held and when I came into the cave at night, they
would pull on my pants leg wanting to be held. It was
strange in one way all these animals were natural enemies
and yet even Teyah would sniff at the kittens and watch
them play. Nuzzles would pick them up one at a time by
the neck and move them here or there if they were not
where he thought they should be.
At night we would have bats by the hundreds going
past our heads leaving the cave and we just got used to it
and it was so noisy that you could not talk at times. I knew
I had found one more item to help me build the gun powder
74
and had dried out a few bladers from the deer and elk we
had killed and was storing the dung for future use. I had
taken some of the gold outside and buried it in different
locations, making sure both Mary and I could remember
and find it later if we should need it.
Somewhere in the back of my mind I knew of a trading
post that was in this area and was hoping to find it we were
just about out of coffee and there were several other things
we could use but Mary had never seen a trading post and I
wanted her to see one. We prayed that someone would stop
by, and we could learn where one was but so far, we were
the only ones and had not even saw an Indian or any other
two-legged stranger. I continued to fly looking for an
indication of someone or something in the area but had not
even seen anything out of the normal sights of the area. We
were starting to get restless and thinking of leaving the area
and travelling toward the West but giving up the comforts
of everything we had here was hard to do. I had woven
some gold into the bottom of my saddle bags in such a way
that even if you were to look you could not see it. And we
had done the same thing to other items like I had hollowed
out a knife which had a deer antler for a handle and filled
it with gold. We had gold hid in so many things we would
joke about the value of our things.
75
The kittens were big enough to walk, and we had
turned Teyah loose to roam as she wanted to, but she stayed
close and never left very far. We did see a big buck come
to the edge of our camp and he knew she was there, and we
laughed at the two of them. We wondered if they would
follow us to the West or stay in this area but that would be
up to them. We had dried out fish and red meat over the fire
making jerky as we knew we would need it in the future
when traveling. Finally, we picked a day to leave and had
everything packed and ready for the sunrise to leave. We
truly loved this area and wondered if we would ever find
another place that would offer us the things this one did.
76
CHAPTER FOUR SPECIAL GUESTS
77
The first morning after leaving the cave we were not
in the usual habits we had before the long rest so thing were
not as smooth traveling as they should have been, so we
didn’t try to make many miles just get on the way and make
the habits return we had before the long rest. Mary had
made a special pack for Buster to hold the kittens and they
were not happy when we headed out, so they were
continually climbing up and out and falling to the ground
so we had to stop and put them back so much that I finally
found a place in front of me between the saddle horn and
my lap that I carried Eeny and she was satisfied for a while.
And Mary did the same thing with Meeny so Miny being
alone was not happy, but she did not jump out after the first
time crashing to the ground. So, after a few miles things
kind of settled into a routine and we started to make a few
miles.
I had spent much time teaching each kitten to growl
when I held up a finger. If I held up one Eeny would growl
and when I held up two Meeny would growl and the same
with Miny. I enjoyed the laughter and fun of even with a
fist I could make all stay quiet and Nuzzle learned to set on
command and growl and follow his commands so on the
tail I could have all watching me and every so often just to
keep all active I would have growl or be quiet. The games
78
keep everyone doing something so that the miles past and
the time seems to fly by.
We would stop every couple of hours rather to eat or
just have a drink of water. We would try to find a stream or
lake for our night camp so we could have a warm meal and
a swim to get rid of the dust we always had to contend with.
As hard to believe as it was Teyah (the deer) had stayed
with us all the way and she had come into camp each nightand spent time shoulder to shoulder with Shadow just like
she was still tied to her.
Setting around the campfire waiting for supper to be
completed Nuzzle jumped up and was growling and
looking at the bushes. The kittens ran to Mary and jumped
for her to pick each one up and they were obviously excited
and wanting attention. At that time, I heard a voice ask if
he could come to our fire. If it would have been a mistake
for a person to enter another’s camp site without
permission. That could get someone shot if not careful in
this situation. Nuzzle would have attacked them before
they knew of the problem. I reached down and took the
strap that held my pistol and knew I could get it free in a
hurry and at the same time had Nuzzle set and not make
any noise by holding my fist he immediately quieted down
and with a signal from me just set watching the brush.
79
How many of you are there, I ask. Two was the
response just me and my wife is all. Make sure your hands
are free of any weapons, and you are welcome to enter, I
said very loudly. A man with a full beard down to his chest
and part grey and part white came forward and a little gal
not much over five feet tall followed him and she was
completely clothed in buckskins. He also was wearing
buckskin, but it was so common I had not paid much
attention to him. She smiled and said her name was
Mayone and her husband was Joseph. Welcome to our
camp, Mary said and started to introduce herself when
Mayone said β€œI know who you are Mary. I also know
Daniel, Adam, David, Soloman Clark and I know the cats
and the wolf Nuzzle.
Dan had been kneeling next to the firepit where he had
several weapons close to his hand. Upon hearing Mayone
speak he stood and looking first at Mayone, then to Joseph
he then looked at Mary and found his thoughts running
ahead of his mouth. Mary looked at Dan, and she also could
not speak, she was dumb founded and speechless. Finally,
after what seemed like several minutes but was only a few
breaths later Dan found his thoughts and asked Joseph how
they could know all this. Perhaps both of you should sit
down and let us explain why we are here and who sent us
Joseph said.
80
Mary, the gift you have of being able to see into the
future has been given to your family because of their faith
and deep devotion to values that are in the ways of the
world in which we live and teach others of this obedience
to the creator of the universe. Because of your prayers,
which you did not call prayers but were under any other
name you used to call them, we have been sent to explain
and reward you both for continually holding to those values
and not letting those of this world influence you away from
those values.
Dan, it was no secret to you that you were spared
several times when you could have lost your life and never
met Mary. You have been led by your personal spirit to this
point in time and to Mary who you have also shown, love
and affection that has been recognized. Because both of
you have lived and put forth love and affection to others,
we have been allowed to share with your certain
information not normally gave to others on this earth. You
will remember what we will teach you, but you will find
you cannot speak to others about this because your tongue
will not be allowed that privilege.
Joseph, I believe what you are telling us, but you must
know we have a little doubt about all this. How long will
you stay and what is the purpose of your visit? In answer
to your question Dan, we will stay as long as necessary to
81
guide you to your intended purpose. Both of you have a
destiny that will bring happiness to many and save lives
with some that are to be brought close to death and make
them understand that a spirit watches over them also. You
have been chosen to be the ones bringing forth that light
and we will not be here continually, but we will come and
go as you ask in your prayers. You are not the only ones
that we visit, we are available to all who ask and believe.
Can you make the coughers and Nuzzle understand
what we say and give them the ability to act with this
knowledge? Have you not noticed they already do and why
else would Teyah stay and be so gentle to you. Because of
your love and caring that was given to them upon their
delivery to you. Have no worry about the future, your faith
has made them your servants. All who walk with this belief
have that same ability if they will but ask.
We will leave you now but know we are your spirits
and are available whenever you should but ask and with
that they just disappeared and both Mary and I just looked
at each other. How can this be Mary? I have never heard of
this before and now I can see why they said we will not be
able to tell others about this so we will share this secret
forever. I am glad you saw what I did so I know I am not
crazy Mary said. One thing this did was prove once again
to me that my prayers were Mary.
82
We had not reached a point in our travels that we felt
the need to stop and waste time doing nothing, so we
continued traveling 25 to 35 miles a day and we camped at
those places that gave us the most facilities for the evening
like water and wind protection. We did find it valuable to
say our prayers each morning after having those special
guests and we spent many hours trying to decide if there
was something we wanted to do other than see the ocean.
The coughers had grown so much they were walking
and playing full, and they were starting to eat a little bit of
meat at least they were playing with it. Nuzzles would
bring small animals and drop them before the cats watching
and waiting to see if they would eat it. Mary had made the
pack saddle for Buster for the cats to ride in, and they were
now big enough they could climb up and get into the bag
without any help from us, in fact they would be waiting for
us to go they had got so used to traveling.
We found a small trading post when we neared the
Sierra Mountains (we learned the name of the mountains
from those running the trading post). The man who owned
the store said he had started it when he found this river and
a mountain man must have spent some time here because
he had constructed a cabin which was not in bad shape. He
had a wagon full of supplies he was heading to Sacramento
with but decided to stop here and gave up going on.
83
When I first walked up to the cabin, I had Meeny on
one side of me and Nuzzle on the other walking along right
in step with me. I walked up and stopped in front of the
cabin and was just looking when Sam walked out onto the
porch and started to lift his rifle up toward us when I told
him stop, don’t make the mistake of pointing that gun at us
or you would not live to talk about it. What kind of a feller
would travel with a cougher and a timber wolf as pets? If
you set the gun down, we can talk about it but please don’t
make any attempts to show aggression towards us. My
friends are very protective, and I know they would take
exception to it.
My name is Sam he said and what do you go by? I am Dan
and this is Meeny on my left and Nuzzle on my right. Eeny,
Miny and Mary are just waiting to see if things are safe and
if I should yell, they will join us. Do you have coffee, sugar,
flour, and salt, I ask. Yes, he said I have all of that and have
another wagon load of stuff that should be here later this
month if you have cash money to pay for it. We can give
you cash or gold nuggets if you don’t want the cash. Where
would you get the nuggets, he asks? Way back there many
miles from here but have not had a place to use them in
months. Where did you leave from, he asks? I started in
Boston but that was many months ago. You crossed
through the Ute Indian territory? Yes, I said Mary is a full
84
blood Ute I said as she joined us at the porch. Well, he said
I can see she is all that but have never saw such a beautiful
woman in all my life. How did you ever get such a woman
to leave her family and follow you he ask? Well marriage
helped and she is exceptionally smart for another thing.
Always admired a bashful guy he said.
We have come to a far today and would like to set up
camp, would you mind if we were to go down there under
the trees next to the river and make camp, I ask. You make
yourself right to home and I would not worry about any
visitors at night; we are left alone most of the time. Oh, I
don’t worry with the friends I keep three coughers, and a
timber wolf would make a stranger look at his hole card
awfully fast when he found us. I will make sure that I do
not sleepwalk and find myself in your camp by mistake.
Robert, my son, is out hunting. We have run out of meat so
he left this morning and should be back later today, and I
will advise him when he gets here. With that we left and
went to the river to camp.
After unloading the animals, I built a fire pit, and the
three cats lined up around the pit and were helping me to
dig it by throwing the dirt between their legs and helping
us by bringing in branches and small twigs to start the fire.
No one would believe that a wild animal could understand
but they all had watched and learned over the time we had
85
been traveling. Nuzzles had been bringing in larger
branches and even stacked them alongside the fire pit.
Mary had laid out the saddle packs, so we had everything
in order in a very short time. Mary said she would like to
go up to the store and get some coffee for later and as she
stated that Nuzzle jumped up and walked right alongside
her as they left. One thing I knew is I did not have to worry
about Mary with Nuzzle to protect her no one with eyes
would dare even touch her. She later told me when she
entered the store Sam had looked at Nuzzle and was about
to say something about him coming into the store, but she
said he looked over and started to open his mouth. When
Nuzzle looked up at him Sam immediately shut his mouth.
Robert the son had come in the back door and saw Mary
and she said he couldn’t get his tongue right, he was
stammering and stuttering and jabbering and not making
any sense. Sam laughed and told him to stop and start all
over and try to be a gentleman when speaking to the lady.
Robert said I have never saw such an incredible looking
woman in all my life is she a Ute he asks? Yes, Robert Mary
said and thank you for the nice words I am sure we will be
friends, and you may enjoy coming to our fire and learning
our ways. I want you to know you are welcome to join us
anytime you should decide but know that you must speak
before waking up to our camp.
86
Just before Mary entered the camp Miny the youngest
cougar jump up and ran to greet her and in an that instant a
Bald Eagle dropped from the sky and hooked onto the cat
and as hit enormous wings struck the ground to lift off with
it Nuzzle was upon the bird so fast and had the neck of the
Eagle in his mouth and feathers flue and the Eagle was dead
before I could catch my breath. Thank you, Father, for
having Nuzzle right here and protecting Miny from that
Eagle. Mary continued to tell that she would gather the
feathers to make a special head gear up and would store
them with the necklace she had made with cougar mothers’
toenails when she had passed away.
After supper we built a small fire and had just sat down
with a cup of coffee when Sam and Robert yelled, they
would like to join us and visit for a while. The three cats
sat side by side watching both men like they were someone
to protect us from. Nuzzle sat at my side as always so he
just watched Sam as he sat upon the log we had pulled up
for seating. Dan Sam said it is a little nerve racking having
these cats and a timber wolf setting around, but we will get
use to it I am sure he says.
Sam starts off by telling us the river is called Truckee,
and it feeds from a large lake high up in the mountains and
that lake is called Tahoe and it has commercial fisher men
up there catching some of the biggest fish you have ever
87
saw. He told me the lake was surrounded by mountains, and
the water was so clear you could see the bottom hundreds
of feet down. What is downstream from us, I ask. He told
us there was another large lake known as Pyramid and it
also was a very large lake with many very big fish. He told
of the huge trout that would be traveling up this river every
year and they had to be at least fifteen pounds or bigger. He
told of a town called Genoa that was South and West of us
that had another small trading post and many Piute Indians
that had large villages close by and where they were
located. He told of the mines in the area directly West of us
and the fact that there were many white people who
traveled through this area, and it was not a bit unusually for
them to stop into the store.
After he left for home Mary turned to me and said you
do know that the Eagle that attacked Miny was no doubt
hunting for her little ones. What are you telling me Mary,
how could you know this, and you surely don’t expect us
to find and raise a baby Eagle, do you? How many babies
would an Eagle have and where would the nest be? This is
surely not our future to care for birds of prey now. Mary
said the Eagle has a large nest that they add onto every year,
and they are born in the nest and the young come back to
that nest and raise their young, so the nest gets bigger and
bigger. Young Bull my cousin climbed up the side of a
88
mountain and killed an Eagle years ago and they still sing
songs about his bravery to this day. Well Mary I have news
for you this boy is not climbing no mountain to fight a live
Eagle to prove nothing to no one so forget that idea. Well
Dan, you do have something no one else has ever had. You
can fly your kite and find the nest from the air that no one
else has ever been able to do. But Mary, I can’t just stop the
kite in midair and walk over to a nest. I must stay in the
kite and then I may be able to see the nest but would not be
able to do more than just look. I think in the morning we
should prepare for another flight if I am to ever hear the
end of this.
The next morning after breakfast we took the kite that
was a copy of the bald Eagle built by our friends and
relatives, back at Mary’s home village. Sam and Robert
joined us and were amazed when we told them about our
intended fight. He thought we were joking until he saw the
large kite laid out and being assembled. This would be an
impressive flight for sure with the white eagle’s head tied
to the front, but I could see no reason to ware it, but Mary
pointed out that if there were eyes watching me from the
ground it would be better to appear as a large Eagle as much
as possible. So, agreeing and lining up Shadow we tied the
rope to Shadow and Mary handed me a small amount of
jerky and some water to allow me to be comfortable while
89
looking. We had discussed this so many times on our
travels that I would let her know when I found it was not
needed to retell again.
After getting ready and having Shadow lined up and
ready, I said ok slow and easy Shadow and off she went and
when the rope got tight, I yelled hit it run and before I could
take two steps the kite rose and started to climb skyward. I
forgot to even watch to make sure there was a wind but
thinking back as I lifted there was a wind blowing and I had
just not paid attention to it. Up I went it was so easy and
because I had done it so many times I was relaxed and
knew where I wanted to go. The Eagles nest would have to
be either in the top of a tall tree or on the side of a mountain,
so I just allowed the kite to circle the area just kind of lazy
like just gliding along watching.
I had not been up ten minutes when I could see a large
nest at the top of a pine tree and the top of the tree had
broken off and the nest was Hugh, it must have been over
fifteen feet across it. As I flew over the top, I could see a
baby Eagle and it had gotten big enough I knew it could see
me as I circled just above it. I flew directly over and as I
did; I dropped a hand full of deer jerky into the nest hard to
miss when the nest was that big. A large branch stuck out
just below the nest, and it was tempting to try and land on
that branch. It came to me that if the kite caught in that nest
90
I would drop like a rock. It would be prudent to recognize
that I am not equipped for flight and return to the camp.
From the nest to the camp only took me a few minutes
and I guessed the distance on the ground to only be a mile
or so from the camp. Turning past as usual and turning back
towards the camp, I don’t think it was two minutes, and I
had returned to the ground. This had happened so many
times I just took it into the habits of past experiences and
was gathering up my stuff when Nuzzle was standing at my
side wanting attention as usual. Mary was first to be at my
side, but Sam and Robert were not far behind.
Robert couldn’t get the questions out before Sam had
asked him and before I could answer Robert, they were
talking over each other. Hold on these guys, we have lots
of time to answer and before we do, I would like to gather
roll up the kite and get it put away before the wind has a
chance to destroy it. After showing them how to untie the
bamboo on the sides it took very little time, and we had
everything put away and were heading back to camp.
We saw you drop things toward the nest in fact I went
over an gathered up a few sticks of jerky that had missed
and feel to the ground below the tree, so we know there had
to be some babies in the nest. How many were there? Only
one was my answer but then it is possible there was
another, but it looked to me like one other eagle was alive
91
and one dead in the nest. Did it have a white head, Mary
asks? No, it was more of a brown head but no doubt it was
an Eagle, but the feathers were not white, and nothing
showed but I just knew it was an Eagle. Did it eat the jerky
was one of the questions. Yes, I said in fact when I dropped
the first one it fell right into the mouth of that little chick. I
cannot say that it was very cute though it was not like a
baby goose, it was kind of different in that regard. How
often do you think you will have to go up there to feed it?
Whoa too many questions I don’t know much about Eagles
or their babies so we will have to learn together. I do think
I should find something besides jerky to feed the baby that
is not as hard to eat. Also, I would guess that they get water
from the meat and jerky offers none. I think it took the jerky
because it fell just right but tomorrow, I think I need to take
a rabbit or something like that up there. That will be easy,
I will just tell Nuzzle to get me something and he will.
What I wonder about is water for it. I wonder how they get
a drink up there, but I bet it is from the food like I said and
that is why the jerky is not a good idea, it is too dry.
After supper and things were put away out of the dark
came Sam and Robert and after giving notice, they joined
Mary and I for a discussion of today’s activities. You know
Sam that both of you are welcome to join us anytime for
supper. We know that and we thank you, but we have things
92
to take care of at the post, so it allows us to clean up and
lock up. We do have many questions to ask about today’s
flight though. First, we both would like to know how you
figured this out. Well, that was easy God did it for me I had
no choice when it happened, and Dan went on to explain
how he had found himself floating above the treetops. After
landing and finding that I could fly and live I was forced to
do it to save a friend’s daughter and after that it became
easier and easier to do. I must admit that having a deep faith
in God helps.
As the conversation continued during the evening Sam
thought that he should mention that rumor was the Paiutes
were in the area and were not happy because the
government was trying to force them into a treaty which
they had no use for and did not trust the white man’s words.
Dan did not think that would have anything to do with him
or his family but was not sure because they had never been
to this area and had no knowledge of the Paiutes.
Sometimes just being in the wrong area at the right time
can get one killed when it comes to Indians Sam told him.
If the wind blows tomorrow, I will try to drop a rabbit
or something like that to the Eagle and hope he can eat it
without the help of the mother. I did not see another Eagle
but maybe the father will take over and watch out for it. As
I remember when an Eagle loses a mate, they will try to
93
find another one to replace the first and join in raising the
young. Of course, you can read many things but rather they
are true or not is another matter. Where will you get the
rabbit to feed the bird, Sam asks? That is the easy part, I
will tell Nuzzle to go get one and he will bring it to me.
How will he know what you want and how will you keep
him from eating the rabbit when he catches it? Nuzzle was
sitting next to Dan looking at Sam and when Sam asked
Dan the question he barked and threw his head back and
forth indicating that he knew what was said and was
disagreeing. That’s incredible Dan. I think he understood
what I said and knew. Without a doubt he knows, and he
will not stop till he shows up with the rabbit. I believe the
cats are learning the same way rather it is coming from
Nuzzle or what they are becoming familiar with us and
seem to be understanding us. OK Robert let’s get to bed
and we will see you both in the morning for coffee.
The wind was blowing not hard, but Dan felt enough
he could take flight, and he had the rabbit on a shingle
waiting for the Eagle. Mary told Dan she was not going to
give him any jerky or water sense she did not think he
would be flying that long. That’s good, Dan said because I
am not taking a gun tomorrow either sense it should not
take me an hour to make the flight. Shadow was in the
meadow waiting and Dan had already put the saddle on him
94
and had the rope wrapped and laying over the saddle horn
when Dan got to the meadow. Mary held one corner of the
kite, and all three kittens were side by side watching as Dan
prepared to take off. Nuzzle never missed his chance of
running alongside of Dan so it was not any different this
morning when Dan said slow and easy as Shadow took up
the loose rope and when Dan yelled hit it run Nuzzle took
off and was faster than Dan until Dan left the ground and a
few minutes later dropped the rope which Dan knew
Nuzzle would gather it and take back to Mary. That was
another thing that Mary helped with, she stopped Shadow
and brought her back to camp.
Dan lifted as normal and went directly to the Eagles nest
where he dropped the right wing to get lower to the nest
making sure that he was close enough to drop the rabbit in
exactly the right spot for the bird to feed on it. The young
Eagle looked up at Dan like he knew him and was waiting
for breakfast. Dan was so memorized by the sight he was
not looking at the wing tip as it was just over the top of the
tree. The edge of the kite hooked the top of the tree and
pulled Dan into the tree and before he could do anything
the kite ripped and crashed into the branches below and it
dropped and fell. The kite had been spinning as it fell but
after hooking one or two branches it ripped the kite, and it
fell hooking each branch on the way down. The speed of
95
the drop was slow because of the ripping and taring of the
material in the kite but when the kite came to a stop it was
hanging on the very bottom branches of the tree and Dan
was tied in a knot with robe tied around him and he was
barely conscious when he raised his head to look. Blood
was running down his face and his chest was covered with
blood. He could feel his ribs hurt when he first hit the tree.
Trying to take inventory of his pains and see if he was able
to get untied from this and get out of the tree when it finally
came to him that someone was speaking and there was
more than one, but he could not see them. Dan could not
understand the language but knew there several Indians
below him and as he looked down saw so many, he could
not count them.
As Dan hung there, he could feel the rope jerking back
and forth someone was cutting the rope where it was tied
to the tree. When the rope gave free Dan dropped maybe
fifteen feet to the ground and hit on his legs, which gave
way, and he fell right on his nose in the dirt. His hands had
been tied from the rope, and he couldn’t get free fast
enough to get his arms out to slow the fall. He was jerked
to his feet by two very big Indians, and they cut the ropes
around him, but the freedom was short lived because they
tied his hands behind him. They threw him over the back
of a horse on his belly and tied him so he could not move
96
and before he could get his breath, he was pounding away
on his stomach, hurting and breathing in short chunks of
air. OH, how this hurts Dan thought and he had tried to talk
to them, but no one even paid him any attention.
Nuzzle saw Dan falling from branch to branch and as
soon as it happened Nuzzle took off and never saw the
Indians that were not very far away from the base of the
tree. Nuzzle was not under the tree but was close enough
to see when Dan went crashing down the tree. Nuzzle went
as fast as he could run to let Mary know of the problem and
to let her know to come help Dan.
Hours later, after following sounds of several horses in
front of him and horses behind him Dan was finally cut free
from the horse and fell on his head in a stream of water that
allowed him to finally get a drink and catch his breath.
Forcing him to set up on the horse was a step above being
tied across it but he was in such pain from his ribs he was
going in and out of consciousness and had no idea how long
he was tied to the horse, but they stopped and built a fire
and he was tied to a tree with his hands behind him when
the sky became light enough to see. They gave him a small
piece of meat and put him back onto the horse and off they
went again. Two days later he guessed as best he could he
97
was tied to a stump at the edge of a small village of maybe
twenty teepees.
Dan’s right eye was closed, and he thought it was
because of the blood that had run down into it and he
thought if it were cleaned, he would be able to see. No one
washed him or gave him any water or food and the blood
on him was not cleaned off but must have scabbed over
because he was not bleeding any longer, at least not on the
face. A warrior stood in front of Dan and tried to talk with
him, but his language was not making any sense to Dan.
Dan spoke in Shoshoni and the warrior turned and spoke to
others and finally a woman walked up and said how is it
you can speak as a Ute? Dan explained he had lived with
the Ute for several years and his woman was a Ute.
The Ute stole horses from Paiute, and they were not
enemies but were not at peace with them either. The woman
explained her name was Dawn and she had been stolen
from the Utes and had lived with the Paiutes for many years
now. Dan wanted to know why they had captured him and
what they wanted from him. She explained the white man
had been trying to force the Paiute from their rightful lands
and when he flew over, they had been watching him. When
he crashed into the tree, they figured the great spirit had
done it for them and they were going to use him as a
98
sacrifice to the great spirit showing devotion to him for
delivering the big bird to them.
Dawn explained to Dan that he was not fed because he
would not be alive long enough to need food. His hands
were tied together so tight he had lost all feeling in his
fingers, and he knew he was in trouble. Dan was saying
prayers as fast as he could to put words into his mind.
Father, he said if you get me out of this one you are really
going to have an imagination the way it looks, they are
going to burn me to the stake, and I am not afraid to die but
not liking the idea of burning to death. Dan had his eyes
closed as he was praying and when he finished, he opened
his eyes and standing before him was Joseph the very man
who had shown up at his fire pit one night and dumb
founded him with information. Joseph Dan said, β€œis it
really you? Yes, Dan, I told you that I was your personal
guide and that all you had to do was ask and I would be
here. Can you not see the situation I am in? Dan asks. I see
you have your hands tied, does that disturb you that much?
It’s not just that it is what they have in mind that bothers
me. Have you not had your hands tied before? Of course, I
have. Then what makes this so big a deal? I have told you
they have me intended to be burnt alive. Is that what you
want Dan? No of course not. How many times must you be
99
saved before you can see the power you have Dan? And
with that Joseph was no longer there.
Nuzzle ran into the camp and jumped up and down and
running around Mary, barking, howling, and raising all the
fuss he could. What is wrong with you Nuzzle what has
happened to get you so excited. Has something happened
to Dan? When she said that, Nuzzle stopped and sat in front
of her and barked twice. OH, Sam Dan has had an accident,
and he needs me, I must run. Nuzzle go get Shadow and
Dawn and I will get the weapons.
Sam said I will join you, but I must go get my horse
and tell Robert we will be leaving. I will join you as fast as
I can. Sam turned and ran toward the cabin and Mary ran
into the small shelter to get things as fast as she could.
Mary’s mind wasracing so fast she was almost in tears with
worry and excitement it was hard to pay attention to the
things she must do and take. Gathering all she could think
she would need she ran to the horses and climbing on
Dawn, she turned him and holding the rifle and sack of
bullets in one hand she yelled to Shadow let’s go and
together they took off running toward where she knew Dan
had to be.
Sam joined her just as they left the meadow and were
following her as she made her way through the tall pine
trees. As Mary arrived, she could see the kite hanging from
100
the tree but could not see Dan. Dan, where are you?
Jumping down at the base of the tree Mary could see many
tracks and she was confused about what all this meant.
While she was looking Sam jumped down beside her and
he said look at the ropes on the kite, they had been cut with
a knife. Look at all these tracks Mary someone has been
here and taken Dan.
After further looking it was found where Dans feet hit
the ground when cut from the ropes but there were so many
tracks it was confusing as to what exactly had happened,
but one thing was for sure he was gone, and someone had
taken him. Walking away from the tree a line of tracks
going to the North was obviously where they had gone. The
track had no shoes, so the horses were Indian, and they had
Dan and was leaving with him.
What are we going to do Mary we can’t follow and
expect to fight this many Indians alone. Nuzzle had
returned from following the tracks and stood in front of
Mary and sat waiting for her command. Nuzzle, Mary said
you must follow and do what you can to protect Dan, and I
will return to the camp and get food and blankets and more
weapons. With that Nuzzle turned and ran off following the
trail to the North.
Mary you are not going to follow all those tracks and
expect to face all those Indians alone or you? You know
101
that just the two of us could do nothing against that many
don’t you? Sam, I know that if it were me that were taken
Dan would not doubt one moment before he would follow,
and I will do no less. We will return to camp, and I will get
things necessary to follow till I am with Dan.
After returning to the camp Mary put the pack saddle
on Buster and loaded what food and blankets, she
everything she thought would be necessary to follow. She
put Dans saddle on Shadow then put his rifle in the saddle
holster. Then put her own saddle on Dawn, which she had
not done before. She had just left in a hurry without a
saddle but now, she would expect to be more than one day
following. As she turned looking for anything else that
would be necessary, she saw Mayone standing before her
and said I did not hear you approach. Smiling Mayone said
I did not walk up is the reason, but I am here to advise you
that you must take your wedding dress with you, the Eagle
feather head dress, and the Cougar claw neckless you have
made with you. Thank you, Mayone, I would never have
thought of that. Also, you must take Eeny and Meeny with
you. I will do as you say, may I ask if Dan is hurt? Dan is
not hurt bad he has small problems from falling to the
ground but not badly. I will be at your side as you need me
so fear not Mary. With that she was no longer there so Mary
turning finished loading the animals, putting the special
102
saddle for the kittens on Shadow and pointing to it telling
the cats to get in and they did.
It was almost dark before Mary could get on the trail
heading out, but she wanted to get as far as fast as possible,
so she left camp and followed the trail to the Eagles Nest
and on the way past said to herself I hope Dan feed the little
one the rabbit before he had the accident. Little one, your
life is now in your own hands we can do no more till we
return. Passing the tree, Mary found it hard to continue
because of the darkness and did not want to lose the tracks
she was following. Stopping and unloading took only a few
minutes and thankful she had several bladders of water
because she did not look for a camping area she just went
as far as she could before dark.
Nuzzle had no trouble following the obvious trail left
by so many and the scent was so strong he never slowed
down till he came upon the party of Indians who had Dan.
Hiding in the trees as close as possible without being seen
by them Nuzzle crawled up close to Dan and when it got
dark, and no one could see him Nuzzle came up behind Dan
and as he had been taught untied Dans hands. Then he left
Dan and went back into the woods to rest.
After Nuzzle left Dan leaned down and untied his feet
then just stood up and walked to the open fire where the
Utes were standing around eating and talking. As they
103
looked and started pointing and yelling among themselves
Dan pointed to his mouth and indicated he wanted
something to eat. Off to the side Dan saw Dawn running
through the crowd and she ran up to him, he said to her.
Would you ask these great warriors if together they should
be afraid of him. She turned to the crowd and told them
what Dan had said. He told them with that many he would
not punish them for what they had done. She said they were
not afraid of him. He then asked them why they had tied
my hands and were they afraid I would hurt them. Several
men stepped forward and one hit Dan and knocked him
down. When he got up, he told them that they would not
sleep until he was released and fed as he should be.
Dan held up his hand with four fingers to the sky and
Nuzzle started to howl and he continued to howl. Several
men grabbed Dan and took him back to the tree he was tied
to but Nuzzle must have gotten friends to help because all
around the camp the wolfs could be heard growling and
howling and barking as if the moon was out. The Chief
turned to the men about the fire and said why are the wolfs
howling without the moon? He was told what Dan had told
them, and he said do not pay attention to an enemy he
knows nothing. Put him back to the burning post and be
done with him. Chief the ropes looked like they had been
104
chewed by a wolf and the area around where he was tied
has prints of a wolf having been there.
Does the prisoner have you doubting your ability as a
warrior? Why do you believe these things? The men
returned from tying Dan to the post and when they did, he
was told that when they turned Dan toward the post several
wolfs stepped forward and forced them to leave. Was he
tied up before you left? No, he was not, we had no
weapons, so we ran. Let us go back and bring your bow and
a few arrows. When they got to the post Dan was standing
beside the post but there were many wolves beside him and
as they walked up Dan stepped back into the brush and was
gone from sight. Get him, the Chief said and when they
went to step into the brush many wolves started to growl
and there were so many warriors withdrew from the attack.
Immediately all around the village the wolfs began to
howl and it was so loud that the women and children came
forward point and asking what was happening. We will talk
about this in the morning. There were so many wolves
howling that no one could talk, it was so noisy. One woman
ran up and said I tried to go into the bushes to do my duty
and the wolfs would not let me leave enter the bushes.
Another said I tried to go get water and the wolves would
not allow it.
105
Mary had finally found the village and was looking
toward the village when Mayone stepped up in front of her
and Mary looked down at her from the saddle and asked
her what was to be done. Mayone told Mary that the moon
would be up in two hours and in the meantime, she wanted
Mary to go back to the creek she had crossed and bath and
wash her hair and brush it and put on her wedding dress
and then put the Eagle feather head dress she had made and
the Cougar Claw necklace and return to where they were
.Mary ask why all the wolf were howling and Mayone told
her it was Nuzzle and all his friend protecting Dan not to
worry.
The Chief had gone to his teepee to sleep and the
howling from all the wolfs were so loud he could not rest
so he returned to the center of the circle of men standing
and talking about what was to be done when the Chief
walked up. The enemy Great Eagle had told us this was to
be, but we did not believe him what kind of a man have we
bought into our village the Chief ask? I don’t know but no
one can leave the village without facing a wolf. They are
everywhere, there must be hundreds of them, they are on
all sides of the village, and we cannot get close to Great
Eagle for fear of the wolves. It will be daylight in a little
while and we will see what happens then. With all the
clouds it may not get light for a little bit longer because the
106
clouds will cover the sunrise. All were voicing what they
thought should be done but all showed a fear of the
unknown.
Mary completed dressing and had only to put the Eagle
head dress on when Mayone walked up to her. Mary places
the headdress on and ask Eeny, Meeny and Miny to follow
you to the large rock at the entrance overlooking the
village. Please have one on each side of you and one in
front and ask them to set while you address the Villagers.
Mayone what will I say to the people? Do not concern
yourself Mary your Spirit will know what to say at the time.
While Mary was speaking with Mayone Joseph had
come to Dan and told Dan to walk to the side of the large
rock that overlooked the village and please take Shadow
with you and have him set beside you. I would encourage
you to hold your hand fist up as you have taught Shadow
to silence and then have him howl as you would then when
Mary appears she will have silence for her to speak. Mary
is here; Dan asks Joseph. Why do you doubt me now Dan?
I am sorry, please forgive me for my doubt.
As Marry approached the rock and just before stepping
upon it the sun found a hole in the cloud cover and a bright
light appeared from the sky illuminating Mary and in her
white dress with the Eagle Feather Head Dress, she was
breath taking to all. In all her beaty she stood in a halo of
107
light and the white dress with the Eagle Feathers was such
that all who beheld her was speechless. The wolvesstopped
howling, and silence was throughout the village not a
sound was to be heard. The villagers knelt in unison,
starting from the front to the back, paying homage to Mary.
After all was silenced from any movements and May
had full attention, she held up both arms to the sky and in
a calm, but forceful voice said I am Mary Princess of the
Ute Nation daughter to the great chief Yogi and
Granddaughter to the Great Chief Bold Buffalo and Great
Eagle is my personal Warrior. The Cougars are my friends,
and the Wolfs are my guards. We have come to your lands
to make friends and share the wisdom of the creator. You
have no fear of us, we are not your enemy, we are your
friends. With that said Mary lowered her arms and the light
was dimmed as the cloud cover began to displace the sun.
As Mary spoke standing beside her was Mayone who
translated as Mary spoke. Mayone used her hands to make
jesters, and her voice was calming to all. Mayone was not
under the bright light but off to one side allowing all
attention to upon Mary. When Mary finished speaking
Mayone stepped up beside Mary and as the women came
forth with questions Mayone would translate for Mary and
then answer whatever Mary had said.
108
At first there were only a few but the more that
approached Mary the more joined the group. At one point
there were so many gathered around Mary that she could
not move. Finally, after a few minutes Maylone held up her
arms to the heavens and said loud enough all could hear.
Would you please join us at the great counsel fire so all can
have room and hear Mary when she speaks? The ladies
turned and went into the area and sat on the ground and
waited for Mary to join them. When orderly and noise
lowered to a minimum level Mary stood before them and
when they all wanted to speak at the same time Mary would
point to one and with a smile ask her for her question.
Maylone explained to the group that Mary would be glad
to answer the questions, but they would have to ask one at
a time and allow Mary time to answer them. All this time
the kittens stayed at Mary’s feet and as she moved so did
the cats and when Mary finally stood in one place all three
cats joined and lay down and went to sleep.
While Mary was busy with the women of the village
the warriors had surrounded Dan from all directions and
when one would try to get to close Shadow would growl
and that brave would step back. Joseph was at Dans side
and as the warriors ask Dan questions Joseph would
translate and answer the questions for Dan. At one point
Dan thought that Joseph was answering questions that he
109
had not even heard but knowing Joseph understood more
than Dan did he just smiled and let things happen as they
would. Finally, from total exhaustion, Dan had to sit down
and when he did Joseph explained to them that Dan had, as
they had known, fallen from a great height, and needed rest.
Joseph went on to explain that the next day Dan continued
the meeting if they would find him a place to rest and
something to eat for the evening. If his health would allow
it and answer more questions but they should understand
his needs now.
Immediately the Chief stepped forward and explained
to all that he Mad Calf Chief of the village offered the
teepee held for special visitors should be prepared for this
special quest and his woman. Between Joseph and Mad
Calf Dan was taken to a Teepee and to a small fire that was
prepared inside and helped to set, and food was brought to
him immediately.
As Dan was getting comfortable Mary joined him
while Maylone and Joseph stood to the side smiling at the
couple as they had obviously relaxed. We will join you in
the morning when we are needed and with that both just
disappeared. Dan had been holding Mary and when they
were alone again Dan took ahold of Mary and without any
bystanders placed her onto the robes and began to smother
her with kisses. It is so nice to have you with me, Dan said.
110
Mary told him she was in wild worries until Mayone
showed up and began to organize things. I was so worried
and Mayone had explained that you were hurt but not bad
and that you would return to your normal heathy person.
Mary, I began my journey with very little guidance to me,
but I did have a knowledge of the great creator and the book
I told you about by the great creator tells the whole truth
and has been my guide. In this book are many stories and
one of those says the secret things belong to the lord our
God, but those things which are revealed belong to us and
to our children forever. We cannot explain who are where
Mayone and Joseph came to us, but we can agree they were
necessary for us to be where we are on our journey today.
We are given those from our God and because he gave them
to us, they belong to us but the secretes are his.
Dan, I was in tears and torn between thoughts when
Mayone appeared and when she did, I had a calming come
over me that was beyond words. I felt her way inside of
me, not just standing before me but from the very inside of
me I knew she was special. Mary we both know they came
from our creator to guide us and to allow us to accomplish
something we have no knowledge of and as I just told you
those things from our creator cannot be explained so we
will just accept them and know that we have something in
our future that is meant to be and as we follow this journey
111
I personally know that I was on a mountain top when he
first became a reality to me but sense then the mountain
was not as high as the knowledge I have felt sense then.
From thinking I was alone when in fact I had the power
guiding me to my princess and without a doubt the future
for us has happened for a purpose.
Your people, Mary are many and spread over a large
area and we are a part of them and now we have another
people that are just as many and just as large an area of
power and we have now been allowed to become a part of
their family also and God forbid that I should boast about
it. Dan, the friends, and families we have met make my
heart swell with happiness and joy. I feel as though we have
known them forever and the brightness in the eyes, the
smiles on the faces and the words of their greetings are as
real as the sun is in the morning. Mary, I am just beginning
to see that the journey to the ocean is going to be a joining
of worlds brought together for a purpose beyond our
understanding.
112
CHAPTER FIVE
ACCEPTED BY THE PAIUTE
I have yet to ask about the kite and the crashing into
the tree. All the questions have been about Shadow and the
wolves howling all night long and not letting anyone sleep.
113
When I held up my hand and the wolves stopped howling
made a bigger impression on them than the kite did.
The next morning as we got ready to go Mayone and
Joseph appeared to tell us goodbye, and they would be as
always; our support and our spirit leaders should we need
them. Just a minute here I said how are we going to speak
to those waiting out there for us? Well Joseph said the first
thing I would do is open my mouth that allows the sound
to get out. Then I would engage the brain and think about
what is to be said before anything comes out. Many don’t
do that, and they say things they shouldn’t, so I caution you
on that. You have been cautioned. Before that what comes
out of the mouth should be pleasing to the lord as your
meditation should be good for the heart. For some reason
you are avoiding the most obvious problem we have at that
is they speak Numu as in Uto-Aztecan as I recall from my
talking with Sam and Robert at the trading post. When you
stand before them to speak you will find that you have both
been given the knowledge to speak and understand their
language because of your faith. Please accept that as God
has protected you in the past, he will reward you in the
future by your obedience to him. With that both Mayone
and Joseph were gone.
Why do I have the feeling I have been here before
Mary? Was it looking down from the mountain top or was
114
it looking at the trees from the kite for the first time? Is this
what Peter felt as he stepped out of the boat on the sea of
Galileo? Like many things in this world, it has already been
handed to me now all I must do is accept it so I will and
that will add a slayer of worship in those that we are about
to face.
Come with me Nuzzle as I face the people of nation of
Paiute Indians, I don’t want to be alone. There must be
some humor in that somewhere Mary. The two of us shall
face them together just me and my wolf. I may not be
David, but I sure feel like I am about to face Golath. So,
when you are ready Mary, please join me at the counsel of
fire. With that Dan threw back the skin that covered the
opening and stepped out to greet the world.
As I stood up after leaving the short opening of the Tee
pee several men and women were standing there waiting
for me. As I stood no less than five started talking at the
same time and so I held up my hand and said, Good
Morning to all. And they responded in like manor and were
all smiles. I greeted each other as we moved toward the fire
pit, but they were asking so many questions that I had to
stop them and tell them we would have to find a better way
of doing this I could not keep up with them they were more
questions than I could answer at the same time.
115
Another of the Chiefs, Crazy Horse showed up and he
said he would like to ask many questions also but wanted
to know if I would join him at his lodge for breakfast and
we could talk. I said as soon as Mary was ready, we would
be glad to join them. He told the group that we would be
eating together this morning, and he would talk to us about
a counsel fire this afternoon. Nuzzle was standing by my
side as usual and the Chief looked down and asked if he
was tame. Yes, I said he is tame if I am treated friendly, but
should someone show aggression toward me he would not
be friendly. As he was speaking Eeny stuck her head out of
the doorway and gave a low growl. He smiled and said I
have never been this close to a Puma and not been afraid
how had we tamed all these animals? Hunger I said will
tame man or beast, but the great creator has been a part of
that.
Mary stepped out as we were speaking and Meeny and
Miny were with her as she stood up, they sat to her side.
Do they go everywhere with you, he asks? No, I told him
we can leave Nuzzle to watch over them. Are you not
comfortable with them being at our joint meal. He said he
would prefer they did not attend so I turned to the cats and
said go into the shelter and wait for us. We will be back
shortly and Nuzzle can watch over you. With that they
turned and went into the Tee pee and Nuzzle followed
116
them. Mary said she had fed the kittens so they should be
alright for a while. As we left others started to drift away
and when I looked back no one was around our place so I
felt the kittens would lay down and sleep again so no one
would hear them playing.
When we entered Crazy Horse’s home his wife was
standing at the door with the flap tied back and told us to
enter. In the center of the Tee pee was a fire pit with a small
fire burning and two gals were arranging things so we
could have a place to sit. Crazy Horse introduced his wife
small flower, and she told us to be settled, and she would
bring us our meals. As we sat down, she told us the two
girls were Snowflake and her sister Blue Sky.
I was handed a bowl of a warm liquid with some kind
of meat in it, and it was very tender and delicious. That is
a very good Small Flower. What is that meat? And she told
me it was roasted raccoon and to get it that tender she had
to boil it slowly for several hours. The dish had wild onions
and a berry of some kind plus something I could not
identify but was sure it was a herb of some kind. Mary was
also very interested in what was in the bowl and asked
Small Flower if she would teach her how to make it. As the
ladies talked of how to prepare the soup which is what I
called it Crazy Horse and I just eat our meals and from the
way Crazy Horse acted he didn’t like the women talking
117
while we eat but he said nothing, and I believe it was
because we were there, or he may have said something.
When the meal was finished, and we were leaning back
relaxing, the Chief asked me how it was that we could
speak their language this morning but last night we had to
have help. I explained that my Father in heaven blessed us
with the ability to speak their language. The next question
was where were Mayone and Joseph? I told them they had
left in the night not wanting to have to try and explain that
one. Crazy Horse said they had guards out and no one said
anything about seeing either of them leave. It was very late
I explained and let it go at that. He was still wondering how
we could speak that fast I again told him of the great spirit
and his ability to protect and teach us. And that is one of
the subjects that I would like to talk to you about Chief.
I went on to explain that we had come to their land on
our way to the great ocean under the setting sun. I would
like to have a great counsel where all the people could hear
my story, and I would like Mary to also explain some of the
things that those in the village were asking. The Chief
thought that would be a very good idea and he would call
for counsel from the tribe and ask for their blessings and
ask that it be so.
Mary and Small Flower had formed a very good
friendship in such a short time and as we stood to leave,
118
they hugged and agreed to meet again as soon as they were
through with their chores. I returned to the lodge with
Mary, and we walked along I told her of what the Chief had
asked me and told her how hard I thought it would have
been to explain who Mayone and Joseph was, and could
she imagine what he would have said if I had told him they
just left like that. Some things are better not said than to
speak about something so far over their head that it is not
understood. I do believe that they have a better
understanding of the spirit world than most, but I want to
both share and learn from them and I think telling them
how we got here or explaining my travels from Boston to
here would help in their understanding. When we get to
your people and you, I will stop and bring you up and let
you explain how you came to be here. I don’t know if they
even saw me up in the sky, they may have thought the kite
was just a big Eagle and never knew it was me so if I don’t
learn more on that subject it is going to be a really big deal
when I explain about flying. We are not living the normal
life as these people know it, we have animal friends they
have never saw living with anyone ever now we come
along with a Wolf and three Cougars, and I don’t think they
even know about Teyah would they believe we have a
trained deer to give milk to the little ones? This meeting is
going to be very interesting to say, and I sure hope it goes
as good as I pray it can. Perhaps Dan, I should walk out and
119
take Nuzzle with me and see if I can get some more milk
for the little ones. They are almost big enough to eat sold
food, but I am not sure they will yet. Perhaps when I go out
for the milk I can have Nuzzle, get a rabbit or something
that we can give to the cats and see if they are ready to eat
it or not.
Crazy Horse came by our camp and told me he had
been in a meeting with several of the other Chiefs and they
had agreed that it would be a good thing to have us tell the
whole village of our travels and it would be entertaining to
them also. They use things like this as a diversion to keep
the people active and it brings harmony to the village. He
told me that after the last meal of the day they would build
a large fire and invite all to attend so just at about dark we
would join them again. He said that the Small Flower had
wanted to prepare a special meal and several of her friends
wanted to help so they would bring it to us later this
afternoon.
Mary and I just sat around a small fire outside of our
lodge and discussed what we would be speaking of during
the meeting and in this discussion it had come to me that
Mary had not been born again and now was a good time to
discuss what that meant and so I started to explain then I
said no maybe I should talk to all about this and you will
learn with the others.
120
Mary had gone with Nuzzle so I just laid back in the
sunshine and took advantage of the warm sun and no one
bothered me made nap time a great and wonderful idea. I
had just given the best speech the world had ever heard
when I felt Mary shaking me to wake up and help feed the
little ones. Well, it was a great speech, but I had just not
delivered it yet except in my dreams.
As the time neared, I walked with Nuzzle to the
council fire and as I grew near, I heard the Chief tell those
in attendance that here he is now, so I just continued up till
I was standing before the Chief and greeted him in voice
and in eye contact. He held his arm out toward the crowd,
and I turned to face the village.
Momentarily I was petrified and did not know if I
could find it in me to speak. As I stood there calmness
overcame me, I could hear the cheering and the yelling of
greetings from the crowd. As I waited for the noise to quiet
down, I felt more comfortable as the noise settled down and
so did my heart rate and fear. My name is Daniel, Adam,
David, Soloman, Clark, but I go by the name of Dan in the
world I came from but in this world, I am known as Great
Eagle and that story is why I am standing before you. I
came from where the sun rises in the morning, and my
journey took two hands of moons to travel this far. To have
you understand what I am saying, how many of you have
121
left this village and traveled from one full moon to the next
without turning around and coming back?
In that land there is a body of water that if one were to
take a canoe and travel it would take as long to cross as it
took me to get here. That is how big that water is, and it is
called an ocean and there is one where the sun settles in the
West and that is where my journey leads me.
I traded all that I had for those things I would need to
make that journey and when I left there were those that saw
my worldly possessions and wanted to take them from me.
After several fights and I had killed many of them I climbed
a very high mountain to the very top where I was going to
make my last stand to fight those that were left of my
enemies. I had a robe that was very thin, allowing me to
carry it on my horse easily and I had laid that over me to
keep the wind and rain off while I slept. The wind was
blowing so hard I could not sleep and hold down the skin
so I had tied the edges with sticks I had and then I tied a
walking stick from side to side which I laid on and by body
held down the sides so I could sleep but even then I could
not completely rest so I took a rope and tied from the top
by my head to the bottom and I did that three times then I
fell to sleep after giving my great creator who I call Father
thanks and knew no more because I went to sleep,.
122
I awoke floating out over the mountain and trees and I
was up in the air like a bird in the sky. With this I stopped
for those to understand what I was telling them and the
murmurers, the aweing, and whispers were so loud I waited
for it to quiet down. When it became silent, I again told
them Yes, I was floating up in the sky like a leaf in the wind.
I did not know till I reached for my hat, and it fell so as I
turned to pick it up it was gone and so was the mountain I
was laying on.
When your warriors found me hanging in a tree it was
because I had hooked the tree with my kite and had been
torn from the sky and blunged to the ground with the tree
limbs slowing my fall. Those that took me prisoner had not
known I had come from the ski they must have not seen me
flying with the birds in the sky.
My God had taken me from the mountain and allowed me
to fly then he took me from the sky and crashed me into a
tree where I was to be found by your people, and he
protected me from your torture and bondage and forced
you to set me free. These are true words that you must
know because you faced the wrath of holding me prisoner
and mistreating me.
Because of my ability to fly I was also allowed to
speak to the Ute Nation and because of my powerful God
was awarded a princess of special honors and, I became a
123
member of their tribes. I believe that the Paiute Nation is
so powerful and respectful of the great creator he has
allowed me to bring word of his presents to you through
me. I am not a God but a massager for him and as such
would like to spend time with your people and tell of the
powerful God I speak of. We are not here to represent the
Ute Nation we are not here to make less of the Paiute
Nation, but we are here to bring understanding and
knowledge of another God you should learn to respect. I
am not an ordained minister only a man who has
experienced the glory and love of a special God and as such
would like to share that with you.
If your people allow it, we will continue this as you
may wish but for now let me introduce you to my
wonderful partner and wife as called by my tongue. Mary,
please come up here and say a few words to these people.
With that Mary stepped up onto the large rock that had
been placed there for that reason. The crowd went wild the
women danced and waved their arms the men shouted, and
Mary’s name was shouted by most and the laughter and
jovial passion was so strong in the area that one would
think Mary had stepped right of a cloud from heaven the
way she was accepted. After several minutes of total causes
Mary raised her arms and held her hands open before the
village and as she stood there, they became silent. Thank
124
you, my newfound friends, for the warm and friendly
welcome you have shown us. I had stepped to the side and
Nuzzle was at my hip all the time and now he just sat and
watched the crowd. The three kittens were not fully grown,
but they sat to the side of Mary as she was speaking, and
they also just sat and watched the crowd.
Mary started out by explaining that she had been living
in the village of Chief Yogi of the Ute Nation and as a
young girl she had known the great creator of her people
and had a belief in him the same as all of her friends and
family did but along came the Great Eagle and spoke of a
God of his people. I later found this God to be a truthful
God and found he was not just Great Eagles God but a God
of all people not just those of the white skin but of all skins.
I found this God to be a loving living God and the more I
learned the deeper was my love and faith in this God who
I have grown to admire. As you have found he has saved
the Great Eagle from a death by fire to a warrior to be
respected. The Great Eagle has not only told us of this great
spirit, but he has shown us he is real, and he is father to all
who would worship him. Our journey to the great ocean in
the West has brought us into your village and into our
hearts the love you have shared with us. While in my
village back home the Great Eagle explained to all the ways
of his God and as he has told not all even his people do not
125
always live as his God has told us we should. Our people
do not always do as our creator’s spirit leads us, but we all
agree he is guiding us every day.
Great Eagle please come back up here, and we will say
a prayer together and ask for our lives to be joined and
knowledge shared together. I joined Mary and when I did
the three cats stood like they had come to attention and with
that it came to me. I raised one finger and Eeny growled at
the crowd. I raised two fingers and Meeny growled at the
crowd. I then raised three fingers and Miny growled then I
raised all, and the three cats growled as Nuzzle howled and
the crowd went wild. I held up a fist and sat down and
looked at those in the crowd like a singer taking a bow.
With that finished we all joined the villagers as they
crowded around us, and everyone tried to speak at the same
time. Much laughter and smiles were shared by all who
were there. Even the children were laughing and sharing
the time together. The women brought out food they had
prepared, and the men started a large fire, and the drums
began to sound and with that the party began. Those
participating in the festivities were either dancing around
the fire or singing. Meanwhile, those who were not
engaged in dancing or singing were enjoying their meals
and the overall celebratory atmosphere.
126
When I had stepped down from the rock and was
standing among the crowd the thing I heard most was, they
wanted to see me fly. If you can do this, would you please
show us? Yes, I said but I must have the things that allow
it to happen, and they are partly in the tree where you found
me. I will need to repair the kite that must be in the tree and
for me to show you I will need that and let me explain to
you what must be done after gathering the remains of what
is in the tree. Someone must go to that tree and take it down
and bring it back to be repaired.
When Chief Crazy Horse heard this, he turned to
several and instructed them to go to that tree and take what
is there down and bring it to us. Is that all that is necessary,
he asked me. No, I said I will have to repair it when it gets
here, and I need things that are at the camp we were staying
at. I can return to that camp and gather all our possessions
and return there. It took us two days to get here from where
you found me so it will take two days to go and two days
to return. It will take but a few hours to gather those things
and prepare to return. Let me talk with Mary and we will
leave as soon as possible.
Let it be so the Chief said, and he directed us to a lodge
that was in the center of the village for special guests when
they came to the village. As I looked at the lodge, I told the
Chief that we would prefer not to be in the center of the
127
village, we had the animals to be conserved with, and they
would need to be away from the mass of people that would
crowd the lodge he had suggested we use. The Chief heard
what I said and agreed to allow us another lodge that was
on the very edge of the village, and we went to that, and I
agreed this would be much better for all. He told us he
would see that we received food for our immediate needs,
and we could join them for the evening meal, and we could
talk about the return trip at that time.
When Mary joined me at the location, I was shown we
spent very little time moving in because we have very little
with us. WE discussed rather she should go with me on the
return trip or not and she told me she would like to go but
felt it would not be necessary sense I would only gather
that which was there and bring it back. She pointed out that
it would be much better if the animals could travel back
with me on the trip. As we talked further it was obvious
that if she were to go with me, she could care for the kittens,
and it would be better as a family to stay together as we
knew how to travel as a unit better than for me to try and
care for the kittens and the nighttime would be made easier
if things were as we had learned to do coming this far. So,
after taking it over it was decided she would join me on the
return trip, and we would keep the family together as we
had done in the past.
128
While we were talking about the trip two lads showed
up with arms full of food and robes for our lodge. We
would need those for comfort tonight and when we
returned, they would be necessary. We thanked them and
were rewarded with a very friendly visit and Kately asked
if we join them for the evening meal at the counsel fire.
Kately was the Chiefs daughter and had many questions
she would like to ask us. We answered her and told her
when we returned, we would spend a lot of time together
and she would have time with us alone and each would be
allowed time with us. Kately sister Morning Star was just
as full of questions, and she wanted to know personal
things about Mary and would like to talk with her when I
was not there. Mary told her she would make time and that
they would become very good friends and she was very
excited they had met.
After the girls left, we sat down and enjoyed our time
alone and shared the meal that had been brought to us.
Thankfully the kittens were starting to eat a little meat, and
they were satisfied partly playing with the solid food and
yet eating it at the same time. Having never been around
young cats before we had no idea whether they were to be
forced off the milk and onto solid food or not so we just
kind of made it available and hoped it would work out.
Nuzzle had slipped out when we had not noticed and the
129
first, we knew was when he entered with a sage hen he had
in his mouth, and he placed it in front of the three kittens
like here take this and just stepped back and sat down.
The kittens swatted the bird like testing to see if it was
alive or dead and another would nuzzle up to the bird and
push it with her nose and watch to see if it moved. It was
very entertaining to watch and see what they did with the
bird, but they eventually got a taste and as one ate a little
so did the next, so the feathers flew, and the bird
disappeared. We gave an extra thanks to our heavenly
father for the kittens and that they had finally found solid
food and that we may not have to hand feed them any
longer. It was an exciting time for all of us, being alone and
having new friends in the high lodge and village to protect
us.
Mary we are facing a dangerous point in our
relationship with the Paiute people when they see me fly,
they are going to think of me as a God not as a man and
that is a bad thing to create. It is going to be very important
that I teach them that God controls this and he is the reason
for the ability to fly not me not the kite, but they will see it
from their wisdom, and I must increase that knowledge so
when I fly, they see beyond the flight and see the truth. Well
Dan, you did a good job back home teaching every
morning, maybe you should do that again. These people
130
have a belief in a spirit and in a creator, but they know not
the true one because no one has been accepted by them to
the point they would believe but this will be a balancing act
of truth and wisdom and visual stimulation. I have
explained to Crazy Horse how the kite is to be built the
thinness of the material and the tying of the bamboo along
the sides. I have asked that it be made to look like an Eagle
and the size of the whole thing, so he has a good idea of
what is necessary to build. We will leave in the morning,
and we should be back in a week, but they will get the kite
from the tree and be back faster because they will ride night
and day to do it.
The next morning Snowflake and Blue Sky arrived
early and had brought us breakfast and had a sack of food
to carry us on our journey and they were excited to tell us
how much they were looking forward to our joining their
village. We assured them the feelings were mutual and
were looking forward to friendship and meeting a having
more friends. After a short meal we loaded Buster and
saddled Shadow and Dawn, and we gone within an hour.
The first day went fast and we were enjoying our aftersupper coffee when we heard the yell from outside of our
camp. It was Porcupine and Badger. Are you heading to the
tree to get the kite I ask? No, they said we were on our way
back we would have been faster, but Badger was unable to
131
climb the tree like a true Badger would have and it took
much longer to get all the pieces down. Wow I told them
you guys had a really good time how did you do it so fast?
Well, he said you can see we have two horses each and we
trade back and forth and besides that we have not slept in
two days. Climb down and we will give you something
warm to eat. No Snowflake said we must be on our way we
just stopped to say hi. We will see you in the village next
week and with that they were off and running.
It is amazing how far they went in that length of time,
but did you notice that all three cats ran to the side of our
camp and hid? They must have known they were friends
because they made no noise and never showed themselves.
Yes, Dan said I would hate to be someone wanting to harm
us and have three cougars and a wolf attack without
warning. Let us turn in the morning will come early, and
we must make what time we can to be back within the
week.
The next day we arrived at our old camp, and nothing
had be disturbed from when we left it, We built up the fire
and ate a warm meal and decided that with everything
already laid out we just as well enjoyed one night here
before returning to the village. The kittens knew their beds
and after eating all three were like a nest of snakes, they
were wrapped around each other and sound asleep
132
immediately. Nuzzle had just sat to the side of the cats
when three men on horses pulled up to our fire pit without
having gave us any warning they were coming.
Looking up I told the one in front who appeared to be
the leader of the group that it was not good manners to just
walk up to a man’s fire without notice. He said he could
care less about manners they would do as they pleased and
to forget what everyone else thought if they didn’t like it
that would be tuff. The men were dirty and had not saw
water in months from what they looked like, and the
clothing was old and well worn. The overall appearance of
all three of them was offensive and I could smell them this
far away. I said we had not saw any white men in months
where had they been hiding. He told me it was none of my
business he was going to enjoy my pretty lady then he was
going to eat all the grub we had in camp.
Well, I said that is going to be amazing to see without the
use of your arms and being bloody would not make eating
much fun. While I was talking, I had watched the three cats
circle the horse and the horses had started to jump and
stamp they had smelt the cats and were wanting to get out
of there. The men did not notice their horse were getting
uncontrollable and because of it they could not bring the
riffles to point at either Mary or me. I held up all fingers
and the three cats growled and Nuzzle howled and growled
133
making the horses go wild one threw his rider before he
could get ahold of the saddle horn and the other two had
turned and ran leaving the area and both had lost the guns
they had in their hands because they were busy trying to
hang on. The one that was the leader found himself with
Nuzzle standing on his chest and his teeth right in front of
the man’s face. The guy was screaming and yelling to get
the wolf off him. Why should I do that, I ask when he was
there to do us harm. We were just joking we were not going
to do anything we just wanted to scare you folks.
Perhaps the next time you want to scare someone if we
should decide to allow you to leave that is you will think of
this as a lesson in manors. With only a word or two you
would have been the next meal for our animals. I really
didn’t want them to eat you for fear of spoiled meat though
because you stank so badly that I think you are rotten.
Nuzzle let him up, he is going to run down to the lake and
take a swim and clean up a little. With that Nuzzle sat and
just looked at the guy who was shaking from fear. He stood
and started to walk to the lake when I said no run does not
walk and with that Nuzzle bit him on the back side and that
guy almost flew to the lake and dove in. Nuzzle was
standing watching him but so were all three of the cats so
the guy swam out from the bank and as he did, he was
taking off his jacket and outer garments which was
134
stopping him from swimming as fast as he wanted. I said
you stay out there tonight so we know where you are while
we get a little sleep. If you try to reach the bank our friends
will make a meal of you. Eeny, Meeny, Miny and Nuzzle
do not let them on the bank if they do you have my
permission to eat them. With that I turned and joined Mary
in our robes.
The next morning while having coffee we could hear
the guy yelling and begging to be allowed to come on
shore. Do you hear something Mary? No, she said I heard
nothing but the wind. That’s all I hear so let us finish and
get on the way as soon as possible. When we left, I looked
back, and the guy was swimming toward the shore and his
partners had never showed up, so I guess they just keep
going.
On our return, Mary, I want to stop by the eagle’s nest
and make a short flight over the nest and if everything is as
it should be I will drop more food. Dan, did you say Moe
food or more food? What do you mean Mary? You said
Moe is what I heard, like Eeny, Meeny, Miny & now Moe.
Do you think that is an indication of what is coming Dan?
I have learned not to try and out guess our father he
arranges what is necessary for our journey so what is to
come will be as he wishes.
135
Upon reaching the tree which was not far from the
original camp site we stood back and watched, and we
could see the baby eagle’s head appear as it moved around
in the nest. So, we took the Ravens kite out, but the bamboo
was gone because Porcupine and Badger had taken them
down when they came. We gathered a few small branches
and used them for the outside of the kite and tying them on
we stretched out the rope and Shadow backed up
immediately knowing what we had in mine. I had not
noticed but there was a small wind blowing but as I
prepared to take off, we had a gust of wind and when
Shadow started to run the wind picked up helping me take
off. The rabbits Nuzzle had gotten for us were tied in a
bundle so I could drop the two rabbits and the sage hen in
one drop.
Mary and I had talked of the problem I had last time I
flew over the nest, but I told her I learned my lesson this
time I would not try to get so close so as I turned and lined
up with the nest I got the food ready and as I came over the
top of the nest looking down I saw Moe looking at me like
what’s for lunch Dad? Directly overhead I dropped the
bundle, and it fell right into the nest almost on top of the
eagle and I noted he had head feathers, but they were not
white as I had expected them to be. I heard a cry from the
baby like he knew who I was, which made me smile. I had
136
already accepted him as Moe and wondered how that had
come about.
Landing was like settling in the front porch swing on
Saturday night. I just dropped down, and it was over
without incident. The first thing Mary wanted to know was
if the baby looked healthy and was alright. I informed her,
but he looked up like he knew me, and I dropped the bundle
and said to myself I had fed Moe, and it was like his name
came to me easily. We gathered up the Kite wrapping it as
before and just threw the sticks away. Rolled up the rope
and put it inside of the kite as before.
Returning to the Paiute Village was an easier ride than
the one I had when going to that village the first time. It is
much better to ride upright on the horse than lying over and
tied down. As we rode along Mary agreed with me that we
had to teach them of our father in heaven a little bit at a
time and we did not feel it wise to push them they had been
following their great creator for their whole life now we
were offering a different view and a different living God.
They had never heard of a God still alive they thought of a
God as being dead or in another world never hearing of
being dead and coming back to life. This was a new thing
to them, one that did not seem possible, but I wanted to
explain and not be tied to a burn post when I did. I was
anticipating having time to explain and inform them what
137
was available to everyone regardless of white, black, or
red, so when we returned, we would approach the subject
carefully.
We enjoyed the last night of camping before we were
surrounded by others wanting to ask questions and all, so
the evening was very comforting, and we took our time
eating and then resting. We laid on the ropes looking at the
stars and dreaming of what it would be like to see the
pacific ocean and hear the waves pounding the shore. We
had been told the weather was always warm and they did
not have frost or snow. We were looking forward to a new
experience and wanted to know if all we had heard was
really true.
We arrived at the village in the early afternoon and by
the time we made the middle of the village we had a group
of maybe twenty or so children, women and a few warriors
walking along with us. The cougars stayed almost inside of
the backpack made for them. The only thing showing we
the eyes watching but Nuzzle walked right along with us
and stayed beside Shadow and Buster followed as usual
with no tie rope.
We decided to go right on through the middle and
continue to our lodge so we could put the stuff we had
brought with us and the animals could be comfortable in
138
the lodge or if they should decide to join us, they could do
that also.
As we passed Chief Crazy Horses lodge he stepped out
and we our hellos and friendly jesters but explained we
would return after putting away or possessions which he
said was a good idea and we were invited to the village
meeting just a finger above sundown. That told us he had
ten to fifteen minutes before sundown set as to the time of
the meeting. We later learned that the meeting was intended
for us to explain how the flight of the Eagle was to take
place, and they wanted to present the new kite they had
made for me. We could tell they were excited and looking
forward to our comments on what they had built, and we
could tell them had worked tirelessly to get it done before
we returned.
We went to the counsel fire area before the designed
time because we were hungry and knew there would be
food available. As it happened, we had no idea there would
be the amount of people there or the amount of food there
would be, the Chief had criticized the ceremony trying to
conceal the excitement throughout the village. Everyone
was talking about the flight, and it turned out they had
family and friends coming from other villages wanting to
see if this was true. Is the Great Eagle capable of flying like
a bird.
139
Eating our supper was almost impossible because of
the children hanging on us wanting our attention to them
and the questions continued to the point that I finally set
down the meat I was trying to eat and stood before all and
explained that we had to look at the kite and before I could
say more a group of men walked up with a long bundle tied
tight and was on the shoulders of three men stepping in
time and they stopped in front of us. I had not noticed but
as the men was approaching us the drums had been beating
the villagers were clapping and chanting right up till the
men stopped in front of us and at that moment all noise
stopped, and the Chief dressed in full head dress appeared
from the counsel lodge in all glory and it was almost breath
taking the way they had created this moment of excitement.
I was presented with the most beautiful kite anyone
could ever imagine. It was the size I had instructed them to
build but the material was so soft you wanted to lay it
against your checks to feel the softness. The wings were
shaped just like an eagle and the white on the wings and
the tail feathers were so real it was amazing. I was awed by
the quality of the workmanship and told Crazy Horse that
very thing. I told him I was speech less it was so beautiful
and the craftmanship was perfect. I will be proud to fly with
the eagles when I look just like one of them.
140
Everyone wanted to know if I would fly the next
morning and I explained to them that if it was Gods will,
but I wanted them to know it was not me that they should
be looking to but my father in heaven that enabled me to
fly in the sky with the birds. If there was wind, I would
show them, but it would be all according to the weather. As
we were standing around the fire and all eyes were on Mary
and me I told them to turn away from the fire and look at
all the stars in the heavens and as we did I explained to
them that our father in heaven was so big he could put our
world and all the stars in the palm of his hands and that he
had made everything they saw just by saying it was to be
so. Then I went on to explain not only is he that big he is
also so knowledgeable that he knew every one of us as his
children and looked at us with the same love you would for
your personal child. I would explain all this in the days to
come but I wanted them to know that what they saw was
because of him I was allowed to show what he could do for
us if we would obey and listen to his wisdom. I wanted all
of you to know that his power was why I could fly, it was
like the stars in the heavens he made so we could all see
what he could do.
That night as Mary and I said our prayers together and
I as usual spent a few minutes in her schooling of the
alphabet so she could read we spoke of the coming flight.
141
It is important that they do not think of me as a God flying
in the heavens but that I am but an instrument in his hands
and I believe I have started the mental imagery necessary
to accomplish this. Mary, if we can become friends and be
with the Paiute the same as we are with the Ute, we will
have a large area of friends to visit on our way back from
the ocean.
The next morning, we joined the villagers for our
morning meal and together we all went to the meadow just
below the village for the flight. I told Nuzzle to get Shadow
and he took off immediately and before we knew he was
back, and as usual Buster was following Shadow. Mary
came and had a small package in a leather case with a rabbit
and a few other small game animals and as she handed it to
me, she said it was only a few days ago sense you feed
Moe, but I think while you are up there you should go past
and drop another meal for our latest friend. Yes, I told her
I had thought of going past and seeing but what would
make it even more exciting is with this new kite I believe
our friend will think of me as daddy. Mary laughed and said
just as long as I stay away from that tree and return fast so
she knows I am ok she is good with it.
I had explained to all how the takeoff would go and
how Shadow had been trained to go slow then speed up and
how the wings of the kite should be held off the ground till
142
I was in flight so when we go ready I noticed the ones to
hold the wing tips were on horses that were painted to the
hilt with fancy eagles and even had eagle feathers tied to
the horses tail. The riders had eagle feathers in their hair,
and they also were painted up not as they would when
going to war but with different and bright ornaments that
made one smile when observing. As I looked down at the
meadow, I saw it was lined with people and their drums,
and anything they thought would make a noise to bring
excitement to the moment.
I had explained I would go by the eagle’s nest and told
them from the air it would not take very long but I would
be out of sight for a little bit so not to get worried I would
be back. As I got under the kite and those on each side had
a hold of the wings Shadow was tied to the kite and all was
ready, I stopped and said a prayer not silent but loud
enough that all could hear, and I did this for several
reasons. One and the most important thing was I needed his
blessings and a safe flight and another thing almost as
important was to let all know that I valued my words to my
father, letting him know I needed his blessings. This was
not unusual for these people, they all had a reference and it
showed in many ways. Another important thing was to
make all who sees or hears of this flight to know it was the
143
glory of God that allowed me to do this, and all should
know when they see or hear of what happened.
After the prayer I turned to Shadow and said alright
let’s take up the slack and she did then as it got tight, I
yelled go and again instantly I could take but a few steps
and I was going too fast to run so I picked up my feet and
up I went. I saw out of the corners of my eyes the warriors
waving their arms and yelling. As I left the ground it was
exciting to see it as it happened.
Climbing above the trees and into the blue sky was
again a humbling experience, the fact I had done this before
did not make it less of an experience. I felt so exalted that
I wanted to try and do more to show the greatness of God’s
blessing as I rose above the mountain. I turned to the East
and went directly to the eagle’s nest, and I brought the front
of the kite toward the nest so I could drop another meal and
as I did, I saw the baby eagle watching me and as I flew
over, he raised his head and looked me directly in the eye.
I let go just perfect for the bundle to land right at the feet
of Moe. As I went over, I could not refrain myself. I put
forth the loudest cry of an eagle as Jaw had taught me and
it was justifying, and I had an adrenaline rush just
experience it. I immediately climbed as the wind allowed
and headed to the Paiute Village.
144
I could see all the people there was such a large group
they stood out from this far away and just seeing them
caused a showoff type of feeling inside of me I just could
not help but feel I wanted to more than just fly over and
wave I wanted to show off for some crazy reason. I
approached the village and went over them then turning
when was well past them I tipped the kite toward the
ground and headed right for the main body of viewers. As
I neared the ground my speed increased and when I was
barely over their heads I leveled out and went past so fast,
they had to turn, and I could hear the screaming and yelling
as I went past. Having never done any of these things was
kind of scary yet satisfying in a strange way. Not knowing
what would happen if I were to use that speed to climb
faster so I sat back in my seat causing the back of the kite
to lower and the front went higher and with jaw dropping
amazement I went up faster than I had ever experienced in
all my flights. Playing around and showing off I had
learned something that I did not know that by going down
and gaining speed I could use that speed to go up fast I will
remember that one. I again flew over the head but at a lot
higher this time and as I did, I waved and tipped the kite
from side to side like I was waving with the kite. I turned
the kite into a tight circle and went around and around the
village watching and enjoying the excitement of all. I
finally pointed to the meadow and let out a screeching
145
crying eagles sound after passing the meadow I turned so,
I would be going uphill when I landed, and I set the point
of the kite to where I wanted to land and just waited as the
kite neared the ground.
Just as I was ready to touch the ground with my feet a
horse and rider ran alongside my kite and the Warriors each
took ahold of my wing tips and holding me up as they ran
the horses, they gently sat me on the meadow grass. They
had timed it, so it was a beautiful thing to see just as if we
had rehearsed it several times before.
The questions I had before were nothing compared to
what I heard when I was among the crowd. They wanted to
know if my God could allow them to fly as I had and what
else could my God do. I stopped all an told them give me
time to thank my God for his deliverance and safe landing
and I told my father that I especially was thankful they
understood that the flight was not me, but that God had
aloud and helped it happen. Everyone in attendance
understood fully well that it was not me alone but my father
in heaven who had brought this to be. I believe everyone in
the crowd got the full effect of the revelation they had
witnessed.
Even though I was surrounded by many Nuzzle
pushed and shoved till he was at my side and then he was
content just to be at my side. I looked up and Mary was
146
watching and each of the kittens was standing watching all
the excitement and if a cat could smile, I would say I saw
four of the biggest brightest smiles just like they had
captured a lighting bug and put it into a jar. I was pulled
and pushed so much I lost track of May and the little ones
and did not see them again until we were united around the
fire later that afternoon. Crazy Horse told me not to be
concerned about the kite, horses, or anything else they
would take care of all and just wanted me to join the
celebration at the community council fire area.
With all that I am not sure if I walked or was carried
but it was maybe part of each, but the yelling and
screaming was beyond imagination. The excitement was so
strong I could not have cut it with a sharp knife. I had
become an important man in this village and those that
could wanted to touch me, and all wanted me to speak. As
the noise grew I had less and less chance of slowing it
down, my voice had become too small, and I had shouted
so much I became horse and could barely speak above a
whisper. The food was everywhere and one thing I can say
about those Indians they knew how to cook and how to
celebrate. Before you knew it the camp became dark, and
we were still eating and celebrating, and I think my
shoulder would be days getting healed from all the pats I
received. They wanted to hear of my God of my father of
147
everything, and they were questions on questions that came
wanting to know more. I assured them I would offer a
morning prayer, and all were invited to attend and
assuming my voice had returned I would explain each
morning as much as they wanted to learn what I would
teach.
Joining Mary in our lodge that night I told her of my
fears that because I had been led into a flight, because I had
been spared from death, I had become a minister without
guidance, and it was a burden I was not sure I could follow.
These people are expecting me to give them information
that I do not have and tell them things I have not been told,
only those which I have experienced. How can I stand
before them and teach when I have not been trained to
teach. What if what I tell them is false? I did not leave home
to preach the gospel to the natives or anyone else I have
stepped into a roll I am not sure I am capable of filling.
When we leave here Mary, I would like them to think of
me as a friend not as a God. I do not want to tell lies or
stretch the truth at all.
Dan Mary said you do not have to lie you do not have
to make up things all you can do is tell the facts of what has
happened in our world what it was like to find a living spirit
that was helping you Mayone and Joseph are as real as
Shadow and Nuzzle we saw and we talked with them I have
148
saw what can only be described as beyond normal people
and what has been allowed to happen to us is not really
explainable to those of doubt but what is real can only be
understood by those that want to believe. Dan, you can only
tell what you know not what someone else wants to hear.
Tell them what you know to be true and those that doubt or
do not believe will have to follow their own spirit. Those
that look at the stars in the daytime cannot see them but
those who believe will know and will believe the stars are
there. Dan let us value the time we have with these people
and then we will move on and see what our destiny will
bring, let us not worry about the time now I believe it will
be solved for us. You have taught me to trust and be faithful
so now is that time and we together will wait and let our
creator do as he will. Mary, you are so good to me, and you
are right if we are to believe in a kite what is that to the
world? I will not doubt again but try to do as I feel is right
and tomorrow, we will tell what is true and what has
happened to us.
Mr. Daniel, Adam, David, Soloman Clark, another
thing that is important that you must know is that I am with
a child. I have within me the beginnings of Adam, your first
son. Mary, you drop this information on me like it is
incidental and not important, and it is the greatest news I
have ever heard in all my life. This is a gift so awesome
149
and wonderful I want to tell the world as if it were the first
child ever born. Well Mary said it is my first and yours too
so how many before only matters to others and we shall
enjoy this as a reward for our faith in our father in heaven.
After joining the villagers for breakfast, the next
morning, I could not hide my pride and joy that had been
foretold to me by Mary. Others thought I wanted to talk
about the flight, and it was the furthest thing in my mind. I
had never imagined being a father would be qualified to
handle this. I could not contain my feelings and pride. I told
everyone who would listen about Mary’s gift of seeing the
future and her telling me of my forthcoming sons and
daughters but even then, I did not fully understand the
impact it would have on me. My prayers this morning were
thanks and humbling stumbling mumblings of what was in
my mind. I was overcome with joy and incredible
worshiping feelings for the lord for this blessing. I could
not express words to tell of my excitement. I had more to
say than I was qualified to say. I found my mouth could not
find words to match what I felt in my heart.
150
CHAPTER SIX

LIFE IN THE
PAIUTE VILLAGE
151
As I thought about this, I realized I could not leave the
village as I had intended, I must stay and wait for the
delivery of my son. I must stay and allow those who knew
the ways of a woman and especially this first time was not
a choice I wanted to make. We would stay for the great
event, and I knew that it would be a daily thanks to my
father, which I wanted to shake his hand and personally tell
him thanks so without a doubt he would know my thanks
and I would continually let him know.
As I was speaking Mary walked up holding Miny and
I jumped up, taking the cat from her and asking her to sit
down and not be lifting or staining herself. Before Mary
could say anything, Little Fawn jumped up and stood right
in my face and told me without missing a beat that my son
would not be the first child born in the village and he would
certainly not be the last so accept that as a fact and know
that Mary was not going to deliver the child this afternoon
so back off and allow her to live. She did continue to say
that she would be counting the days when such a son would
join our village because she felt he would be greater than
the parents because he would have part of each and part of
the great creator.
The village was overjoyed with the excitement I had
created maybe it was the fact that I was so excited, but they
said they were wanting me to tell them more of my God
152
that allowed such great and wonderful things to happen.
Then Crazy Horse came forward and wanted to know more
about the eagle that I was feeding high in a nest. He wanted
to know if I had thought about the possibility of trying to
befriend this eagle. We talked about it, but we couldn’t stay
on the subject because others wanted to talk about the baby
then next would come someone wanting to talk about the
amazing Great Eagle’s flying around in the sky. Some
wanted to know about the possibilities of the next flight.
The cougars had joined us along with Mary and Shadow,
but the humor of the whole thing was here come Shadow
with Buster following and wanting attention also. It
appears everyone wanted part of our time to talk about
what their personal interests were and even the animals
could feel the excitement of the village to the point they
had to join us.
Look, I told them we have a lot of time to talk and
discuss the future. I started to tell them when at the last
second, I decided that I would have to continue this
discussion at another time.
Only those who have a real appreciation of God and
enjoy reading of blessings available to those who care can
understand that the story can only be told as it comes to the
writer. The spirit with in us can teach us the past and that
history can help us see the future so as Jesus taught us
153
patience, willingly, we will look forward to receiving
another book with Moe (bald Eagle) the three cougars, the
wolf, horses, mules, and now joining us will be Adam the
first born and other insights into the Clark family travels.
Verl K.
154

The Great Eagle Book One

Posted on November 22, 2025December 21, 2025 by Verl

If Great Eagle were to become a published book and as such the author was asked

to be at the book signing what appears to be an empty chair would be setting there.

The author of this book was God and as a member of his fan club I was asked to

put the words to go with the story. I accept all errors because the author never

makes mistakes and therefore, I most graciously accept them. Perhaps they were

not viewed properly, perhaps they were not mentally translated correctly but

regardless of the simplicity of the situation the story is not fiction in the mind of

the author, only in the mind of the reader.

The names were not changed and are actual people living at that time and told by

the author and retold with this publication. This is the first time of allowing history

to be told while it is happening and published over two hundred years later.

Hopefully the reader will find the true humor and accounting told in these pages.

With permission from the author, I will go out on a limb and foretell of several

more years of this history however I must educate you in the fact this is my first

attempt at publishing a story and at eighty years old I may have eyesight,

hindsight, or laziness to contend with.

Along with the author I whole heartly hope you find the reading of this story to be

as fulfilling as I did telling it.

Verl K.

2

PAGE 3 CHAPTER ONE ON A MOUNTAIN TOP

PAGE 15 CHAPTER TWO WILD INDIANS

PAGE 30 CHAPTER THREE INDIAN VILLAGE

PAGE 41 CHAPTER FOUR PREPARING FOR WAR

PAGE 61 CHAPTER FIVE THE PRINCESS

Note: A ground cloth was used under blankets and usually large enough to be folded over

bedding and was waterproof. It was held behind the saddle while traveling and held by leather

strips called piggin strings.

3

CHAPTER ONE

ON A MOUNTAIN TOP

4

One thing is for certain, I have time to think over how I came to be on top of this of

mountain around twelve thousand feet with a canvas ground cloth, bedding, piggin

strings, and a few other essentials necessary while climbing this mountain such as

water, and a little Elk jerky, ropes, and my trusty riffle which is a part of me. Just

in case I gather a few small limbs about as big as my arm for firewood on the way

up.

Looking over the edge when I get to the top, I can see past hell it is far

straight down. Surrounding me is only jagged rock in an area of about twenty feet

each way. I have pulled my ground cloth over me to try and keep the wind and

cold away and allow me a little warmth and what sleep is possible. It’s been a long

day and the travel has been hard and I am completely worn out. The ground is

bare, not a bush or shrub to protect me from the harsh winds. Looking around there

is nothing but a solid rock outcropping. With the ground cloth pulled over me it

allows me to be free of the cold and wind, but the wind is trying to lift the ground

cloth and blow it away. I can barely rase my head and all I want to do is lay it

down and get a little sleep.

Not sure if it is 1842, I think I just turned 18 years old but what year this is I

am not sure, but it is summer, and I just passed through a little burg called Denver

and was wanting to see what the Pacific Ocean looked like and figured I had

nothing but time and money which is what caused those trying to hang back and

follow me. My trusty horse Shadow is the only friend I have, and we have been on

the trail for several months and have had to fight strangers that had nothing on

earth of their own and wanted what was mine.

One thing pa had taught us young eons was how to shoot and not waste any

ammo. When we went into the woods for supper meat, we were expected to bring

back something to eat for every bullet we took. Dad never could figure out why we

should take more than three or four bullets with us as we could not carry that much

big game back. All this is going through my mind as I try to get below the edge of

a sharp crevice just to get out of the wind.

Anyway, those guys had followed me, and they just would not give up even

after my cutting their numbers down. They figured that with ten men they could do

what they wanted but I figured with twenty-five bullets they were short fifteen

men. Some people could not catch a possum with four dogs and two sacks.

I had allowed them to chase me up onto the top of this mountain I did not

want to kill any more of them than I had, and the wind was starting to annoy me

5

something terrible. I could not keep the edges of my ground cover down and over

me so I pulled a few branches I had carried up for a fire if and tied them along the

edge of my ground cloth using my pigging string I figuring by putting a foot

against the edge I could hold the bottom while getting a little rest. Then it felt so

much better I continued to tie the edge of the canvas all the way around with these

branches for better wind protection. Taking my hiking stick, I tied it from side to

side over me so it would hold the canvas off my face. After a little thought I tied

my rope from the top by my head to the to bottom below my feet allowing me to

lay my bed cloth on it and hold everything down. It felt better so I ran it three times

giving me more width to lay on. I had put my few possessions under the tarp and

placed them on the bedding over the rope for added weight which allowed me a

little rest without any effort. What this amounted to was a low tent or covering, and

it laid on me and the ropes held it down for me. I had not put the canvas under me

for fear I would need all the covering possible during any possible storm.

Before I go to sleep, I should say a little prayer which could not hurt in this

situation. Dear God, the only time you hear from me is when I am in trouble but

this time, I sure could use some help. I am on top of a mountain the enemy is

closing in on me and without a doubt they figure on killing me. I have done all I

can think of to avoid killing more of them but looks like I need some imagination

here that is way beyond me. If you could see your way clear to help me out once

again, I would mention your name next time I run into a real honest to goodness

sinner I will place myself in your hands and sleep knowing you are my strength

and guardian and following that I remember nothing having gone to sleep.

The wind came up in the night something horrible and I dreamed after

coming half-awake that I was sleeping on a cloud it was so comfortable. About

half awake I reached up to get my hat and it fell from my bag and when I reached

for it, I could not find it. I turned over to look and I was not on the mountain, I was

somewhere above nothing. The wind had picked up so strong that it had picked me

up and took me with it and I felt like a rag in a windstorm floating out over the

wild blue yonder. I was like a squirrel chased up a tree and somebody stole the

tree. The ground cloth had become a kite and I was hanging below it because I had

tied the rope from front to back to hold cover down now it was a place to lay on

below the kite. Thank God, I tied it three times to be wide enough to hold my

bedding now it is my seat for this kite. And the walking stick gave me something

over my head to hang onto.

This can’t be happening; what is going on? There is nothing between me and

the ground but God and Saint Marry. If I live through this there is no one on earth

6

going to believe this one sober or not. What kind of a fix have I gotten myself into

this time? Just blowing and floating from one place to another and no idea what to

do to change anything. Dear God, you must truly have a great imagination to place

me in heaven without being dead, yet. I know I am not to fear any evil, but this is

way past anything I have ever imagined or wanted. Watching the sun come up

from the same side of the mountain as the sun was never one of my great desires.

It is a good thing I left my old friend Shadow where she could get water and

plenty to eat if I live through this one, I will be a long time finding her again. The

only thing I ever had I could call my own and say I am the boss now I may have

lost her forever. Sure, is way up here though, God, are you watching me up here do

you know where I am? I Have sat around many campfires and heard some wild

stories but if I get that chance again would I dare tell this one? Heard stories of

lakes way up in the tops of the mountains but never meet a man who could stretch

the truth this far. If the wind stops, will I drop all at once or will I float till I run out

of beef jerky and just starve to death? Maybe pass and eagle and get a shot but then

how would I get to him? I wanted to see the ocean badly but would like to stand on

the bank not drop in from above.

I have noticed that when I lean over to look down from the right side I drift

to the right and when I lean to the left, I move that way. Makes me wonder how I

can lean to go lower. Wouldn’t it be something if I could control this thing and fly

over those guys who were looking to cook my goose? Bet it would not take over

one shot and rather I hit them or not they would run all directions if only to get

away from the smell of each other when they leave that mess in their pants. If it

weren’t for the fear of how I am going to end this day I would think this is exciting

and beautiful up here.

Wonder if I am closer to God up here, I bet I have got his attention on top of

this mountain. Dare not think any swear words up here he hears me, and I could be

in real trouble. For now, I think I will see if I can go around and around this

mountain till, I see those crooks looking for me. Get them on top of that mountain

and would be real fun to scare them right off the edge of that cliff. If I had known

that I would have been up here floating around I would have taken more time in

preparing things. Sure, would be nice if I had taken a rocking chair or even a swing

would be good. I could have talked Myrtle into a tumble if I had offered her a ride.

Oh! Sorry God, I got carried away there.

Leaning toward the mountain seems to be carrying me closer to it… WOOPS

what is this I am going straight up. Might have had something to do with being

7

next to that mountain. Maybe on the other side I will go up again will be

interesting to see. But not sure if I can handle the excitement again. Well, I am to

the back side OH damn! We are going down. Sure, was a ruff stop. Glad it did it

before we hit the ground. This makes me think of watching those birds when they

seem to just glide around and not flap their wings. I can go up again then next time

around the mountain I will rise and then not come back to the downside. That

happens how much time could I stay up here? Really, beats what I am afraid is

going to happen in the end of this trip.

Just laying here on my bedroll gives me time to think back to how I came to

be here. After studying how a picture was taken and developed, I sold a few cows

and bought a small building in downtown Boston and opened a

picture/photographic studio. I was making more money taking pictures than raising

cows and with a little profit I bought more stuff and not many understood the

process, so I did not have much competing on how the photos worked to force the

prices up. Friends came into the shop one day and after a few howdy dos and a cup

of coffee were offering to buy the studio for more money than I had ever seen.

Took ten seconds to decide I wanted to travel anyway, and this offered the excuse.

Finally deciding to travel west and see the ocean, I had went to the bank to

deposit the money and after a friendly greeting the banker Mr. Smith pulled me

into his office. And then setting down and waiting to see what an important man

who owned the bank had in mind even closing the door before speaking. Dan, he

said I have had several wanting to buy a small farm just like yours and I could

offer you a very good price. I can only imagine, after losing your father last month

and seeing your mother passed away last year you may want to take it easy for a

while, perhaps do something different for a change.

I had gotten the farm from my father who had gotten it from his father, so

the family had owned it for years and made it into a right profitable and pretty

healthy-looking property. After obtaining a top dollar for the farm, I took enough

cash to buy a mule and a few other camping items and had some cash to travel. So,

with Shadow the horse I had raised from a colt and a powerful mule they had told

me was named Buster which seemed to fit him. It didn’t take me only a couple of

days and I was on the road heading West. No sense waiting around just as well get

on the way no excuses left, and no one to explain my leaving to.

I guess by today’s standards I would be called a rich man but only if I didn’t

try to buy or do something stupid such as buying a bigger farm. Any way the gun

smith that sold me the new saddle holster for the Henry repeating rifle I had bought

8

with five boxes of shells recommended practicing till I was able to put six holes in

a plate at six hundred yards. I was always a good shot and great at hunting but was

told to keep practicing and with the friends help and good eyes I learned to take

wind age into account and now don’t bend over in front of me any closer than a

thousand yards and not expect to have to wipe two holes. I did buy a new pistol,

but I had been using that sense I was knee high to a grasshopper so I could get it

out and banging right along with the very best of them.

I had not paid much attention to those fellers that were watching when

buying all those groceries and getting ready to light out. When the first guy

stepped up beside me and offered to take all of my stuff off my hands, I didn’t have

to strain himself. I turned and took ahold of that man like a sack of spuds, and he

went down the town well like a rock searching for a hidey hole. Probably would

not have drowned if these others had wanted to stop the fight and turn him around

and heading the other way. They had decided to help bring him out of the well of

course after those two with broken arms, and one with busted nose and all that

blood helped make up their minds of course; that new pistol pointing at your nose

would have an influence also. I heard the one guys say something like undoing a

pocket watch and having the spring come lose when they started in on me. I must

admit when someone calls the dance, I’m always ready to play the music and name

the tune.

Turned out by the time the guy got out of the well his pants were dry but

didn’t matter in a casket. So, they felt they needed to teach me a lesson drowning

their friend, so they waited for me to cross the bridge leaving town and with seven

or eight men on horses one would expect they had the upper hand. Not sure, rather

that is what made me mad and vicious, or the nasty words used when telling me

my options to continue across the bridge. Once I get excited ever body gets excited

and being in my way takes more than a few people to slow things down. Putting a

spur into ole Shadows flanks after not being used to that she knocked two horses

over the edge before you could say I’ll be skinned alive. While they were looking

at their friends trying to learn how to fly, I went through the bunch like the clap in

a roadhouse Buster following right behind. I did not know for a few days the

bridge was eighty feet over the water and it was low water that year so the sudden

stop at the bottom is why two more of that lot meet their maker. Next time I see

those guys I’ll remind them to change their diets because what they were eating

was not good for their health.

I started West that day figuring on making twenty miles before setting up

camp, but Buster had different ideas. He was tied to my saddle horn and came

9

along behind us like a no wheeled wagon. Busters back legs just seemed to be

hooked to the ground he found every reason to slow me down he could. I think we

may be made five miles and they were hard earned miles. After unloading Shadow

and Buster, both had me tired as a 90-year-old man. Just got the fire going when

from behind me I heard a voice say may I come into your camp? As I turned

around and looked, the smile must have shown all the way out to that stranger

because he started laughing and said I guess that is a yes so here I come.

The guy stepped down from the biggest dog I had ever seen. I later found

out it was a Great Dane and it stood almost three feet high and when he stood

beside it, he wasn’t much taller than that dog. He stuck out his hand and said my

name is Trainor and what name do you go by he said. I am Daniel, Adam, David,

Soloman, Clark but you can call me Dan. Wow he said your mother must have

been a God-fearing woman to give you all that name. Well, she hoped I would

grow into one of them and didn’t know which so named me after all of them.

How did you come by with the Trainor handle? Well, he said I can train

anything on earth that eats food to do anything you want it to. Man, mister Trainor

you came to the right fire tonight I have a mule that has a hind leg problem they

lock up every time I try to make any head way. He assured me that he could train a

mule as easy as a woman because they were a lot alike, and he told me he would

tell me the woman first because she had a lot of the same charters as the mule

stubborn and the same as an elephant never one to forget so training one was

almost the same thing. Well, I told him I never had a woman but maybe if I did, I

would remember the lessons.

How much is this going to cost me, I wanted to know? Well as he poured a

cup of coffee out of my pot and as he sat back down and said one hundred dollars.

I could hire three men for a month for that I told him. Ya, however, you’re getting

two for the price of one and either one is worth more than three dummies. Can I be

learned then decide if it is worth the cost or not? Yes, he said I am so sure you will

agree to have that mule follow you without a trailing rope you will be glad to pay.

Let’s start with the women he says a real good way to start this training is to

use an example if you want to have chicken dinner with apple pie for desert on

Sunday afternoon and you were use to going fishing that day when she says she

wants you to attend church services the training is real hard but in order for her to

learn you have to bite your tongue and agree now she may come back with wanting

you to wear a stiff collar and that really makes the training hard but you must learn

to teach you have to be stern. You just go along with her, and she will learn that

10

she must have all the trimmings to go with the chicken. She’ll learn that to get you

to go along she must give in to your wishes. Keep this up and she will be trained.

The next real tuff lesson to be taught is even if she is so ugly, she could stop

a freight train going downhill running on frozen tracks you have to learn to tell her

how beautiful she is, and you must develop a tongue so smooth it will spread

peanut butter on a cockle bur. By the time you have her trained you will have to go

to bed expecting to lose five pounds every time. Training takes time and you may

have to buy a few extra dresses and maybe a new stove, but you can train em to go

along with your every wish. Just make them think that you wanted everything they

needed just so they think it is their idea. Just remember everything they ever

needed is exactly what you were intended on doing and they will stay trained for

ever but now one thing different than the mule is it takes a harder hand, and the

mule must be whipped on occasion and if you get confused and treat the woman as

the mule all that training will go out the window. It’s important with the woman to

learn that you are doing everything possible so much so that she couldn’t possibly

replace you with another man.

Now with the mule it is the same only a firmer hand when they hang back

you must inflect pain so that when not with you it hurts, and the reward is when

they are with you, they obtain water and food but when they hang back, they are

refused those good things just exactly opposite of the woman.

Once we start out in the morning I will stay back and when the mule resists

to follow, I will hit his back end with the tip of my whip, and he will catch up to

you like a fire on a tumble weed. Only takes a few times of correcting them and

they are quick in catching on and when they learn they stay learned you will not

have to attach a rope all you have to do is leave and they will follow. That’s why

the hundred dollars I will stick around till that mule is trained good.

We started out the next day early and had traveled ten miles by noon, so I

was enjoying the little fellow with the big dog. He stayed with me for two days and

had Buster two steps behind Shadow all day long. It was a real pleasure just

watching that mule stay in step. I’m going to miss that little man but he wanted to

pursue another trail so we separated that day, and I will always remember him.

I continued West making twenty to twenty-five miles a day and did not pass

many travelers and had pretty much got into a routine and the miles and days just

seemed to go by each other.

11

The next time I ran across those guys from back home I had completely forgotten

about them, and I had pulled up to the hitching post in front of a bar in a little town

in Kansas of just another name I knew not what. The sheriff’s office was next to

the bar and so I walked into see the sheriff who was setting with his feet up on the

desk looking at me and as I entered, he stood and said, β€œhello young fellow what

can I do for you?”

I explained I just traveled a long way and wanted to talk with somebody and

have a beer to wash the dust out. Well, he said I can talk to you, but you will have

to go next door to get the beer and when you go there, I would pay attention to

those two leaning on the bar I think they are waiting for someone and those outside

at the hitching post road into town with them so they must all be together. Never

been this far West before so I doubt, they are waiting for me, but I am not one to

avoid a fight if they are looking for one. You’re looking healthy Sherriff so things

must not be too bad in your world. Oh! We have a few drunks and a couple of

problems now and again but as a whole we have a right peace full town here and I

try to keep it that way. If you would care to step into the bar, I will be glad to buy

you a beer. Well son I would but it is a little early for me to drink and as to leaning

on the bar this stool fits my ass a lot better. All right Sherriff, it was enjoyable

visiting with you.

So, as I walked into the bar those two fellows having a cold beer and leaning

on the bar separated to allow me to join them with one on each side. I had noticed

while coming in those out front around the railing were loafing as if they had

nothing to do. As I stepped between those at the bar one of them said β€œwe do not

like the looks of you.” Don’t know what made me think of it but I ask them if they

knew the difference between a two-dollar and a twenty-dollar gal? No, he said; and

I told them it is way they dress; and you are just not use to us fifty-dollar dudes,

but they should have learned by looking that I was too rich for their pallets.

Some guys never learn much the older they get because the guy on my left

says, β€œbefore I rip down your shit house, I want you to know my name is John

Brown” as he went for his gun. I just threw my drink into the guy on the right’s

face and while holding John’s gun in his holster with my left while he tried to pull

it out, I shot the guy my right about belly high he dropped his gun and grabbed his

belly as he leaned down looking at the hole in his middle. Then as John broke free

from my grip and was bringing his barrel toward me, I just turned to him and gave

him two lead tickets to hell.

12

Turns out that while I was facing those in the bar room the others had started

an argument with the sheriff who had come out to see what caused the shooting.

Not stopping to count I figured perhaps five others were outside facing a gun held

by the Sheriff. But with all the yelling and scuffling around I knew the Sherriff

was in no danger. I just jumped on Shadow and found the road out of town before

he wanted to talk about the dead ones inside. I don’t doubt the local law would

straightened it all out shortly and there was no danger to him. Not wanting to spend

time explaining or any time in jail made my decision easy.

Meanwhile floating around up here in the sky, I did figure out that I could

turn on my belly and by putting my feet on both sides of my bed roll I was able to

sit up; of course, it was a little wild there for a second but after getting into position

I could lean forward and the whole thing would dive or go lower depending on

how forward I leaned. Reaching up and out I got a hold of the walking stick tied

from side to side overhead and by pulling I could move in that direction and using

the other hand I did the same thing over there and moved to the other direction.

Looking down was a real mouthful of adventure but once I got over the realization

of what had happened and started to really look the sun was just coming up and the

sight was breath taking the bright yellows from the sun, the quietness with only the

noise made of the air over the edges of my tarp. Looking down at the tops of the

green pine trees at the blue waters in the streams. I could see five or ten lakes with

deer, elk and even a couple of bears. The sides of the cliff had goats or mountain

sheep I couldn’t tell they were so far away but taking all into account was like I had

been blind and just opened my eyes for the first time and see what God had

created. I have no control over the sun coming up in the morning I can only watch,

and marvel and I find the same thing with God, and I like to share the same with

others. When I watch the sun come up, I know it will get brighter. When I watch it

go down, I know it will get darker. Thus, if I only get to watch one let it be

brighter.

Now I felt like I had a little control over this whole thing, and I got to

wondering if I could find those old boys that were hunting for me. It was a

beautiful day after the sun came up and all the clouds had disappeared during the

night with only one little bitty cloud in the sky and it seemed as though it was

hanging close to where I had been on top of the mountain. I leaned into the front

and pulled with my left arm, and we went down and over toward the mountain. As

I got close, I could see the top and it looked like five guys standing pointing a rifle

at me. OH! rats I had not thought that if I could see them, they could see me. I

could hear them talking just as plain as day with the still mountain air and being so

close and all. One said Jim get up here and let me lay my rifle on your shoulder so

13

I can use you for a rest for my gun. Tim, you get around behind me so you can see

where I shoot like a spotter.

I had nothing to hide behind and no way of avoiding getting shot so in my

mind I just accepted the finish was here and out of my mouth I just said dear father

please protect me from the lead I am about to receive. You would not believe it,

and neither would I had I not seen it right there in front of my eyes. A lightning

bolt from that little bitty cloud struck the top of that mountain and the gun the guy

was holding the rifle became a lightning rod and must have drawn the bolt right to

the gun. I don’t know how many jumped, but I am sure I saw one and maybe two

guys turn and just jump over the edge of that cliff. And about that same second a

wind picked me up and I must have gone up for a good two thousand feet almost in

the blink of an eye. There was not another cloud in the ski just that one and it just

kind of disappeared so I lay-ed back down on my bed and just sucked in the wind

that I had not even realized I had been holding.

Father, I have just seen a couple of miracles beyond anything I have ever

heard about, and I feel the presents of the holy Ghost in my very soul and having

limited knowledge and wisdom as to why this is taking place is not in my

understanding. But how can I explain what just happened? No one would believe

that why didn’t you just run them over with a herd of turtles. I could explain fast

turtles easier than that small cloud putting forth all that wind and lightning bolts.

Any doubt I had about making a safe landing has been taken away and I

now feel your protection and want to thank you for stepping in and helping me

when I have done nothing to bring your grace upon me. From this moment forward

I will try my best to do those things that I believe you would want me to do. Amen

Well, I guess I should find a place to put this kite down and a big meadow

would really look good now. I can fly past Shadow and get her to meet me there if

I can get close enough for her to hear me when I fly past. It feels right when I lean

forward a little and hold to the left for some reason it is almost like I just kind of

float toward the ground. Sure, is fun to look at all those pine trees from up here and

what a view. Wow this is beyond imagination and if I tell anyone they would not

believe me anyway. I can see Shadow now and she is out in the valley next to that

stream.

As I approach the meadow, I am reminded of Psalms 23 the lord is my

Shepard, I shall not want, he maketh me to lie down in green pastures, He leadeth

14

me beside still waters. Yea, though I sail through the valley with Shadow my

friend I will fear no failure, for thou art with me.

Here I am moving faster than I have ever heard anyone do I am flying like a

bird about to land on the ground, and I am to have no doubt I will do it. One thing I

have noticed is the wind has increased the closer I get to the ground. Even though I

have no knowledge of this I am smart enough to know the wind is part of why I

was up there in the first place. When I walk away from this would I do it again?

Thy wind and thy sail thus prepare a meadow before me in the presence of

my doubt. Thou anoint-est my head with wisdom my faith is doubtful. Surely

goodness and great landing shall follow all the way to the end, and I will dwell in

the house of the lord forever and remain in the faith.

Whoa! Boy slow down here. I will try to just stay above the ground as long

as I can, and it is slowing down the further I go. Should I have tried to land in the

water? Too late now, don’t think I can turn without upsetting the whole thing. Just

keep her going and going and here we go I am about to touch the ground, and this

is a little bit faster than I can run so I will try to stay up till I can go slower.

Oops she tried to take off and couldn’t do it, but it sure felt like it was going

to, but that sure took the speed out of things. I was so afraid that I pulled my feet

up and hit on my bedding which took most of the jarring and now I am sliding on

the bed. Got to try and get out from under this thing and see if all bones are still

OK and if no pain, I will say I did a good job. Such luck to have found a nice soft

meadow with lots of grass and a few rocks couldn’t have planned it any better.

15

CHAPTER TWO

MY FIRST ENCOUNTER WITH WILD INDIANS

16

While Dan was landing in the meadow those on top of the mountain were

piecing together just what had happened and talking together. Jim and Rabbit were

roasted like a piece of bacon on an open fire. Never saw the like of it they just

stood there and were cremated from that lightning and what a wild blast of noise

that was. Rick was blown over the edge when the wind came up and I am sure Ed

is not going to make it either, but we lost him because of a heart problem. We

started out with twelve and we are down to three thanks to Dan. Now let us be

honest, Tom says. He threw Pet down the well and he shot John and Sam and

forced the Wilson brothers to jump off the bridge but the others up there and the

lightning got the rest except for Ed, and we knew he had problems from the

beginning so we cannot blame Dan. Like hell I can’t he dangled that fortune in

front of my banker to the point he all but told me to go get it from him. We just

never expected him to up and take off that fast. If we had known in time we could

have gotten together and finished it before leaving town.

So, help me. I am going to make Dan pay for every one of those brothers and

cousins we lost before this is over; next time, I will not give him time to pray I will

blow him to hell the first chance I get, or my name is not Dusty Dramer. Jerry, it

was just as true for you, your family too, so you should feel the same way.

We have one advantage over him he does not know that we know he is heading

to see the ocean and so we can find him, and we will be ready this time. Butch you

are without a doubt the best shot here so we will get you in position next time and

at the same time we can get all three of us to shoot at the same time. That will give

us something to do while we hunt for the worthless nut, we can practice shooting

together on a signal so we all fire together and five hundred yards should be far

enough away we can get away from any who come after us.

After landing I had better get Shadow and get out of the middle of this

meadow before those fellows find me and who knows how many eyes watched me

come down? I have not ever thought about Indians I have been so worried about

those already looking for me. Shadow, get over here and quit running around like a

young colt in high clover. Ata Boy I was afraid of that silly thing floating down on

you would scare you and I am amazed that you hung around waiting for me after I

whistled.

Father, I have to say thankie to you dear lord for watching over this fool.

Sure, hope I did not jump from the pan into the fire and might have wished I had

stayed up on the top of that mountain. No thinking back at it those guys had me

treed like a mountain lion and nowhere to go. Makes me wonder how many of

17

those are left and if they are wanting to get even after losing all those friends.

Stand still Shadow let me get the rest of this stuff loaded so we can get out of here.

Buster you will get your turn move out of the way. Lucky for me it is such a

beautiful day for ending that experience.

Common Shadow let us move it and get out of this meadow and into the

trees as fast as possible and get those things we hid before going up on the

mountain. With Shadow and Buster following I left the meadow and went into the

pine trees where I had stored extra food, guns, and cooking utilities. Close to the

hollow stump where the items were hidden, I was picking up the pack saddle to

start loading and as I turned back to the mule, I see three Indians down on their

knees with their heads against the ground and they are all lined up shoulder to

shoulder towards me. Not wishing to show that I had not seen them I tried to

function as though I had seen them all the time. Something is wrong here. Why is

he bringing out the wife and young girl his child with him? Most would come out

and make sure it is safe first then if all is well bring them out but protect them is

always the way. Advancing to greet them seems important to do but how do I show

them am not a God which they obviously must think. All this flashes through my

mind in a heartbeat as I approach them.

How can this be? What is going on here? OH! I think I know they must have

saw me landing and figure I am a god are something close to it. How can I get

them off their knees and understand that I am not a god I have to understand that in

their world this is not normal. Well in mine it is not normal either, but they would

not go to this effort where I am from like bowing to a God.

Can you speak English I finally ask verbally after running every possibility

through my mind. The man raises his head, looks up, and shakes his head like what

are you saying? Thinking it over not being able to tell him what I am thinking I

turn the same direction as the Indian and get down on my knees and facing the

same way they are I bowed my head to the ground and copy’s what the Indian is

doing. The two females have not even moved from their position.

Raising my head while kneeling I take the guy’s arm above the elbow and

while getting to my feet gently pull the fellow up with me as I raise. Smiling and

pointing to the ladies I motion for them to stand. The guy is not as tall as my 6 foot

two inches, but he is close to six feet tall with long black hair and very dark brown

eyes which are looking directly into mine. The guy is very muscular and obviously

in exceptionally physical shape and is about my age of 18 years. He is waring

buckskin and so are the women. I put my fist against my own chest and say,

18

β€œDan.” The Indian pounds his chest and says Naaijawii. Smiling Dan repeats Jaw

and points to the guy. Understanding that Dan cannot say Naajjawii the Indian

smiles pounds his own chest and says Jaw. Then turning toward the older woman

who is about the same age he says, Dia Nanisundehaine. Wow Dan thinks this is

going to be tuff with names like this, so he says verbally, β€œSunshine” because to

his ear that is as close to what it sounded like, and he smiles at the woman. She

nodes her head and smiling says, β€œSunshine”. She is a very pretty gal with a shape

that would make one proud. Her buckskin bottoms are dress fashion with the top

shoulder to arms covered and are plain with a small design but clean and she has a

necklace about her shoulders with small pieces of wood and bone tied together

which are attractive.

Jaw then turns to the young woman and says, Baide which later I find means

Daughter, but think it is her name, so I repeat Baide and nod toward the gal who in

turns smiles and nods to me. Turning toward her mother Baide says Degenoni and

points to her mouth as she looks back at Dan. Shaking his head as to agreeing I

reach into the hollow log and pull out a pack with food items and cooking pots and

as I do, I hear Sunshine taking in her breath and jabbering away all excited. She is

pointing at the steel pots and is all excited and wanting to hold them which I hand

to her. Sunshine passes the first pan to her daughter and takes another one and

smiles and looks at it strangely. So, Dan reaches into the pack and brings out a

coffee pot with a lid and again both women are all excited and jabbering back and

forth looking at the pots and pans.

Jaw is making the motion for me to follow and points to the West. So as

quickly as possible I load Buster with all the stash and take ahold of Shadow

allowing Buster to follow him. After thirty minutes Jaw takes us back into the

forest till, we reach a small meadow with just a shallow spring of water and a small

fire pit dug into the ground which has rocks surrounding it. Looking around I

noticed a small shelter, it is made of an animal hide, and I can see bedding which

animal skins and is laying on what looks to be a buffalo hide. Logs had been pulled

up to the fire pit as places to set and several are used to hold food dishes and tree

bark with meat on them sticking out from under other animal skins to keep the

fly’s off.

Jaw points to a log that is pulled up to the fire pit and as he sits, he points,

and I set also. Pointing to his wife and again says DΓ­a Nanisundehaine what you

must assume is her name and again I try to focus on what it sounds like to my ear

so trying again to say it they all laugh. She turns and is getting something to eat so

19

I go to the pack on Shadow and get a can of peaches which they have no idea what

I have. I take my knife and open the lid which is noticed by those as a big deal.

Offering it to Sunshine she reaches in with her fingers and takes out a peach

and when it hits her lips the smile is a mile wide then I motion for her to lick her

fingers and she does and really smiles again the taste of sugar is without a doubt a

new taste for her. Turning to Jaw, she indicates to taste this and holds it toward

him, and he puts his fingers into the can and takes a peach, takes a bite, turns to the

daughter, and gives her a taste.

We have smiles and laughter all around and nothing is said that the other can

understand but we seem to have created a friendship without words. A big question

is in Jaws’ eyes, and he walks over to Shadow and acts as though he is afraid of

him points and says something and it is obvious, he wants to know about the horse,

and he must have never seen a horse in his life, or he wants to know something. I

have removed the saddle, and all the leather attachments from Shadow and have

allowed him to run free but we have been together so long I have no fear he will

stray no further than my voice. I didn’t understand what Jaw was referring to, so I

just went ahead with what I was doing.

It is clear that Jaw thinks of me as a god but without verbal communications

I cannot explain to him so I just let that part slide thinking it may be an advantage

later.

After a week of being together we have found a few words that have allowed

us to break the communication problem, but they are able to say my words easier

than I can theirs, but we are making head way after things like water, Shadow,

Dan, eat and other basic words. As the newly added words are understood the

faster, they seem to catch on and find other things to bring a better understanding

between us. I have shown them the kite and had shown how I built it trying to

make them understand that I am not a god but have learned of flying they are not

aware of. I allow them to continue to look at me as a God after all we do have God

in us. It has been told in the bible so accepting that is I wrong in a small way?

Have I sinned by some kind of injustice?

Without outward knowledge it came to me they had been calling me

Paleface not Dan, but it just seems as though it was a natural thing, so I just

skipped over the name. They had become such good friends that Jaw has even

offered me to sleep with Sunshine his woman and I tried to explain to him that in

my world we do not do this but not sure he understands because he is hurt when I

20

declines his offer. We have a different culture here I am thinking and don’t want to

hurt his feelings but if he is offering thinking I am a god then it would be double

damnation in my mind.

At first our languages were far apart and now they are coming to gather fast,

and the more time spent together just laying around eating and resting the easier it

becomes to do so. I had gotten to the point where I could explain that I could have

some enemies following and did not want them to be in danger because of it. They

in turn told me of their village and if I had understood them correctly it was two

moons away, which meant two months walking. Jaw has taught me how to shoot

the bow and he has developed a natural feeling for it and can hit anything I aim at.

I have also learned how to throw a knife and an ax right and what help that will be

in the future I have no idea, but it makes for a good sport and helps in friendly

competition. I have both a pistol and rifle but with limited powder I do not use

them often.

I want to continue to the ocean and find that is the direction to their village

and we are preparing to leave when on the morning of departure, we cannot find

Baide and yell and whistling but get no answer. With the warmer weather she has

taken to sleeping beside the tent not in the tent because she says she likes to look at

the stars at night. On checking her bed, we find it has been torn apart and not made

up as she usually does each day, so it appears she left in a hurry and not by her

choice. Looking closer I see a large boot print and it is not a moccasin as an Indian

would ware so following this I point it out to Jaw who immediately tells me there

were made early this morning and he turns and yells to Sunshine and together we

start to follow the path and find two other boot prints which tells us there are three

men and I am sure they are what is left of those that have been following me and

gave the troubles.

After looking at the boot marks Jaw had learned much, and I want him to

teach me how to read them like he does and to teach me all this information. He

has shown me that there are four horses and Flower is on a horse being led by one

of the riders. He says he can tell by the lighter weight of the horses’ shoe print.

Sunshine sets on a large rock as Jaw sets on a log a few feet from her.

Sunshine says if we do not find her, she is going to cut off her right arm because

she is in so much hurt, she feels this is for her daughter and Jaw says he is going to

cut off his man hood for the pain he feels at the loss but also, he says he will never

father another into this world if they are to be taken away. These are both in such

grief and misery that if I were not hurting beyond what I can express what can I

21

say? I have never heard of such personal destruction because of the loss of another

human being. While they follow the prints I returned to camp and saddle Shadow

and get my rifle and strap on my pistol which I had not been wearing lately.

Meanwhile the three that are left after the disaster on the mountain have

stopped to talk and get their breaths while heading up the trail with the Indian girl.

Not only will we teach Dan not to mess with us again we will enjoy the fruits of

this young maiden as only a true man can. We will all enjoy her company for a

while then after slitting her throat will find him and put him under a dirt blanket

forever.

I have not tried to take off this way with my kite, in fact my only time was

from on top of that mountain. I think that it would be faster and easier if I could

find them from the air and then let both of you know where they are, is what I said

to Jaw and Sunshine. If this works as I am thinking it will, this will be a day to

remember and one in which many future things can be made easier.

Dropping to one knee I place my hands together and ask Father to watch

over me and help with that which is new to me and especially important to the life

of Flower and please allow me to both ride my kite and lead me to those that have

captured her, Amen. For the first time I realized there is a wind blowing from the

West and it is blowing right up the valley where we are camped. I felt or just

somehow knew that if I were to go downhill, I would have the advantage of

running downhill and into the wind, which should help. I will have Shadow

running down the mountain and not up and the further downhill the higher I will be

if I only stayed on a flat trajectory. Sunshine had been cutting deer skins and

weaving me a rope which she had presented to me with immense pride and now I

will have the use of it.

Tying that rope, and the one I already had together gave me over two

hundred feet and hopefully it would be enough to get me into the air. This is a

crazy idea but one that has been in my mind for quite some time. I tie one end of

the rope to the saddle horn and place the kite as close to the trees at the top of the

meadow and bring Shadow in line so she can run straight down the meadow and

get as much distance as possible and hopefully not break my neck trying to get off

the ground thank God I had taken the time to teach Shadow to run slow and fast

because not realizing it she would have to go slow and tighten the rope and then

she must really turn it on to get me into the air or be drug to death. I guess the only

difference between a hero and a fool is in God’s hands.

22

OK! Shadow move away slowly, and as she does the rope tightens and when

she takes the slack out of the rope, I get the kite up on my shoulders and holding

the cross bar over my head I tell Shadow to run fast and she takes off like a heard

of stampeding buffalo. I took a few steps but have gained speed so fast I cannot

keep up, so I just sit in the seat that I have hanging from the cross bar. The kite is

swaying from side to side like it is going to hit the ground on one side then the

other, but it is raising so fast I can only hold on and thinking God help me here and

before I can say pop goes the weasel I am going up and looking down at the

meadow. I grab hold of the end of the rope and pull on the slip knot I have tied to

the bar on the front and as the rope falls away, I yell stop Shadow and even though

there is plenty of room left for her to run she stops, and I continue to climb.

I am over the trees looking down at the meadow and asking myself what

kind of a fool did I turn out to be? This is crazier than anything I could ever dream

about, and I have never been drunk but think that may be wiser than what I was

doing at this point. Wondering if I had a death wish or what but knowing I have to

turn this thing around and go up the mountain which causes me to focus my pea

brain to concentrate on the problem and not on the danger so leaning to the left and

pulling on the overhead bar I swing my weight to the left and the kite dips to the

left and turns I continue till I am looking up the mountain. I pull to the right and

follow the mountain ridge creating air lift and I am gaining height way above the

trees, so I follow the mountain ridge watching to see if I can see Jaw or Sunshine.

As it turns out I can see both Jaw and Sunshine and I begin to shout, and

they hear me and stop and look up and both are waving to me, so I wave back, and

we are tied together through a distant bonding on a joint goal. Looking up ahead I

can see the four horses and as Jaw had said I can see Flower tied on the last horse

following them up the mountain. There are three horses in front of Flower, and she

is on the last horse following them because she is being pulled by a rope. I turn

toward them and bring my rifle toward them, I am gaining fast so before they

know I am there I focus on the rider pulling Flower and he is only fifty yards in

front of me so putting the sights on the middle of his back I fire at a man for the

first time in my life and hope God will forgive me but as I watch he leans over to

his right side and falls out of the saddle. The other two heard the gun and then saw

their friend get shot and without slowing down continue as fast as possible leaving

Flower behind. Flower has now seen me and is scared I am a large bird about to

land on her as a vulture would. I can see the fear from the way she is riding while

laying low on the horse’s neck and watching the sky over her shoulder. Then she

finally realizes it is me and waves at me and just climbs down off the horse and

23

then goes to the other horse that had stopped and just stood there eating after the

rider fell off.

While she is waving at me the others that were leading her have also seen

me and they are expecting me to do the same to them which is exactly what I have

in mind but have not prepared myself a way to hold the kite, rifle, and load at the

same time. I will address this issue in the future but today I have set a milestone

beyond my imagination. Flower has gotten down off her horse and has both her

horse and that of the other fellow’s horse in hand and I wave letting her know her

mother is on her way. Thinking back on how I had taken off and flown was just

because I did it without thinking about it just up and the necessity of the situation

made it happen.

Watching Flower and not paying attention I took my eyes off what I was

doing and when I looked up and I was about to fly into a tall pine tree. Going up

the mountain had caused me to get closer to the ground faster than I had realized so

at the last moment I jumped to the right and the kite tipped to the right and my left

side hooked the top of the pine tree and jerked me toward the mountain and at the

same time the tree top breaks and the kite breaks free and continues on and as I

look up can see a rip in the outer edge of my kite. Pulling back to the middle is a

lot of work because I have to hang on my hands and pull up while the kite is

hanging to the right but with the adrenaline rush it happens so fast I leveled out and

have turned away from the mountain and now sailing directly away from the ridge

so I have gained height by just going away from the ridge and pulling to the right

a little bit turn more to the right and now I am heading back down the mountain

and every second I am going away from the mountain and higher and faster. The

excitement of flying along with the mental downer of having shot a man leads to a

melancholy sadness of which I had no experience dealing with, so I spent extra

time just gliding along not really seeing anything just trying to get my mind in

focus with the situation. Landing would be simpler than last time mostly because

of having done it before.

I went downhill past the meadow and turning I lined up with the stream now

heading uphill but had it on my left to not land in the water. I pulled myself

towards the front of the kite which put my weight on the front causing it to tilt

towards the ground and as I closed in on the meadow, I was going down, getting

closer to the meadow. The landing was smooth this time and as I touched the

ground, I just let the kite lay over on its side as I came to a stop. Thank you, Father

are the first words, out of my mouth and the first awareness of having flown again

and returned safely.

24

Back at the campsite after we had super over with, and we are enjoying a

cup of coffee which they had grown to love and was new to them. Funny how we

can learn to enjoy ourselves so fast and yet so slow to give up what we should not

be indulged in. Flower has gone to the robes after explaining the fear she had felt

when I came over her while she was on the horse. She said she was already scared

and knew what was coming in the rush to get her away from her family. Then she

saw the great big eagle coming over her and thought that she was about to die from

it before she saw it was me. Earlier tonight Flower was trying to express her thanks

to me in a way that hurts me mentally, but she is determined to thank me in the

only way she knows how and that is to take me to her robes and show how much

she loves what I have done. Flower, I say you are everything any man who has

eyes can see but I have a great spirit overlooking me as you and your people have,

and that great spirit has gave me life and guidance which allowed me to do what

was necessary to accomplish our returning you safely and punishing the those that

did it. The fact that I could not continue to follow the others was part of his plan,

but he also has taught me not to take you to the robes for my pleasure because you

are not my woman. Jaw also is trying to give me personal items he has and feels he

must show his feelings also. I tell them that Flower is my friend and I love her as a

father and as proud of her as can be but as Jaw would not take her to the robes I

would not for the same reason, and I told her that, when she tried to show her

thanks. Jaw jumped up and was just as excited as could be and declared he now

had a new name for me, and it would be remembered by all forever. You are as

Flower has said, Ah-Bat Kwinaa; From now on you will be known as the Great

Eagle.

I have not got the coffee hot by the time Jaw, Sunshine and Flower had

come to the fire with smiles that are on their faces makes anything I have done

justified and we join in a mutual hugging kissing and jumping up and down

dancing in friendship and joy as they spoke of when we saved Flower again they

just can’t stop talking about it and they loved to speak of the Great Eagle. Sunshine

insists that we celebrate again tonight and all day tomorrow before leaving on our

journey and before I could stop such an action preventing our leaving Jaw and

Flower was overly excited and let me know that was the most important thing to

celebrate, which included thanking the gods that had protected Flower and me.

Having been together continually for over a month now we packed our

things, and our communications were getting so we could almost tell each other

anything we wanted to, and the other would understand. The more we learned the

faster and the more we laughed at what we had thought something, or another had

meant. I learned the correct way of saying each of their names but by the time I

25

had down correctly it was almost impossible to change and use the correct ones

because the ones we were using seemed to fit so well. At first, having thought

Flowers name was Baide (which meant daughter) was of laughter shared by all.

The party was to be for two days which turned into more, but the happiness was

contagious, so we left as we lived enjoying each other and passing time as we

pleased. We had the camp work down to a routine with Sunshine doing all the

cooking after tasting mine we had no problem deciding I should gather wood and

help take care of the animals. Jaw took care of the hunting and care of the meat.

Akaishi in our language says Jaw but in yours it would be β€œSunflower”.

This is humors because I say Flower now, I must say Sunflower, but I will shorten

it to Flower if you don’t mind. That is permissible Kwinaa which by now I

understand means a large bird and ah-bat meaning great says Jaw. This is too much

information for me know I will continue to use Sunshine for her, and her daughter

shall be Flower and don’t try to change it now I tell him.

We talked as if to the ones left who were our enemies would return and try

to get even for all those lost friends. There was no way to answer that so we just

skipped and decided we would not be concerned until they tried again. No sense in

borrowing problems till they showed themselves. With three horses and a mule we

talked of how we would ride and decided Sunshine and Flower should ride

together because they were smaller and weighed less. We eventually agreed I

would ride Shadow and Jaw would ride the extra horse and Buster would follow

and then we changed to him to Bite (named for a habit he had) and he would be

last was to carry our foodstuff and camping gear we had not named him yet

officially and no one could find the proper name for him. I did find out that my

friends were Utes and had spent most of their lifetime around a great lake further to

the West of here. Jaw claimed it was full of salt and it was so strong that you could

float in it without sinking. That was hard to believe but many things we talked

about were strange not to mention the water that shot up out of the ground from

another area and Jaw said was too hot to bathe in.

We had found traveling together was a great advantage to all of us and each

night we just accepted our jobs and went right to them. I would take care of the

animals and see that they were unsaddled, backs checked for bruises or sores and

rub them down and hobble or tie to a rope corral which neither was necessary for

Shadow. Bite would not leave Shadow and Shadow would not leave me.

Flower would help gather wood for the fire and build the fire pit and lay out places

to set the food and gather around the fire pit. Sunshine would prepare the meals

26

and cook for us as it had been, and Jaw was busy preparing whatever was

necessary to comfort us. If it were possible to rain, he built a shelter, if not he

would prepare a place for our sleeping and anything else he felt would help our

lives.

One of the places we had stopped to take a breather and just kind of make

sure all packs on horses were in good shape and things like checking their shoes or

making sure there were no rocks, pebbles or stones between the shoe and the hoof.

Jaw had helped Flower in laying out the foodstuff and Flower was out gathering

wood for a fire that we decided was necessary so we could have a warm meal. As I

sat down by the fire Jaw looked over at me and said he had a few questions for me

he would like me to answer if I would. Yes, Jaw what is on your mind? Well, he

says Great Eagle you had confessed to me you had been up like a bird once before

in fact that is when I first saw you. So, you knew and had the experience, but you

said your god had done that for you to protect and get you out of harm’s way and

off the mountain top. Yes! That is a true story, Jaw. Well, when you were

following those men up the trail and you stopped and said you were going to fly

again how did you know you could? He went on to say that you said it like it was

a sure thing and that you would wave from the air when you found flower, but how

did you know for sure?

Pouring him a cup of coffee and waiting for Sunshine and Flower to join us I

told him I had faith in my Father and knew he would help me and with that faith I

just acted I did not have time to doubt, all that doubt was before while learning

about my God when it came right down to it I said a prayer and ask him to guide

and oversee my journey but it was important that I move forward in time and faith

both so I just knew he would provide the same as he has shown me to love Flower

and if I had doubt it was not in my love for Flower or God so I had no choice but to

move forward. Does that make sense to you Jaw? Without ever having went up in

this thing by yourself on a journey you had never tried and just went right out, and

did it? I explained to Jaw that those of us with our God in our hearts learn to trust

him in all ways and when we doubt, we have problems and I have learned to just

do it and let him have control and so by doing we have Flower and all is well, can

we ask for more? Great Eagle will our journey to my people be this way with no

enemies to fight or animals to get in the way? No, Jaw, we have no guarantees that

there will be no trials but if we just ask him to protect us, he gives us free will and

wants us to learn to be strong and trust in him.

We have a long way to go, and we will be able to discuss and learn each

other’s ways and languages and things which will bring us together in our wisdom

27

and knowledge. If I could teach you this Jaw it may help in returning the wisdom

you have gave to me in tracking animals, trapping them, preparing them for the

hide and meals I would feel we both have gained from our friendship. Watching

Flower as a young child turning into a woman is a reward alone. How old is she

Jaw? 12 summers he says, and she is ready to meet her own warrior and build her

own family and she has her eyes on you for a mate. Please accept my teachings and

experiences as a humble friend but know that I am not at this point ready to accept

a woman in my life but that I love her all though not as a wife but as a human of

great beauty and friend. Ah but this will not stop Sunshine from trying to bring a

woman into your lodge, she feels all men should have a woman to provide for the

necessities of a man it is breed in them to do this. I know Jaw is older than I had

thought.

Nightly they came to me with many questions, and we sat beside a small

stream one day and Jaw wanted to know why I felt I had to tie my rope between

two trees every night and walk from one end to the other several times. Then I

would have the rope tied to a tree or mountain and climb the rope. I explained to

him that I was building strength in my arms and climbing up a mountain with the

rope I was building leg muscles allowing me to be strong. I told him when I had

my kite in the air, I found I was hanging from the overhead bar a lot and needed

the strength to guide me while I stayed up there. He still looked at me as a god and

didn’t know why I would need this but as a friend he says he was amazed at how

long I could hand walk on the rope and to climb as I did was more than he could

  1. For me to chop wood to leave for others was acceptable to him but that I would

spend hours building muscles was not a way in their world they felt we get enough

exercise just doing what is necessary to survive.

I had an inner feeling that because I had gave this gift of flying it was for an

intended purpose and I wanted to be as prepared for it as possible the same with

my shooting I was a very good shot with my rifle, and I wanted to keep it that way

and I could hit anything I could see with my pistol within a reasonable distance. I

was using up most of my powder and trying to find saltpeter or niter to make gun

powder was among those things I keep watching for. I know it is made of

limestone and mostly found in soil and I believed I would know it when I saw it.

Charcoal should be easy to find or make. Then I need to find salt peter which is the

crap from a bat so finding a cave would be good. Being this far from a source of

powder was almost as bad as lack of salt or coffee but then we learned to adapt to

the situation.

28

We continue daily travailing 25 to 35 miles a day but sometimes much

slower. The first days of our trip were in the high Rocky Mountains and those

known trails were slow because of the high passes we had to go over, and some

had snow on them even though we were traveling in the heat of the summer.

Sunshine had turned into a fantastic cook and Flower did part of it still trying to get

me to accept her as a mate even though she never said a thing about it. I have been

wrestling with Jaw as much as possible wanting the necessary knowledge of his

fighting and to build necessary muscle for that should it become necessary. He

continued to tell me about his family in the large village and how we would learn

many things when with others of his tribe.

We have passed some high peaks and are now travailing over roweling hills

with more open and flat valleys and that has allowed us to make 50 miles a day if

we wanted it would be easy, but we are sometimes stopping early and bathing in

the rivers and lakes and just enjoying each other’s company. Sunshine has told Jaw

she thinks she is carrying his son, but it is too soon to know but she says she is sure

she is with child. We have become a family in many ways and Sunshine is

determined that when we reach, her people she is going to find me a woman. When

I was at home the women did the same thing, so it appears they feel a necessity to

be match makers rather they are Indian or white.

This morning Jaw showed me a mountain far in the distance that was named

Timpanogos and he told of an old story of an Indian maiden that went up on the

mountain to die and had lay-ed down with her head toward the South so when she

sat up, she would be looking toward the North in the days she will raise again.

When looking at that mountain you can see her hair flowing down the mountain

and her head and the rise of her breast and even her feet. It will be there for

eternity, and all will think of this fair maiden. Jaw says we could make it to their

village in two days were we to hurry.

We have been eating antelope, snake, deer, elk, partridge, quail, dove, ducks,

geese and more than I can speak of but the feast we have daily would make a king

jealous. Fishing is only a matter of putting a hook in the water and the fish will

fight to get to the hook. The water is so clear you can watch the fish when they hit

the bait. We find the bait by turning over logs and rocks and the small things that

are under them are great for fishing. Also are grass hopers which make wonderful

bait for fishing and will catch many kinds of fish.

The closer to the village the more Sunshine told me of all the friends and

relations who would make me a great helper in my lodge. She painted a very pretty

29

picture of those young gals and all they would do to help me in my adventure to

the great sea. I must admit she did have me interested in the possibilities of having

a woman to look after my every need and keep my bed warm.

I like to spend a little time looking out over this big valley and the large lake

we could see from the peak of the pass going into a great valley that stretched for

miles and miles as far as the eye could see. The other side of the lake was so far

away it was not possible to see but Jaw told me it was so this was not the great

waters I was looking to see. He told me again that the salt in this lake was so strong

you could float like a log on the water. He said when you get out you must go find

a clear stream and wash the salt off from your skin or it will crust and hurt. All

three of my family were persistent in travelling on to the village and we could

come back later and look as often as we wanted but right now, they were close to

home and family and wanting to see them. It is said that when you ride a horse

away from the barn, he is slow but when you return, and he figures out that you are

heading to the barn he is hard to slow down from running and this is so true with

my friends today. We are moving faster than we have ever traveled making it

obvious they are excited about returning to their home and families.

30

CHAPTER THREE

MY FIRST LARGE INDIAN VILLAGE

31

Normally we would meet outside of the village according to Jaw by

several scouts protecting the people, so something is strange we are entering

without these welcoming guards. As we entered the village, I noticed there

were very few children playing and not much activity for the size of the

village as described by Jaw. It seems kind of humble and quiet but there were

several who came to us with hugs and smiling but being able to speak their

language I understood as Sunshine asked where everyone was where were

her nieces and nephews? Not knowing for sure, I figured something bad must

have happened or she would have already introduced me to her family.

After much discussion and many tears, the head chief of the village

came forward and declared a holiday for the returning party and he ask that

the whole village prepare a great feast and a worthy introduction to the God

that Sunshine had brought to their village. I had thought I put that notion to

the side in our time together, but it appears she had only stopped saying it not

stopped believing it. Now that I had a basic knowledge of their language I

could speak and correct the misunderstanding.

Food was being prepared at every tepee and every woman was doing

something to make ready for the great celebration this evening. The warriors

were out hunting and gathering all the meat. The younger women had gone to

the forest to gather berries and wild onions to add to the special meal. I

counted twenty lodges but not all had family or people living in them, some

were standing empty. We had been gave a big lodge that was empty with a

very big fire pit inside and in front of this place for our personal use.

Being accepted and feeling safe I was allowed to wander throughout

the village, and most knew who I was and were friendly and when they found

I could speak their language seemed to break down any hidden worries on

their part. I saw women with fingers missing and one had cut the end of her

nose off showing to all her deep sorrow of a loved one. I did not understand

at the time of how these people showed their loss of family by selfdegradation Having lived in what I would have called a modern world or

white man’s world to hear them describe it. Having gained much knowledge

by spending time with the Ute family’s and saw the deep affection to not only

the family life but their belief in a deity was astonishing to me. Back home

we had preachers or minister but here they had medicine men, healers,

profiters, and students in training throughout the village and all believed and

32

accepted it as part of life. No one would question the truth from those of

command or position. Truth was a way of life and to not be the outcast by

speaking an untruth. Anything of importance to the village was brought

before a counsel and discussed but before any meeting what could be a prayer

was a part of the meeting never passed over.

I felt kind of like the third dog in a two-dog race as everyone had

something to do and all I could do was stand and stare at all the activities.

Even Flower was going in and out of lodges visiting and hugging friends and

family. Through all the turmoil knowing that the village had been attacked

several days prior to our returning and that the Iguassu (enemy) ((this is what

it sounded like to my ear)) had come in the early morning and killed many

and took those young ones and other valuables with them when they left. The

only ones they didn’t take were papooses left in the cribs and furs inside and

hidden from view because they would be hard to travel with. Many of the

strongest warriors were killed and why the enemy had left when they did no

one knew but they were sure they would be back.

While wondering through the village and past those with cooking fires

and children playing a young girl I called Tiney because she was so young

and small came up to me with a young dog in her arms and she was crying

and held the small puppy up to me indicating that I was to take it which I did

but upon gathering it to my bosom I saw it was not a dog but a wolf a grey

timber wolf.

The puppy had just been born by the looks of it and it must be hand fed

for it to live it was so small. The puppy nuzzled up to my chest and was

whimpering for something to eat. Tiney’s mother came to me and asked if I

would be so good as to take the puppy and what I did with it was up to me,

but she did not want her daughter to fall in love with something that could

later be a danger to her. So, I took the puppy and found a mother who was

giving milk and with her blessings agreed to give me the necessary milk.

Chief Yogi had told me he was happy that I had found favor with their

people and was preparing for a great feast and would allow me to speak to the

full tribe all together. Thinking it over should I try to explain I was not a god

but a mortal soul just as they were? To what good would it be? If they

thought of me as a god and I could give them hope would that not be better

33

than the truth? Is false hope a sure way to go or should I try to explain the

difference to them? I had a bible which I had turned to many a time when in

doubt as to my obligations to my fellow man and taking this with me I went

from the village and having told the chief I would return but that I had to

have time to pray to my father spirit and creator alone and I would return.

I found a small area protected by large rocks and trees with a small,

secluded stream that seemed like an exceptionally good spot to allow me to

address my fears and pray, asking for guidance as to what I should do.

Kneeling and holding my bible to my chest I ask God to come into my heart

and help me with my turmoil. My decision was very important to these

people and without a doubt would determine future events. I had named my

grey puppy nuzzle because of his first actions so I ask God to protect him and

help him grow to maturity. He stayed at my side all the time rather I was

praying, eating, or just visiting with friends.

As I spoke aloud and could hear my own words and I knew that the

truth was necessary or somewhere in the future I would have to explain the

lie and be accountable for it. Upon hearing my own words echo in my ears I

knew I had reached the right conclusion to the problem. Now I had to decide

how I would present this in such a way they could understand the truth and

still feel I could be a valuable visitor to help them in this future fight. As I

concentrated on the outcome, I realized that the fear I had was doubt and why

should I doubt the ability of God now? What has caused me to fear he would

leave me now? This is ridiculous in every way. Had he not brought me off

the very pinnacle of death when on that mountain? Had he not brought

lightning and death to those who threatened me? Why should I doubt him

now? I know from reading the letter or bible he left to me that he said he

would never leave me nor forsake me so with that I know I am in his hands

so thanks for showing me the light and the way to my question. Father,

hopefully the outcome that happens to this village and the part I play will be

with your blessings, and I thank you in advance. Amen

Jaw, I said as we met outside of the village where he had come looking for

me to let me know I was invited to speak to all the brothers and sisters of his tribe.

Upon hearing of my acceptance of speaking to the village I told Jaw I would like

him to be there when I spoke to translate any words that I they may not understand.

Also, I told him I would like him to somehow get me an area of about five feet

34

long, three feet wide and at least two feet high close to the fire pit so that I could

see everyone, and they would see me when I was speaking. He wanted to know if

it mattered what it was made of, I told him anything that would hold me up and not

come crashing down. He promised to have it ready when the time came. Also, I

asked him to find someone to watch over Nuzzle while I was busy with the

meeting, and he agreed and said he was surprised the puppy had been so

affectionate for a wild animal which I agreed with him.

After having shared a great meal all the villagers gathered at the Chief’s fire

pit and after the fire was blazing higher than normal the Chief spoke to all telling

them who I was and asking me to come forward, which I did.

I climbed up on these logs that Jaw had prepared for me and standing before

many strangers I started by telling them my true name. My full names are Daniel,

Adam, David, Solomon, Clark. But my Ute friends call me Great Eagle and I am

proud of that name. I have traveled over 12 moons to get here. Most of you have

never traveled over a full moon each way if that; and I have been over twelve

moons just getting here and the great creator has sent me to tell you that we can

overcome the Waa’e raid, and we would gather and find a strength that we had

forgotten we had. Together we are going to take back our children our sons and

daughters would be returned to us, and we again will be a great nation of Gods

children. I have traveled many moons to lead you in this, and together we will

again have health and happiness among us. I believe I have been sent to you to for

added strength and wisdom as we have become family in the few days together

understand that I feel my warmth in our friendship.

It has been spoken and whispered among you that I can fly like the great

birds in the sky, and I am here to tell you I am not a God but a man who has the

hand of God on his shoulder and I believe he has sent me to lead you to victory.

This will not be easy but working together and planning out our war path will

return us to this goal.

While Dan is speaking the enemy’s from back home have found the location

of this village and have prepared a shooting spot from which it will be 450 yards

and a bit higher in elevation which will add to the drop of the bullet that will take

Dan’s life. Dusty along with Butch have practiced shooting at 450 yards together

and are sure they can make the shot and get away before they can be caught.

Together they have went over and over the path from the shooting to the river and

rolled stones out of the way, cut necessary bushes that could hinder there sped in

getting to the river. From the spot they will shoot they only have to cross a small

35

meadow and pass the narrow corridor to the river which has very tall walls on each

side and the rushing river will allow them freedom from any pursuit. They will

leave the horses and jump into a canoe which they have built and prepared for their

escape.

As Dan is speaking Dusty is adjusting, testing the windage for the shooting

and with Dans elevation there is no way they can miss. Are you ready? On the

count of three shoot, one, two, three. And as performed, both guns fire and

everything goes according to the plane. Picking up rifles and jumping on the

waiting horses they leave and head for the river figuring on leaving the horses at

the riverbank to run or do as they please.

All eyes are on Dan as those in front see blood appear on each shoulder and

each near the heart but wide by a margin of less than an inch. Those in the rear of

the crowd hear the shots because they are close and know where it has come from

and turning immediately and running many are not stopping for a horse or

weapons, they take immediate action and running to where the shots were fired

from. Finding the spot takes less than two minutes to see and the horses having run

full out have left a trail a child could follow.

Following the trail, they find the horsemen running back and forth trying to

cross the meadow but upon entering the open area they had been overwhelmed

with turtles thousands and thousands of turtles all moving and causing the horses to

panic and fight any move forward. Both riders were taken without a shot being

fired or harm done to either side the men are so taken by the turtles they forgot in

the panic to think of the Ute behind them. Taken to the village they are

immediately deprived of all their clothing and put on their backs on the ground

with arms and legs spread, they are staked to the ground facing the sun and left for

a future they know not what.

Dan is taken to a nearby lodge where he is laid on bear skin robes and while

not awake, he is breathing, and the great spirit has blessed him to be alive. The

Villagers, although just moving from a much larger village, were blessed in having

one of the greatest and most experienced healers, Ata, come with them. The

woman who will oversees Dan’s health is a very large woman perhaps by a white

man’s scale would run over three hundred pounds but very educated in medicine

and she rapidly finds both holes in Dan are on both sides so the bullets has gone all

the way through and out the back leaving a larger hole when exciting. To stop the

blood, she heated a steel blade knife over the fire until it was bright red. Then laid

the red-hot knife to the wounds and burnt the skin after which she applied bear fat

36

to the burns. Dan moved and groaned even though he was not conscious at the time

which was good because she knew he was still alive. The smell from the burning

flesh was carried outside of the teepee where others spoke of it. Having stopped

blood loss immediately she made Dan comfortable as possible and made sure he

was warm by coving him with several blankets and has ask two young women to

strip to the skin and hug Dan from both sides to make sure he is warm. A third girl

sits waiting only in case one of the others needs to go for body calls or for any

other reason she is to take her place Dan is not to be without any need possible.

Nuzzle had climbed onto the bed with Dan and refused to leave. He crawled

below the covers and Ata drew them over to Dan and the girls but Nuzzle would

growl if Ata tried to remove him from the bed. Ata could see the wolf somehow

knew of Dans problem and would not be allowed to be moved away so she just

accepted him and said maybe little one your extra love will help him heal.

Chief Yogi has gathered all members of the tribe’s counsel and are deciding

what is to happen now. All have agreed the new member Great Eagle has power

and will aid the fight which is without a doubt coming. Runners are sent to other

villages telling of this and asking for warriors to help in the coming fight.

Many other Chiefs have gathered to decide if they should attack the enemy

or wait and prepare a fight at this place which has advantages because of lodges,

water, food, and all can participate in the fight giving many more available. The

worst part is having the old and injured being close to the fight and causing a

concern. The tribe takes exceptional care for the elderly and injured as part of their

heritage and customs.

All agree it is possible the enemy could wait to attack they had losses and

would have family’s morning even then it would seem impossible for them not to

want to punish the Ute for the loss they had received. Many other things determine

the resulting fight, mainly the ceremonies for the dead, then the rituals of those and

taking care of those injured and food for the return would have to be hunted and

prepared. So, it would be possible they would not return for one or two moons

which could give Dan time to recover and warriors from other areas to join them.

The pounding in my head became louder and louder till I could not think of

anything else. I had to force my eyes open with all the noise it was as much the

darkness haunting me as the noise pounding that caused me to force my eyelids to

open and the first thing, I saw was the biggest rear end I had ever saw this woman

was two axe handles across the ass. Her legs were the size of small trees. I had

37

never seen such a Hugh rear end except on a horse it made and it me think of

Shadow she was so large. She turned and saw my eyes were on her and she smiled

and asked if I was going to stay with them this time. What do you mean I ask, have

I been here before? She placed her hand on my forehead and said, β€œYes you have

been here, left and came again several times in the last days. Now that you are

awake maybe that puppy will allow us to feed him and leave your side. He runs out

very briefly to answer nature’s call then is back in a flash. Drinking little and

eating less he has been at your side continually.”

Just how many days have I been laying here? Well, I would have to think on

that but about two hands twice. What is your name, I ask? I am a healer and I

answer to many names and many think of me as just family so I am called Ata or

to some Ada, you can call me what you are comfortable with. I am told you are

called Great Eagle in our lodges is that what you want to answer to? That would be

fine Ada I am a little tired and feel like I am going back to sleep. Do you hurt

anywhere awfully bad I could give you more willow tea to ease the pain she says. I

am too tired to think ask me later.

The next time I came around I saw Jaw sitting to my side along with Nuzzle

and he had a cup of coffee in his hand for me. That is so nice of you it seems as

though I have not had a cup of coffee for days, I told him. That is true brother he

says you have not had much in many days, and we have been pounding the drums

bringing in the spirits to heal you. That’s what all that noise was I thought you

were trying to punish me for getting shot Jaw. Oh, you knew you were shot. Yes, I

said I felt the bullets tare into me just before I lost balance, and I knew nothing till

I saw the largest woman ever watching over me. She is the best in all the Ute

Nation and any who she helps is proud to say she did. That may be special, but

everybody knows the stores of those that wake up in a teepee injured with the

young woman helping is always beautiful and busty why didn’t I get one of those?

You did, in fact you had the two most prized in all our tribe at the same time. For

several days you had one on each side of you with nothing on and you were as you

were born. Damn God is this another of your corny jokes? What a guy wishes for

his whole life, and he is unable to enjoy it. Kind of like dying and coming back

with many beautiful gals and being without a root.

Well, if you feel like talking this much you must be feeling good. Everyone

in the village has been fasting and asking the great one for your return to us. You

must not speak so badly of Ata she has saved your life. No, I said she did not save

my life my God did that she made me more comfortable and gave me things that

would allow my body to heal faster, and she saw to my every need but in my heart,

38

I know my God saved me the same way I told you about up on the mountain.

Believe me Jaw if God wanted me, I would have joined him at the time of the

shooting.

Jaw we must consider that the enemy can attack at any time, and we must

work out a plan for our village to survive. What can you do lying in bed you can’t

even attack a small woman. I may not be physically able but there is nothing

wrong with my head and I know things that may help our brothers in this fight.

Perhaps Nuzzle will fight your fight for you. One thing I am certain of is my kite

must be ready to fly as it will be a very big factor in this coming fight. That may be

true Dan, but you are not a Chief and the counsel shall meet, and they will decide

what is to be. I will tell them of your concern and that you would like to be

involved in the planning process but that shall be according to Chief Yogi’s and

the councils wishes.

Perhaps Dan you do not understand we are a proud and very many people. I

have told you of the area of the lands of our people, but you must understand we

have sent out runners to other villages telling them of our loss and they will

respond as to all the families they will send warriors they will send food they will

not be pushed aside. The noise you hear is those of the great drums beating as our

hearts beat telling our stories to the great creator. We dance to the great bear dance;

the prayer dances the healing dance we dance night and day to the creator we live

according to what has been forever in our lands. We are not afraid of the enemies

that have come, we will bring in as many warriors as the grass in the meadow.

Those of us that lost family and friends will be joined, and we will show much

strength unknown to the others. As we speak the white man is wanting us to join

them in a treaty and they do so because we are strong, and they fear us. They think

we are dumb that we do not know, and they try to move us into one small area

where they can treat us like cattle in the fields.

Our village is much larger than when you went to the robes. When you look

about after being in this lodge you will be amazed at the number of lodges that

have been added to our village. When the enemy returns, he will find a strong and

mighty enemy to face. We hear your voice speaking of helping our brothers and

thank you for it and as all wise men before us we will hear your words, but we

have many voices with much experience in facing enemies of our people. We do

not fear those that came in the early morning without our knowledge, but it will not

happen again, we will be prepared. Tog’oiak (thank you) my brother for showing

what your heart is saying to us and we hear it.

39

What do you have in mind that can help us fight this enemy? Well, Jaw I

was thinking that if you were to help me build a kite that when looked upon in the

air would look like something an enemy feared would add to our strength and

cause them to be more afraid of attacking us. War cries and painted faces have

been your way of inciting fear in an enemy, but can you imagine if they were to

see a large black crow soaring over their heads before they were to attack? With

your help we could build something that would cause panic and fear in our enemy,

it would be something that would be told around the fire and many dances would

tell this story. Most are afraid of the Raven because of its dark color and because of

it being a scavenger so death is what others see when looking at a Raven so to

make this kite appear as close to the real thing will be strong medicine.

HEAR ME WHITE MAN! Jaw became a screaming, yelling violent

person who Dan did not recognize. You do not own the great one who you talk of.

You do not control him he does not appear just for you. Our people have known

him for generations, he has stood over us for years when we had no food, he stood

by us when we fought our enemies and when you were on the edge of life near the

time of walking with him. We beat drums bringing him to us for you. He heard us

and we told him of your brotherhood and everyone in our village told him we

needed him to help you. He did not save you just because you asked, he saved you

because we also told him our need. And we do not need you to put fear into our

enemy’s. We put fear in all who know us. We put fear in all who hear the name of

our great warriors. Our fathers, our fathers’ fathers and their fathers stood tall and

fought many enemies and today they remember and fear us as it should be.

Dan we would like to do as you say with the kite even our children laugh

and play games knowing the power you have and the god you serve but remember

we are a proud people, and we can fight together but understand we have trained

and fought for generations, and we train our young ones to fight from the time they

can stand to walk. You will be wise to hear the words of our leaders and learn

while you can.

Jaw I am sorry that I said it the way I did, and I am also sorry that you had to

put me in my place as an outsider and a new friend. Please let me know that you

will not think of me less than you have. Great Eagle no more shall be spoken of

this from now forward but always know we are a great nation with great warriors.

Know brother the white man came to our lands to kill our buffalo our elk,

our deer our food they did not consider they had been ours for hundreds of years

and we protected and hunted as we needed to eat. White man came to destroy, they

40

stole our yellow rock even though we did not need it they did not care that it was

not there’s for the taking. We protected our families and they thought of us as the

ignorant the dumb, the savages, we only saw them as thieves destroying and killing

anything from the earth. One day brother your lands will be stolen from you the

same way you steal from us. The great spirit remembers and punishes those who

tread on others. We fight for the strength and training of our young to get what

others have or to protect what is ours, but the great creator favors those that have

strength.

41

CHAPTER FOUR

THE VILLAGE PREPARES FOR WAR

42

What happens in the future is not ours to see Jaw, however we can make

today become what we want it to be by prayer and planning. After calming down

Jaw turned as Sunshine kneels to the side of Dan’s head and smiling down at him

says, β€œPerhaps my brother is well enough to drink something to nourish his body.”

Looking up Dan says, β€œI am so hungry I could eat the South end of a North bound

Skunk”. That is good she says it shows that Ata has been doing the right thing and

you are getting well, I am told she continues and that the muscles have no bad

color, and the skin is repairing. You should be able to eat something with meat in it

shortly. I will have those ladies that are lined up waiting to serve you prepare

something for you before the sun goes down. I will also be lucky to get it to you to

eat it with Nuzzle by my side he may take the meat in a big hurry he has been on a

fast for a long time for such a young puppy. I am surprised how well he is doing

with little food and no exercise he rarely leaves your side.

Ladies line up to serve me. Dan Says. Just what does that mean? Our village

is in great difficulties because of you Dan part of the village does not want a white

man having any say in our ways and others are wanting you to have much to say

and the young ladies want to show how much love they have for you. As you know

Sunshine, I will not take to my robes anyone I have not taken to be my woman and

if I were to think other ways in the shape, I am in I could not even hold their hands.

That will change very fast now that you are losing the spirit of the old one who has

left you and gaining the young one, we know who is making a visit to our home.

Perhaps you are well enough you could accept a visitor or two? Would you like me

to invite a few of those who admire your spirit? No Sunshine please allow me a

little more time and let me gain energy to show my thanks. Dan, I do not think I

can put Mary off any longer, she will not stop asking to see you. She is special but

must know of my weakness please tell her to wait for now.

After drinking the soup Dan can just remember Ata joining them and then he

goes to dream land again. The next Dan knew he was setting up and Ata was

handing him a bowl of meat floating in a liquid with onions and other herbs he did

not recognize. Taking a chunk of meat and putting it into his mouth he looked up at

Ata and says, β€œthis is very good and how is it that it is so tender?” Those that

would see you have been chewing it to make it easier for you to eat. It is our

custom to break down the part of the meat that is tough and allow it to be taken by

you later with pleasure. Dan thinks this over as he is taking another chunk of meat

trying to decide if he really wants to eat this or not. Must have gave in to the

hunger because it disappears slowly. If you can continue to devour the meat the

bear in, you shall gain, and the pigeon will be gone. That is if you can get some

43

away from Nuzzle. Your color is getting better, and I would have it that you should

start the day by getting out of this darkness and seeing the sunshine and the bright

world awaiting you outside. With your wishes I will have you taken to the firepit

outside and be made comfortable.

I think I would like that Ata it is so nice of you to offer, and I want to thank

you for all the things you have done for me to keep me in this world and if Nuzzle

could speak he would say his thank you also which brought a small bark from

Nuzzle just like he knew what was said.

Having been placed facing the small fire with the sunshine in his face Dan

feels the warmth of the fire and the friendship of all those joining him. He looks up

into the eyes of many young boys who are all smiles and clapping. Behind them

are many young ladies who are also giggling, and several have their hands together

like we would do in saying a prayer. The smiles are infectious, and the warmth

radiated as the sun would and Dans smile must take in a breath as he is over done

with love for these people. How can one feel so much love and affection so soon

after joining these people? Back home he never saw this anywhere of course he

was never shot back home, and this is a new experience and a wonderful way to

start the day. The children could hardly wait to hold Nuzzle and to pet him even

though he showed no anger toward any of them it was obvious that he would rather

be left alone.

As the day goes by Dan is joined by many warriors he had never saw before

and each wanted to say something or ask questions of Dan which made him aware

of the way each had felt toward his joining the village. It makes sense that

everyone would have questions and want to know more about their quest. Would

an Indian be accepted back home? I do not think so and outsiders would find

friendship rare in the city. What makes these people so warm and friendly when

only a few days or weeks ago I was a stranger and to them the word stranger means

enemy. Perhaps they are not as ignorant of the ways of the world as we are. Maybe

having less makes them appreciate having anything more valuable like family and

friends. Could it be we have much and don’t learn the things that are really

important? We teach reading, writing and arithmetic but not the basic fabric of

living and caring for each other perhaps that can only be taught at home.

The day ends and Dan is carried back into the teepee and as he looks around,

he feels the darkness is comfortable but not just the darkness it is the loss of having

those who were nearly taken away from him. Only a few weeks ago I believed I

was happy and enjoying life Dan thinks but now with the ability to look deeper

44

into the ways of those who had taken him into their life’s and shown him what

really is important perhaps he must take more time to smell the roses as it has been

said.

Day by day Dan is taken outside and allowed to enjoy the sunshine in the

company of friends and who have grown to become a part of his life and he looks

forward to each day and each meal is better and better. Dan is feed from a different

bowl with markings on it to identify the owner and let him know that he may say

or show favor to those that are bringing the meal. The young gals that set each

meal before him make special movements that allow him to see that they are

looking for championship and want his attention to be on them. It becomes harder

to show more gratitude to the one and then do it added for the next one. Dan finally

decides the best way is to just be yourself and not to put on any airs toward any

just be honest and don’t try to outdo himself each time. Mary and her brother John

stopped by and hardly ever missed a day. The days go by quickly and he learns the

village grew to over 200 teepees and many warriors and other Chiefs have joined

what was once a small village and now is growing more daily.

As his knowledge of the Ute Indians grew so did his ability to speak their

language and understand their customs that were every much a part of what made

them a great nation. Dans kite was known throughout the village and much of the

discussion was around it. During the conversations Dan had told of wanting to

have a thin cover made that was the shape of a large bird. When one looked up

from the ground it was to look like a large bird, one that brought fear and it should

fly as a large bird would. As he explained to the others how it was to be

constructed one of the men had suggested using bamboo for the outside edge to

hold it together because it was light and strong, and he was brought some bamboo

so he may see what it is. After looking at and holding it Dan found this to be a

great gift, an idea of much merit.

On one of the first mornings the outside fire pit Dan was joined by Jaw and

several other friends and family members and when possible, each would question

the other on the ways and customs. One of Dans first questions is what happened

to those that had shot him. Jaw explained in detail the fast retreat to safety they

expected and the massive number of turtles that had stopped the shooters from

escaping. How they had been tied to the ground, striped of all clothing, and gave to

the women of the village first and they stripped the skin from the chest and sides

then the men till blood ran free. Then the men made them pay with their lives and

the pain been prolonged for many days.

45

Dan explained to those that would listen that thousands of years before the

Ute had ever been on earth the ancestors of his people had found that by

constructing a cross bar above the ground and putting a man upon it with his feet

nailed to the standing bar and his hands nailed to the cross bar the victim could last

a week or more of intensive pain and suffering. Dan also explained that his God

had been placed on a cross such as this and had died there.

Many who were listening to this had questions and wanted to know more

about his God and why these people would do that and why if he were a mighty

God did, he allow it. The questions were on going and the crowd grew with a

hunger for information and every time Dan spoke on the subject, they had a greater

number of those that wanted to know more. It turned out that every morning Dan

had worshiped his God the crowd grew, and they ask more questions to the point it

became a ritual every morning as Dan was brought into the sunlight more and

more villagers joined them for this subject to be talked about. It grew to the point

that Dan decided he had to offer his teachings daily and at sunrise. Ata was still

preparing his meals and bathing him daily and putting him on his fur before going

to sleep at night. Durning the time around the fire Dan found a young gal that he

just could not keep their eyes off. He had gave her the name of Mary and she had a

brother he named John who had been visiting every day when he came outside.

John was three or four years younger than Mary. It was clear to all that Mary had

eyes for Dan but in his frail condition he would do no more than speak of it.

Dan had learned to speak the language well but found the names hard to

remember so he had decided long ago to do as the others did him and just give

them a name that he found matched what he might remember about them. He had

named Rowena, Sally, Sharon, Roberta, and Maureen and the names were the

same for the men he had James, Jim, Robert, David and many more that were his

friends from years before but some thing about this person reminded him of them

so he found naming them he could remember when and it also served to bring his

English Language in mind so he would not forget it. The villagers were excited

that he gave them these special names and stood in line hoping to be blessed with a

white man’s name. Part of the day was spent with those that wanted to learn how to

speak his language so that was a part of his daily habit of schooling as he thought

of it. Because of the schooling the time went by very fast for Dan.

It turned out that Sunshine had been encouraging the ladies to look to Dan

with favoritism as to him becoming their mate. She had also confined in Dan that

Alta had served Dan night and day and in return when his body would allow it, she

wished to be allowed to receive a child from Dan. He had explained to Sunshine

46

that was not a thing his god allowed without marring her. Sunshine had then

explained to Dan that this was a normal way of life for her and her people. That is

how the village grew and was by the strong warriors of other tribes giving life to

the young ladies of the village. Dan laughed and told Sunshine mating these young

gals reminded him of Christmas and he smiled as he sang β€œhere comes Santa

Clause”. He stated he would have to pray and ask for guidance on this because it

was not like it was adultery to give life to those wishing to have a child.

As Dan spent more and more time at the fire and was drawn into many

conversations he had not considered to think about because he had no idea such

behavior even existed. One day he was told of several Chief’s that wanted to speak

with him on his beliefs because the subject was obviously carried far, and wide to

other villages had questions and, they accepted him as a member of their village so

his understanding of both sides of the treaty’s being almost forced on them.

The next morning had been decided by all the Chief’s to a meeting. All

agreed on sunrise, and they would use the council’s area to allow for more

members and privacy. The word for treaty in the Utes Language was accepted as a

put down or a weakness of others. If not, it was not understood why would you ask

this if you were not afraid of us? The same was the word for stranger which was

just another word for enemy in their minds. Had Dan not dropped in from above he

would have found it hard to make friends as he had. Appearing as a God made

them think of him as a friend not a stranger and allow friendship as he had.

As the meeting started, all were setting on bear, buffalo, or wild animal

hides surrounding a fire pit whereby a small fire was continually feed with small

dry wood to keep it burning with minimum smoke. The area was so large the

women would walk behind the men to serve them. The meeting started by chief

Yogi lighting a pipe with an unknown substance in it and he drew on the pipe and

using the pipe as a pointer fist saying to the God of the North, then the God of the

East and he addressed each God in the same respect each time by drawing smoke

from the pipe then pointing to each direction. After completing this he passed the

pipe to the next who was also a Chief of another village, and this ceremony was

duplicated till all in attendance had shown their allegiance to the Gods of all points

of the compass. Then Chief Yogi told of how Dan had been found coming to them

from the sky and every detail told in every imaginable way and many Dan had

completely forgotten about, but every detail was spoken and explained completely

and any questions that were ask were either answered by the Chief Yogi or he

would ask Dan to explain. No one spoke out of turn, and no one spoke over a

normal tone. Chief Yogi had allowed time for silence as others thought of anything

47

that they wanted to know. Dan would not have been able to sit that long but

Maureen had gave Dan a present of a special chair with β€œDan” not Great Eagle on

it she had hand made for him in which he was able to set long hours without

getting overly tied. Where Dan had come from why he had chosen to land in the

land of the Utes was ask in many ways by most but always the same thing.

The meeting had gone on for hours and hours and Dan had lost track of time,

but he found it hard to hold his head up any longer and the others had noticed it

and had agreed to come back the next day to continue the questions. Even with

strong leadership shown among the Chief’s they continually showed reverence to

Dan in several ways, and he cold plainly see they respected him as much a God as

a man which surprised him. The first impression had certainly proved to be

effective in this situation.

Jaw and his brother Brut (big bruiser) picked up Dan and carried him to his

lodge without his ever knowing he had fallen asleep. The next morning when

waking to the smell of coffee as he opened his eyes Ata was smiling and handed

Dan a cup of coffee and a warm smile. You are so attentive to me Ata that I can’t

express how much you have helped me and how much I have depended on you.

Please sit down here for a minute and let me explain something to you.

Ata, Sunshine has told me of your wishes to have a baby by me and I want

to explain something to you about that. We have gotten very close with you

bathing and caring for my body sense I was shot and that is not a sin according to

my God because that is necessary well let’s say most of that is necessary the

personal touches not included. However as I have explained to you sense knowing

you that because of you large breast and loving nature I admit to the temptation

however I would have to go against everything my God has told me so you have to

know that even if he did not care that I was giving you a child which would add

strength to the village and allow you to use your special talent toward the child I

would be doing an unjust and unkind service to that child when I left him and

traveled to the great waters in the West. I would be leaving knowing I fathered a

child and then did not stay to care for him. That alone would be a sin in my eyes

and without a doubt my God would see it the same way. So, I want you to know I

can’t give you that wish because it would destroy our fiend ship and be against all

that has created me. Do you understand that Ata? Ata had been looking at the

ground and raised her head showing tears running down her cheeks, but she tipped

her head indicating that she knew.

48

After having a big breakfast and just settling back for another cup of coffee,

a tap on the leather door and Dan said, β€œEnter” and Jaw came in with Brut and

wanted to know if we were ready to go to the meeting. With one on each side, they

picked Dan up and carried him to the hutch provided for this gathering and placed

him at a spot that was obviously intended for him. All in attendance acknowledged

Dan with a head movement toward him but no one spoke other than Chief Yogi

who offered Tsao Tupuninna which to Dan was good morning. Dan had become so

familiar with the Shoshoni language he had to wonder if the Chief was speaking

English or Shoshoni. The Chief told him most of the questions today were

regarding Dans creator and others had wonders if the white man even felt there

was a creator. They felt that the fact that White men’s words were of little value to

them, and they seemed to want treaties only to find if they could deceive those who

agreed. The Chief went on to explain that they fought with cunning and wise ways,

but the white man had no rules they would kill any way they could using any

method they thought would destroy the enemy. If the white man had a God, why

would they do as they do?

Dan had to explain that the white man was so may more people than the

Utes every thought possible. White man has so many Chiefs there are Chiefs to the

Chiefs. The white man has so many that a treaty is important to those that say it to

the Indians but what they are promising may not be accepted by the Chief that

followed and even those signing it agreed and expected their own Chiefs to follow

that agreement, but it does not always happen, and the white man does not go to

the great creator as the Indians do. Some follow a God and live by those rules, but

many do not believe in a God and have no rules to follow. I personally speak to my

creator at least twice a day and sometimes more. Rarely do I start my day Dan said

without thanking the great one and asking him to guide me through the coming

day. Each Chief gave thanks to Dan for his wisdom and answering their questions

and among those were those that wanted to know what they could do to help him

with his coming flight on the great kite. During the meeting it was agreed that they

would do all possible to help and wanted to know how long before he could show

them his wings. Dan explained the strength necessary to fly the great kite and he

had to gain a lot of strength before he could do it again and could only say he

would when he could and leave it at that. He also explained that many men and

women were adding to the kite to make it look like a Raven so when they

completed those things, he would show the kite. Also, to be noted is the feet are

being made to fit his feet so when he is flying overhead it will look as the claws of

a great bird.

49

Chief Yogi held up his hand for silence and all responded in like manor; we

have brought this one called Great Eagle to be in our presence for several reasons

and we have all had our say and our questions answered by him, but I have one last

request before he leaves us today. Would you tell us why you are here in our land

and how you chose this place to be. Turning to Dan, he held his hand out for Dan

to speak. Let me explain by pointing out my travels to this place from where I

started. Where the sun rises in the East if you travel for many moons you will come

to a great water that called an ocean in my tongue. I was born and raised to a young

man in this land, and I wanted to see the great ocean that is said to be where the

sun sets in the evening so I left there with a horse and a mule and before leaving I

had gave everything I owned for white man’s money and when I did that others

saw that I had possessed much and they wanted it. They had twelve men who

gathered and agreed to take it from me. After following me for several moons they

confronted me, and I killed one of them by throwing him down a well which is a

deep hole dug to receive water and fighting several others I managed to get away.

They tried to stop me from leaving the area and I drove two of them off a bridge

with my horse. Several months later they met me in a white man’s town and two of

them confronted me and I managed to shoot them and again got away. After

leaving a large village I found they were still following me so trying to get away I

climbed the highest mountain I could see and hoping they would give up, which

they did not, they continued to follow me. I was like a mountain lion pushed up a

tree I was up on top of a mountain into the clouds. I had no shelter and no

protection from the weather. I covered over with a ground cloth and my God

brought forth the winds and while I was sleeping took me off that mountain and

away from my enemies. He did this the only way possible without taking my life

he floated me out in the clouds and above the trees, lakes and streams way up in

the sky. Once I was off that mountain, he brought lightning and struck several of

those chasing me and burnt them to ashes. Some were so frightened they jumped

off the top of that mountain to their deaths. There were three left and they found

me as I was traveling with my brother Jaw and his woman and daughter. They

came in during the night and took Flower Jaw’s daughter and ran. Not knowing

where they had went, I took the same kite that my God had gave to me and went

back up into the sky and could see those escaping with Flower and from the air I

shot one and allowed Flower to be free while those others ran as a coward, and we

were so busy taking Flower to safety we allowed the others to continue away. I did

not know where I was when I ended in the meadow with Jaw and his family it was

only because my God lead me to that location that I was allowed to be friends and

from there to now you know all there is to the story.

50

Dan continued with the fact that he felt God had led him to the Utes and

with his blessings he was allowed to speak and befriend each of you. I believe he

allowed them to shoot me so that I could make friend with the greatest healer of all

your people Ata. She has been at my side and done everything possible to bring me

through being shot twice and I should have been dead. I was spared for a reason

and for all I know it could be just to tell you of my all and powerful God or it could

be for what is to follow I do not know but I just trust that what saved me in the past

will guide me in the future. I want to thank each of you for allowing me to be a

part of your life and village. With your help I hope to again fly over the enemy and

put fear into their hearts to the point they leave, and we will try to lose no one of

our village. My friend the wolf at my side was a gift from a woman in your village

and he has been at my side sense.

Upon leaving the meeting Dan was carried to the open fire pit that was the

gathering of many friends. Mary and John were both there waiting for Dan and had

many questions for Dan. Ata came out and brought Dans breakfast and a large cup

of coffee which she knew he would like. Ata seemed to always know exactly what

Dan would need and want. It was humbling to Dan to have someone so attentive

and giving in every way. Ata was a big woman and as large as she was, she was

exceptionally pleasing to the eyes, and she filled out the front of her dress beyond

any others in the village. Mary held Dan’s attention because of her beauty and her

attention to Dan was noted by Ata without any verbal words.

Others came and took control of the gathering by discussing the building of

the kite and what was to be done to accomplish it. The kite had been built and was

over twelve feet wide and fifteen feet long. The outside edges had been held with

buck skin lacing tying the skins to the bamboo. This had all been accomplished fast

because of all those that helped. From the wings to the tail were the same skins but

on the underside the area between the wings and the tail had been darkened with

berries or something they found and used giving it the look as like a raven. Dan

had ask Jaw to teach him the call of the raven so he could imitate the sound which

he readily agreed to.

Everyone in the village was excited and on high expectations as to the flight

Dan was to accomplish. Dan had only been a few weeks since having been shot but

he was recovering faster than one could ever imagine. He wanted to get up and

walk explaining to Ata that his lower body was not damaged that he should be able

to walk, and she explained it was the hole body’s strength necessary to recover and

waking would take part of that energy which she felt was needed to speed full

recover, so she did not want him to even try to stand yet.

51

After the excitement of the kite was discussed, re discussed and talked about

by everyone possible the subject was finally changed to what had happened in the

meeting with all the Chiefs. No one in the village ever remembered having that

many great Chiefs attend a meeting let alone allowing a white man to be in

attendance. With that many Chiefs in the village at one time everyone wanted to

know if a major fight was about to begin. Why had they not told everyone of the

coming fight? Was there a great fight soon? What was going on that no one spoke

of?

Dan tried to explain that part of it was the fact that he wanted to fly this kite

and try to avoid any war or fighting if possible and he could not do anything until

he received his strength.

While setting by the fire and most all had gone back to their homes Dan was

snoozing awake and then asleep and during this slumber, he raised his eyes to see a

small boy about five years old standing in front of him he had he hands inside his

shirt from each side because the shirt was torn and had no pockets. The boy had his

head toward the ground, his eyes on his feet and Dan noticed the boy’s clothing not

only was torn but extremely dirty and he had on no shoes his pants were rags and

filthy.

Pehnaho Pihianneweh Dan address him as small boy and the boy looked up

at Dan and never shown any expression or gave no verbal answer, so Dan asks him

if he was hungry or in any pain. The boy then said that he was tired and hungry, he

had nowhere to sleep and no one to help him. Dan turned his eyes to another

woman standing at a little distance away and ask her if she would be so kind as to

go get Ata for him. Then turning back to the boy told him he would have someone

here who would find the boy some food. The boy told Dan that he had lost his

mother and dad when the noise and killing happened. He told Dan he wished his

mom would come back and help him he had no one that cared anymore.

You have come to me, Dan explained because you were drawn to me for a

reason and that reason is because I care and even though we just meet we will

become great friends and along with that friendship is caring. As he spoke Ata

walked up and Dan asked her if she would return with something that a small boy

would like to eat. Smiling Ata just smiled and with a nod of her head turned and

returned to their teepee. Turning back to the boy, he told him that everything was

going to be better and that he cared for and loved the boy. The boy looked up and

smiled for the first time and Dan patted the ground next to him and asked the boy if

he would please sit by him so they could speak together.

52

Dan explained that no one was ever alone, they always had the great creator

at their side, and would do as he had just now done, he had led the small boy to

Dan and that was just the start because together they could do wonders. Dan asks

what his name was, and the boy responded he did not know. Well Dan said

because you are the first friend today, he was going to name him Adam and from

this day forward he had a name he could be proud of, and the boy smiled and held

out his arms to be hugged, which Dan did. Ata came up at this moment and had a

dish of something she gave to the boy and a glass of water to go with it.

Adam took the dish and began to eat, and he was stuffing it into his mouth

so fast Dan told him slow down and explained no one would take it from him, and

he was to enjoy what was offered to him. While the boy was eating a man waked

up and said to Dan, I have been looking all over for this boy he wondered off and

we could not find him. He explained to Dan that the boy was simple-minded and

because he had lost his family it had made him this way. The man whose name was

unclear to Dan allowed Dan to offer him a new name from Dans lips which turned

out was wanted by everyone in the village. It appears that someone named with a

name from Dan was regarded as very special so most tried to receive one. Well

Sam, (giving him a new name) Dan says you seem to care for the boy and thank

you for sharing the story and because of the problem the boy was having Dan

asked that he be allowed to have him spend a few more minutes with Adam. Sam

smiled knowing the boy had received this special name and Sam repeated the name

saying Adam and smiling and saying it again making the boy look up as he knew

that was now his name. As Adam finished his meal and set the bowl down, he

stood and put his arms out for Dan to hug and with that hug Dan knew he had a

friend forever. Sam took the boy by the hand and told him let’s go home and the

boy turned and waved to Dan and off they went. Dan turned to Ata who was still

standing there and said it makes the heart warm to find a new friend and I hope it is

always that way.

Ata you are a healer why did you not want to help Adam? She told him they

were afraid of those who were not of a sound head. She pointed to her head and

made a circle with her finger showing his mind was not good. But if you can heal

the body he asks her, why can’t you heal the head. No, she said it is not to be the

creator created him that way, so it was to be. No, he told here that is not so he was

created as all but those who destroyed his family and Adam saw it happen had

caused a fear so strong in closed a widow in his head which could be opened if

helped. She did not agree but Dan went on to explain that his God did healing and

could make Adam right. She asks why he did not fix Adam if he knew how. He

tried to explain that he knew God and he would pray for Adam.

53

Dan was carried back to his home and on the way, he asks Jaw if he would

listen to him to make the sound of a Raven so that when he was in the air, he could

make that sound to add to the effect of the kite. Jaw laughed and said when you

come over like a big Raven you think that will matter? It sure can’t hurt Dan said

to Jaw. Jaw agreed to help him practice saying it was one of the easier sounds to do

so he knew Dan would learn fast you have ask before, so I know it’s important to

you.

The next morning, as before, Dan was placed at the fire pit, and many joined

him as happy jovial times were shared by many. Later that morning Adam showed

up at the gathering all dressed up and looked like he was clean as a baby duck.

Wow you look great Adam. Adam looked up at Sam his father and smiled, Sam

turned to Dan and told him that when he went home Adam had told Gwaii (Sam’s

wife) that Dan had spoken good things about Adam and he went to bed taking to

the great creator and when he got up he said that he had a dream and Daniel,

Adam, David, Soloman Clark had blessed him and he was going to be happy for

ever. How did he know my name, Sam Dan asks? He could have heard them at

first when Dan spoke to the village before being shot but Sam didn’t think he was

there but that was the only way possible. But when he got out of bed Adam spoke

of many things and he was a new boy and wanted to run down here to tell you how

happy he was but before he did, he wanted to bath in the river after refusing many

times before and put on the new clothes which he had refused to wear the day

before. Whatever that dream was he would not tell but he changed overnight, and

we are proud and happy for it to be.

Dan had to use a crutch and even then, had to be helped along, but was

insistent he be allowed to try he felt so much better. The crutch was crude but was

not expected to be used for that long so Dan didn’t want others to spend a lot of

work on some that would not be necessary. The pain or problem as explained by

Dan was not the standing, it was the weakness in the upper body from the two

shots that took place. I must build strength he said and get better fast because we

don’t know how much time we have before we are attacked again. Jaw said that he

was not worried because the village has grown so big that many would be

necessary to try to do them harm. Sense you have joined our village Dan we have

grown many times in size, and we have had an abundance of meat made available

and our people are healing and getting back to a normal life, and many think it is

because you have joined us.

Those that have been working on the Raven are wanting to show you what

has been done and wanting your approval if you would like to see it. Of course, I

54

would like to see it and the sooner the better. So, after giving praise to the great

creator and now many were saying God. The village enthusiasm was almost thick

enough to see everyone joining hands laughing dancing and some were pounding

drums others beating on hollow logs and yelling for others to join the celebration.

Dan was not sure why the village was so excited, but the excitement had his heart

beating, and he was enthused and didn’t know why.

People and cultures arrive at different times and different places. However,

without knowing each other a common thread is woven through time and distance

and without a doubt a supreme being is foretold in each society. Dan did not

understand what was happening, but he recognized the effect the great creator was

having with all in attendance tonight. It is easy to be humble when joining hands

and singing together and the words are not necessary to feel the meaning. The

beating of the drums, the laughter in the crowd, the pounding of the feet gave birth

to a multitude of spirits not of visible beings but of spiritual awareness that went on

for hours and hours. Dan was returned to his robes by new faces with big smiles

and gentle hands and the actual meaning of the dance and ceremony were unknown

to Dan, but he knew he had witnessed a sacred bear dance and it would remain in

his memory forever.

The next morning Mary and her brother John were among the first to join

Dan with his morning bible reading. Thankfully he knew the Shoshone language

(the language spoken by these people) well enough to translate as he read because

the crowd was so silent, he could hear the movements of the children in the arms of

the mothers suckling and even those were not fussing or causing any disturbance.

If those in the cities back home could see this and grasp the magnitude of these

people, to say they were uncivilized would have a better understanding. The whole

village had respect for the great creator, respect for each other and most of all a

united effort with the laws of the village. It was common knowledge that everyone

still had his personal right to many things but always they respected the rights of

others. Dan grew to understand more than just the spoken words of the language,

he found a profound energy generated in these people.

As time went on Dan was able to join the outside fire pit without assistance

from others though Nuzzle was there to lean on if needed. He was weak and could

not move without a walking crutch, he did show a marked improvement each day

and others were quick to speak of it. If Dan set down his walking stick Nuzzle was

quick to grab it and wait for Dan to retrieve it. Ata had gave Dan many warnings

and continual support but did allow him the opportunity of building the strength

necessary to overcoming his weakness. The faster he gained strength the more

55

others grew closer and understanding he would one day be gone had caused many

to draw closer and ask for more intermit questions. Mary had shown a favoritism to

Dan that was so strong Jaw had wanted to know if there were more going on

between them than he knew about. No Jaw but I find her easy to my eyes and find

myself thinking more and more of her. The longer I am with the village the harder

it will be to continue my journey to the ocean. Even Shadow has found friends he

spends much of the day with and if I don’t start spending more time with her, she

will forget the things I have taught her.

You have learned much, my friend Jaw told Dan one afternoon while sitting

by the stream. The voice of the Raven the Magpie the Coyote and the chipmunk

have become a second language for you. The kite training of Shadow to pull the

kite has continued by my hand as you have instructed me to do so I think the day

of flight is drawing near. Chief Yogi has allowed me to use the meadow daily and

we have many braves who attend each day and offer encouragement to those

helping prepare for that day. You will be remembered for generations to come after

you move those enemies from our lands with fear and no deaths to our people. Jay

let’s just hope the flight of the kite goes as it has in the past with no problems and I

am strong enough to handle the situation. Dan Mary has expressed worries and has

had many dreams of your flight and John, her brother has spoken of you as if you

were the great creator himself. Dan, he has replaced his father in his mind with you

and he will be at a great loss when you leave the village unless you were to take

him and Mary with you. What has made you say that currently Jaw? I have

watched you Dan and I know you have eyes for her so why would I not see more?

I have said nothing to you are anyone else. Dan there are things said with the eyes

that are not heard by the ear but felt in the heart and it would certainly be good for

you to have a woman to warm your blankets at night and prepare your meals and

John may even teach you something if you allow it. Ata would be hurt beyond

words should I do as you say Jaw. Allow the God you worship to move your heart

as necessary Great Eagle.

The closer to Dan’s flight the more excitement is created in the village and

the news has been carried to other villages and from those to more and like a secret

is has been kept by few. Dan continues to build muscles from swinging by robes

tied to the trees and he has been walking daily and swimming several times a

week. The more Dan works at it the more excitement is generated. Warriors have

made leggings for Dan to wear when in flight to make his feet look like the legs

and claws of an Eagle. Feathers to ware on his arms to hide them from below and

blend into the wings of the great bird. Dan has warned all to not approach the

56

enemy because he will find them from above and when he does, he will circle so

that all can know the location of the enemy’s village.

This morning is especially bright with sunshine and blue skies. The warmth

of the day is just starting to bring the birds to sing and the enthusiasm of all is

gaining in momentum as the day begins. John Mary’s brother runs up to Dan and is

panting and breathing hard he has excitement in his very being and is so trying to

tell Dan something, but his words come out so fast Dan must take him by both

shoulders and looking him in the eyes he says slow down John and speak to me so

that I can understand what you are saying. I went to your place of sleeping to talk

to you and I found Ata lying part way out of the door and in great pain. I rolled her

on to her back to speak but she was not fully aware of my presents, and I could not

get any sense out of her to know what happened.

Running back Dan finds Ata as John has described and as he kneels by her

side, he finds himself in a very un-familiar position and in his hurry and excitement

yells in tongues to the lord and with no outwards knowledge that no one

understands what he is saying. As he regains his composure, he asks for help in

putting her in the robes just in the doorway and he takes her hand in his and is

frantically looking for any signs of life. Ata Ata can you hear me Dan screams. Her

eyes open slowly, and she looks into Dan’s eyes, and she says Dan I love you so

much I can’t stand it seeing you leave our village and that you may be taking Mary

with you has caused me to take my own life. No Dan says this must not be Ata the

whole Ute nation not just this village, depends upon your blessings and healing. I

cannot heal others Dan when I have such a heavy heart. Ata we are all seeds in a

great wilderness and we each mature and grow for a purpose some never learn

what that purpose is, but you know, and you have allowed others to learn and grow

and for you to take away from those who love and admire you would be a greater

loss than many could bare, and I am one of those.

What did you eat and what did you do to cause this Ata? I have eat of a plant

that has the power of life and death and I have chosen death while drinking of it. I

have ask my God for your life and I will pray and continually fast and pray for

your return to us. Now I would ask you to drink of something else if you would

please. Dan turns in the immediate area and sees a slop jar with fowl and smelly

things in it and he turns to her, and she drinks it down. Immediately she starts to

empty her stomach and very violently gives away her insides to the world. Thank

you, Father Dan whispers to himself this should be a big step in the right direction

and if you will guide me and bring her back to her health, I will be forever grateful

57

and, in your debt, as if I weren’t already. Covering her with several robes he makes

her as comfortable as possible.

Standing and looking down at Ata Jaw takes ahold of Dans arm just above

the elbow and says Dan we have a problem please come away from here. As they

walk away Jaw explains to Dan that runners have brought word of the advancing

enemy of great numbers that have been moving toward our village. We have many

times more than we had ever thought possible and our Chief has ask that we meet

now and talk about defending our village.

When Dan arrives at the counsel fire there are many other Chief’s gathered

with Chief Yogi and they are in an excited state all wanting to speak at the same

time which is very unusual. As Dan enters all heads turn to him and they ask if he

can do anything to aid them. Runners have been sent all directions to and smoke

signals are in the ski as we speak telling of the coming war do you think you can

help us with the great kite at this time? A great gust of wind howls so loud it is

hard to hear. Dan says that will be my God telling us of his presents and with that

wind comes my faith in him that all will be as it should be. Please send word to

those in the meadow to prepare for my flight and as soon as we are finished here, I

will start our journey to our destiny.

As Chief Yogi I propose we allow the Great Eagle to show us the enemy’s

camp and we will rid the world of every one of them including the women and

children. We will repay the damage they have done to our people so be prepared to

act. Dan does not hear this because he is on his way to the meadow to prepare for

the flight after leaving instructions that Ata is not to be left alone and someone is to

be with her always giving her anything necessary for her recovery. Thinking it

over quickly Dan tells others standing there to find Mary and have her help Ata.

Upon arriving at meadow Dan finds Shadow with a new saddle and he looks

at it and asks Jaw where it came from. Jaw explains that the Utes have been

building saddles for generations the white man thought they were first and the only

ones. We have made saddles to allow our warriors to hang under the horse’s neck

and fight we have made saddles that weigh very little and does not burden the

horse so this one I built personally for this flight and the rope is tied securely to a

tree knot woven into the leather of the saddle giving it strength and little weight as

your saddle was very heavy.

As Dan prepared to get under the kite and into position to guide it, he

noticed that there were warriors on both sides with their war pony’s painted and

58

the warriors had fierce war paint on from foot to head. Not wanting to take the time

to learn why this was done at this time he didn’t spend time asking but thought it

was unusual in the least.

Having put on the leg trim with the Eagle claws and pulled on the arm

coverings Dan signaled he was ready to go and the warriors on each side took

ahold of the edge of the kite and as Dan yelled go to Shadow those on each side on

horses held the kite from tipping so take off was only a matter of hanging on.

Obviously, this whole thing had been studied and everything necessary to help was

done. The wind was blowing, and Jaw had even lined them up so that Shadow was

to run downhill into the wind which at the time Dan didn’t realize how much that

helped his take off.

Dan went up like he was tied to the sun and went air born so fast he was

amazed it was possible. As he turned to look back over his shoulder, he could see

all those below were waving and he could hear the screams and yells as he

continued to climb above the meadow. Not knowing which way, the enemy camp

was Dan just allowed the kite to gain altitude and he circled as he climbed. It was

an if this was his destiny and he was paying and talking to God continually as he

knew this would be spoken in all counsel’s wherever the Ute would assemble

regardless of the outcome.

The day could not have been better because there was not a cloud in the sky

and the visibility was as far as you can see. He looked back at the meadow and

those he could see looked like ants to him and he was thanking his father he had no

fear of falling and no doubt he would have a successful flight. Just watching the

hills and valleys smoke would be a tale to tell of the village he wanted to find. He

had seemed to have been up for hours and had gotten so high he had problems

breathing, the air was so thin. He thought of the fable of the man flying so close to

the sun the wax in his wings melted.

Dan could not get Ata off his mind what would happen if she were to die?

What would he do if he knew it was his fault that she wanted to take her own life?

The more Dan thought of this the more questions came to mind, and he finally

decided he must get his mind back on the issue facing him not behind him.

Dan guessed he could see for fifty miles or more and no sign of smoke or

any villages, so he was getting depressed, and worries started off what if he never

found them? What if and he caught himself as he finally determined that God

would provide what ever happened so forget all the junk and stay with the present.

59

Watching for anything to show him a sign his eyes were beginning to water,

and he was having trouble focusing on the horizon as he must. Dan was traveling

from one mountain to another and wondering how they could hide a full village.

Finally, just barely visible he sees a light haze in the far distance and as he glides

toward it realizes that it is the smoke he has been hoping to see. It is miles away

from the meadow and further than those on the ground would be able to travel in

hours. Dan circled and circled as was agreed when making the plans with Chief

Yogi so after many times around Dan pulled himself forward bringing the front of

the kite lower and causing it to dive toward the ground.

Dan came over the village with such speed that he barely had time to give

the scream of the Raven Kraah Brronk Prruk over and over Dans yells. climbing

beyond the village Dan climbed and then turned and made another dive toward the

center of the village where complete chaos was taking place. Dan realizes how

important choosing the raven was because these people are totally petrified by it.

Women were chasing children; dogs were barking men were on their knees

without a doubt praying. The horses pulled free of the restraints and were running

through the village knocking over teepees and kicking anything possible.

Campfires were being torn apart Dan was so close to the ground and almost flew

into a tall tree when he figured out, he was watching them more than he should and

had to pay attention to what was happening with the kite.

Knowing he had torn the village into complete ruin he turned to the lower

end of the valley and allowed his flight to gain height and was heading back to the

meadow which he knew was several mountains East of where he was, but the wind

was perfect and the time to return went past as the blink of an eye. Dan came over

to the valley and turned just like he had done this hundreds of times over and, he

really had done very few times.

When the kite came toward the meadow and was just off the ground many

people were right there to take ahold of the wings and help him stop gracefully.

Cheering and screaming was beyond imagination. Those who were there to help

were all smiles and graduations and the children were jumping up and down, all

was excited, and Dan could say nothing that could be heard above all the noise.

Dan could not walk back to the village, he was taken on the shoulders and

carried by so many that he felt beholding to them. Upon getting to the village

Nuzzle was first to be at his side pushing all out of the way getting to Dan and

jumping into his arms. Mary and John were on each side congratulating and

60

pounding on his back. Mary wanted to tell of Ata but with all the noise found it

impossible.

Food was everywhere and anything Dan wanted was brought to him without

hesitation. It was very humbling to be treated like this and he was not sure how he

should act toward it. How does one give thanks to those thanking him? After a few

minutes of dwelling on it, Dan dropped to his knees and gave thanks to the one he

knew allowed this to happen. It was not until the next day that he learned that when

the warriors got to the village it was empty except for all that had been taken from

the Utes when they were raided, many were left in cradle baskets and blankets

waiting for them. No sign of another man’s dog or horse, except the horses that had

been stolen, all the village had been left and all had just disappeared. No slaughter

happened because there was no one to challenge them, those that were left behind

were put on horses that could ride and those small ones were gathered and carried

home to be united with their families.

Dan’s flight had scared the enemy so badly they had picked up and left

everything and just scattered into the forest leaving all behind. It would be many

years before the enemy would try to attack that village again. Dan had become a

legend and the Great Eagle would be known far and wide after the story was told.

Ata? gained back her strength both health and mental and was thought of as

a hero for her attending to Dan. His chair was left at the fire pit with his name

β€œDan” on the back to remind all of his presence not just his legion of Great Eagle

but his personal character. Great Eagle would be told in song and dances for years

to come. The flight of the Crow was unimaginable of all that had been told of the

story because the crow was known to be a bird of wisdom and the black wings

were told to be death so choosing the crow was a symbol of both wisdom and

death. The fact that the enemy had left the village and left behind everything that

had been taken from the previous raid was proof to the Utes that the great creator

had granted their people much power and strength.

Every nation of Indians though out the Rocky Mountains told the story of

the great flight of the crow and as the story was told the Great Eagle became a

legend of such magnitude that most did indeed believed Dan to be a God on this

world. Dans travels to the Pacific Ocean would be told and retold to the point that

he had no fear of any enemy’s because they looked at him as a true God.

61

CHAPTER FIVE

FINDING THE PRINCESS

62

As the celebrations were slowing down and the days of honor and

humbling’s were shared and shown to all Dan was preparing for his departure from

the village and love of seeing the Pacific Ocean. He was playing with Nuzzle one

morning and as always training him in one thing or another. He had his friend a

growing wolf set up, staying on command, fetching things and he could hide

something and later just with hand commands have Nuzzle go find it watching

over his shoulder to see which way he should turn to go on the object. Dan had

even tied his hands together both in front and behind him and trained him to get

them undone without voice commands.

As he had been working the last few days, knowing he would be leaving,

Mary showed up each morning and asked Dan this or that and if he was going to

leave and not stop and say goodbye and she had a small tear in her eyes as she

spoke. Turning to her, Dan said we have grown very close, and I have often

thought of what it would be like if I were to ask you to join me but there are

several reasons that I held back.

Please tell me why you did not want me to be your partner in your future

life. Dan explained that the older he got the closer he became to his own creator,

and he did not know if she would accept his ways and give up her creator because

his God was a jealous God and Dan felt he needed to serve him only and was Mary

willing to join that belief? Why did you not give me the chance to tell you of my

own feelings on the subject Dan, I feel as though you did not want me for other

reasons.

What other reasons could I possibly have to not want you to join me, Mary?

Do you find me attractive? Yes of course, Dan said. Do you find me desirable to

join you in the robes at night? I can hardly think of anything else that would be

more pleasing to me and I dwell on that so much it is hard to full fill my

obligations to myself. All the time they were speaking Nuzzle was jumping up on

Mary’s legs trying for the attention. Looking down Dan said even Nuzzle has lost

tract of his master and turns to you for attention. Do you not care for the meals I

prepare for you? Yes, you seem to know exactly what I like and how to prepare it

for me. Mary said I am wondering what your God did to get your attention I have

not tried to carry out. Maybe she said I should push you off a high mountain and

see if the sudden stop would jar your head enough to see me Mary said.

Maybe Mary, it was just that I was afraid to ask for fear you would deny me,

and I would lose your friendship. What is friendship if you are not willing to share

your life with me Dan? Does your God not want you to be happy? No, Dan said

63

the Lord said he came to allow us to have a full life. Could you have a full life by

yourself with only Nuzzle to be by your side? I think it would work out if I were to

explain a few basic facts that would be necessary for us to join as one Mary.

Finally, after moons of being together and much time spent sharing

memories and being together, you are prepared to not continue our speaking

together. It should be a tall mountain to bring your memory to your eyes. Or all

white men ruddled with false values? What do you mean Mary? Ever sense the

first time I saw you I wanted to share your robes even after I felt you may pass on

to the next world, I was hoping for your recovery so we could get on with our lives

together. I felt the same way about you Mary, but we are from a different people

with a different lifestyle, and I have nothing to offer you that a woman could want.

What do you think a woman would want? Here you are just a young man who has

never had a woman that you have spoken of and yet you know what is necessary to

make one happy. I think Dan I could convince your God to give me a chance easier

than I can you.

Mary, I have said the wrong things and have not shared my deep thoughts

with you as I should have, and I am sorry I have been so slow in seeing what I

really need and want out of life. Please forgive me and from this day till we pass to

the other side I will promise to voice my ideas and share my thoughts. If you agree

we will speak with Chief Yogi and ask if he will unite us as one before our

departure. I would like us to be as one forever and ever.

Together they went to the Chiefs lodge and as they stepped in front of the

opening the Chief came out and with a big smile welcomed them to his lodge.

β€œWhat can I do for the two of you so that you can humble me with your presents,

he asks.” We would like to be joined as one Mary said. Well, it’s about time that is

what everyone in the village saw and hoped it would come to be. It took a tall and

big mountain to fall on me to open my eyes chief. A strong horse usually takes

more time to tame, the chief said. Notice he did not say a wise horse Dan said

under his breath.

The chief asks when they would like this occasion to happen. Turning to

each other, both spoke at the same time. Now they spoke in unity and boisterous

laughter followed by all three. I will prepare for this special occasion right now if

you will allow me to leave you. Great Eagle you must be prepared for this special

occasion, and you must know that to join with a princess of our nation has several

obligations that maybe you had not heard of.

64

In my mind my mate is a princess but what do you mean Chief when you

talk of her being a princess? Perhaps Nadeweide has not spoken of the heritage

with our people. Her father was the Chief of our Nation while I was a small boy

and I learned much from him. And her mother was the daughter of a great Chief of

our nation, so she is to be a great influence in our village and many other villages.

She did not tell me of this. For you to join lives with her you must fast for four

days and be in a sweat house for two days and spend one day praying to the great

creator. So, you have seven days of preparations not counting that while you are

preparing for this very special princess our leaders will have to admit you to our

councils, which in your situation will be granted for sure. So, allow me to start

those preparations. You must know Great Eagle that when you unite with a

princess you take on obligations as a leader. It takes a strong warrior to wed such a

great princess.

Dan made a great bend at the waste and throwing out his arm toward the

village said continue. With smiles from all Mary and Dan left to return to Dans

lodge along with Nuzzle that had not left their side all this time.

Mary, you did not tell me about your father or mother, why is that? Would

that have made you want me more? No of course not. Well then why would I

spend moments telling of something that was not important to our future? Our

children will know, and our children’s children will know, but for us we shall be as

one and my past is not going to have mattered. I must find Jaw and learn of these

things I am to do for I must get started as soon as possible for me to find my

happiness and our future together.

Jaw why did you not tell me of the importance of Mary and her family? Dan

you must know that when we came here you did not know her, and we had other

things much more important and as you had eyes for her it did not seem that I

should tell someone of your statue of another with great statue it just kind of fit

together like the sun and warmth. You both came together like it was not of this

world but created by another from above. Everyone in the village was hoping and

praying that the two would become one because who else would be strong enough

to ask for her? Great Eagle some things are just meant to be, and we should not

question what is meant to be.

We will have to go down by the creek and build a small shelter that we can

cover with mud and protect from the cold outside. I will show you how it is to be

done and it will have to be big enough to hold several who will want to join you in

this venture. I can have others help and you can go to the high hills and tell your

65

own creator and talk with him and ask for his leadership in guiding you and Mary

to your future lives together. You must spend from sunrise to sunset searching for

your God. That is not a problem for me as you know Jaw, I spend many hours

searching and talking with my God so this will be according to your customs.

The very next morning Dan took Nuzzle who went every morning with him

anyway, in fact it was a challenge to avoid taking him, so he was just a part of the

daily prayers. After climbing to the top of a mountain just West of the village Dan

got down on his knees and looking at the sky began his devotion to his father and

told of his surprise and ask for his blessings. Dan had begun his fast this morning

and would continue it as long as necessary to full fill his obligations but without a

doubt would be coming back for more prayer after the cleaning in the hot house

and before joining Mary for the wedding.

Let me tell of his words as they came from him: Dear Father you know all

you created all you know where my bones will lay you know when I started this

journey where I would end. Because you know and gave me free will to find my

travels, I would like to thank you for that which you have taken from me to make

me see the greater gifts that would replace those I lost. When you took my mother,

I thought the hollow in my world would never be replaced. When you took my

dad, I worried I could withstand the hurt never imagining you would replace those

with a partner and soul mate. It was beyond my vision, but you knew and provided

the void with a stronger and younger replacement. Never in all my imagination

would I dream of a maiden let alone a princess. The enemies that would do me

harm you protected my every move. You replaced a small family with a large

village of friends and now family. My Dreams were small at best, and I was

continent with little and you gave me much. I have soared with the eagles. I have

dined with the Chiefs, the greatest of leaders.

Dan went on with his prayers and as requested by tradition he spent the day

in prayer and returned to the village and was welcomed by a large crowd waiting

for his arrival. One of the first questions asked was what did you do with Nuzzle

while you prayed? Great Eagle told me that although he is still a puppy, he laid on

his belly with his head on his paws and slept through it all. Just maybe he was

talking to his god while I talked with mine.

The sweat lodge is completed, and the Chief would like to join us on this

first morning with your acceptance. Of course, Jaw we shall enjoy the heat together

and perhaps melt into one. I hope that don’t happen Great Eagle or Mary will not

be thrilled over that.

66

The next morning Dan got his firsthand knowledge of how a sweat box wore

a man out. The heat was almost more than Dan could stand, had it not been for

others he would have gotten out and never returned but he could not bear the

ridicule of leaving so he withstood the heat and stayed. Another thing he was not

sure if his climbing out of the sweat box would prevent his joining with Mary so he

promised himself he would die before he would leave this heat. Maybe that was the

thinking it took to allow him to continually absorb the heat, but he managed to fill

that obligation and complete this cleaning of the body all the way to the bones.

Well Great Eagle it looks like your future will be with a Ute Indian Princess

Jaw said as they were looking out over the village while walking with Nuzzle and

taking the opportunity of being alone again. I would never have expected such a

thing joining with a woman and then having her be a princess was not even in my

wildest imagination. I never thought she would give up her family here to join me

on my visions for travel. Well Great Eagle when a woman really cares for a man

she will go or do whatever is necessary to be with him that is proven in history.

Tomorrow night at this time you will be allowed to join her in the robes and

the ceremony teepee has been completed and is far enough away from others that

we will not have to hear her cry because you are not capable of satisfying her.

Brother judge me not by your experiences, I am sure my appetite for her will show

me to be the leader of the pack. I am sure I will be able to full fill my duties even

though I have never ventured on this trail before. I go to bed each night in a

blanket but I wake up in a tee pee so it should be an easy task to perform.

Great Eagle your imagination is limitless, but your pleasures shall be

limited, good luck my friend. Let us return to the village and I shall share you

humor with our friends, and I will strive to keep Nuzzle with me and not allow him

to be your excuse for failure with Mary. Jaw, you speak of my imagination when

you are in a mindless dark forest. The ants have eaten your thoughts and the

squirrels have buried what was left of them. When we return to your village Nuzzle

will weigh 200 pounds and have two of my sons riding upon his back. If you are

gone that long, I hope you can still see and are able to walk. Will you remember

me, that long Great Eagle?

As the sun rise touched the village the Chief and visitors who had been

called by runners of all directions to watch the Great Eagle joined with the Princess

of importance to start a new life together. Decorations were abundant everywhere

food was in colorful dishes everywhere you looked. The ladies wore the finest

dresses and had many colorful ornaments in their hair. The warriors were lined up

67

shoulder to shoulder and held ornaments of war to signify the strength of the

village in keeping rite secret. The children were allowed to watch at their mothers’

feet and the old men were gave front seats at the foot of the many Chiefs.

Rare were the rituals of this size expressed so openly with so many in

attendance. Mary’s parents had been killed in the raid on the village, so she had

only her relatives to share her happiness, and many had traveled several days to

attend and watch this great event.

Dan’s fame along with Mary’s famous family leadership had created a

celebration that was holy and respectful of those in attendance. The large crowd

was proof of this and with the added Chiefs of many villages the magnitude of the

joining was felt by all. The celebration started at sunrise with a prayer to all Gods

of the North, East, South and West and included the sun Gods and Gods Dan had

never heard of.

Dan did not lay eyes upon Mary the hole day through he wondered where

she was and when he would be with her. Finally, when he was to be united, he

stood at the head of the long line of family and friends and as he turned toward Jaw

to ask where Mary was, he looked and saw her approaching from between a long

line of women and she was walking with Chief Yogi.

Never in his wildest dreams was he prepared for what his eyes beheld. Mary

was dressed in a pure white leather dress with tassels across the bottom which was

at her knees. The tassels hung around the bottom and below were knee high boots

that were also white leather with bright stones on the front and black tassels

hanging from the tops of the boots. The top of the boots had a black belt

surrounding the boots with a silver edge giving the boots a breathtaking beauty.

The white leather dress was pulled tight across a very small set of hips with curves

that drew the eyes. Across the belly of this awesome creature was a black leather

belt which was mink perhaps, but the hide was short hair and jet black making the

dress a deeper white. The top of the dress and across her breast were turquoise of a

sky-blue color in a pattern of a sun surrounding a large bright red stone the size of

the palm of your hand. Mary’s hair hung down dark black as a Ravens wing.

Flashing with the darkness of night and yet bright as anything ever viewed. Upon

her ears were thin silver earrings shaped as the cross of Jesus which shown across

the distance to me.

Mary’s eyes were black as coal and her eye lashes longer than I had

remembered them. It took me several moments to breathe again; how could such

68

an incredibly beautiful women been kept away from others long enough for me to

meet and Mary such a princess. The rest of the ceremony could have gone on for

two days or two minutes I am not sure, and I cannot remember try as I will. I do

know that never in the world has any woman been entitled to wear white as she did

that day. Without a doubt there was not one person in the whole village that did not

envy me at that moment. The memory will last forever of that bright white dress

with that jet black hair and the smile of pure love.

The joining was a short part of the hole celebration which had continued all

day and as the sun set that evening Dan and Mary were taken by many to their

private location and with a jovial parting left to share their first time together alone.

After entering the lodge Dan pulled the flap down into the doorway and tied

it to prevent anyone entering without acknowledgement. As he turned to Mary, he

was suddenly aware of Nozzle’s howling and yapping at the entrance. He has

never been prevented from joining me and Jaw said he would keep him entertained

for a few days but Nuzzle must have found a way of avoiding him and snuck out to

find us and to be honest I am not sure it was me that he came looking for you seem

to have a great influence on him. We’ll let him in Dan, he will not tell anyone of

your ambitions or expectations and if you do not, he will stay out there and tell the

whole village of our pleasures.

Great one, mate, Dan, Great Eagle what do you wish me to call you from

this time on? Call me by the name my mother gave me, Dan, as you have. Dan, do

you know that now you are a part of this village and as such you are also a Ute

Indian accepted and a part of our family? I had not thought of that, but does it

matter? If you have not heard, you will be allowed to set in the healing and the

other medicine counsels. When the wise ones receive voices from the ones that

have gone on to another world you will be allowed to hear when they speak of

those voices. To my beliefs no white man has ever been allowed to attend these

counsels. Am I free to attend or is it my obligation to attend? Why do you ask me

this? Because part of what you are saying I do not want to attend I believe that my

God would not want me to receive this knowledge, or he would give it to me. That

would be a subject we could speak of but if we are to leave would it matter?

Dan, I have agreed with all you have offered and all that you have ask now I

would ask you something if I would take kindly if you were to grant me. What

would that be my special Princess? I would ask that we return as often as possible

to allow our friends and family to see us and that our children could unite with

their past friends. I would never decline you or my children anything that would

69

destroy that memory. It would be good if they should be with them often to

understand where they came from and always know of their beginnings.

Mary, as we grow together, I pray we will grow spiritually as well and

together I truly believe our travels will take us where God has planned for us to go.

Dan, you will father three sons and two daughters that will be strong and take us

through many trails and adventures in the future. How can you say this Mary, how

can you make such a statement? My mother had the gift, and her mother had the

gift so that we could see things that had not happened, but we knew they would be.

It is not easy for one who has never had the gift or been around one who has but

sometimes things just appear in my head, and I know they will be. How many

years have you had these dreams or whatever you call them? I have known of

things to be sense I was a little girl like I knew that you were to be my man even

before I saw you. I knew you were on your way and that you would be a strong

father and a great leader for me and my people.

Wow! Mary, this is going to take me a little time adjusting and coming to

grips with what I have learned. I will have to think I will have to pray and then

perhaps I will be able to understand and accept this as part of life. Can you look

into the future any time you want, or do they just appear in your sleep? I do not

know how to make them happen because I have never tried to bring them or maybe

I have not ask for them. I have spoken to my mother about these things, and she

has told me to accept them and not question the great creator or his ability to give

gifts to us.

Mary our God or creator as you call him tells us that anything we ask shall

be gave to us, but I knew not of this gift, and it is amazing that one could have such

an ability and to know these things could be a real problem if one thinks about it. If

I knew the enemy was waiting, I would not travel in that direction and if I never

met the enemy, I would not grow the strength to fight. Do you see we would avoid

the conflict and that would be what gave us the strength to fight. We grow strong

by problems and if we knew to avoid all problems that would be a problem. I can

get dizzy trying to think of the things that I should not even be aware of. Just on

the tip of the subject I think I would rather not know and be surprised than to know

and worry it was coming. But then I don’t have that option, so it is not something I

need to worry about. Tell me Mary, will my daughters be pretty like you? No

mother would say she was prettier than her daughters because she would see them

through the eyes of love not as a stranger would.

70

Tell me, is there anything else that you see that I should know of? Well only

that you are going to be used soon to find where our animals are located and where

we must go to hunt. I can see where that could be a gift to your people knowing

where to go and not have to hunt to find them. Also, the cold of the season is

coming on and we do not want to leave before the warmth of the summer is before

  1. Nuzzle will grow and be a help in our adventures also.

Dan, without your knowledge your mother named your sons. They will be

known by your names Adam will be the first son and he will grow strong; David

will be the second son and he will not be as large a man as Adam but will be

known for his strength. Last of all the sons will be Soloman and he will be wise

beyond most, and he will be a leader of men.

We will travel and you will save many people and our journey will be told

by many for years to come. The kite will only be a small story in your destiny, but

everyone will hear and tell others which will tell others and it shall be repeated for

many generations.

This is not the ending but the beginning of a great adventure.

Menu

  • Home
  • About
  • Blog
  • Contact Verl Personally
  • Why We Donate

Recent Posts

  • About Time
  • Lifes meaning
  • Educational Aid
  • Words of wisdom
  • what shall it be

Recent Comments

No comments to show.

Archives

  • May 2026
  • April 2026
  • March 2026
  • February 2026
  • January 2026
  • December 2025
  • November 2025
  • October 2025
  • September 2025

Categories

  • Blog
  • Books

The Great Eagle Book One (Translate)

The Great Eagle Book Two (Translate)

Great Eagle Book Three (NEW Translate)

It Shall Come to Pass (Translate)

Post Views: 217
©2026 π•π•–π•£π•βœπ•€ π•Žπ• π•£π•π••